Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 415

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 21 / 210 – Model B

Maintenance Manual

GFZ-62705EN/03 October 1997


GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication

Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory


with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

PowerMotion is a trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

©Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.


All Rights Reserved.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

This section describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units. It is essential that these precautions
be observed by users to ensure the safe operation of machines equipped with a CNC unit (all descriptions in this
section assume this configuration).
CNC maintenance involves various dangers. CNC maintenance must be undertaken only by a qualified
technician.
Users must also observe the safety precautions related to the machine, as described in the relevant manual supplied
by the machine tool builder.
Before checking the operation of the machine, take time to become familiar with the manuals provided by the
machine tool builder and FANUC.

Contents

1. DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–2

2. WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO CHECK OPERATION . . s–3

3. WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–4

4. WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–5

5. WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–6

s–1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–62705EN/03

1 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the maintenance personnel (herein referred
to as the user) and preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warnings and
Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a
Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING

Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION

Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE

The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

 Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s–2
B–62705EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

2 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES RELATED TO


CHECK OPERATION

WARNING

1. When checking the operation of the machine with the cover removed
(1) The user’s clothing could become caught in the spindle or other components, thus
presenting a danger of injury. When checking the operation, stand away from the machine
to ensure that your clothing does not become tangled in the spindle or other components.
(2) When checking the operation, perform idle operation without workpiece. When a
workpiece is mounted in the machine, a malfunction could cause the workpiece to be
dropped or destroy the tool tip, possibly scattering fragments throughout the area. This
presents a serious danger of injury. Therefore, stand in a safe location when checking the
operation.
2. When checking the machine operation with the power magnetics cabinet door opened
(1) The power magnetics cabinet has a high–voltage section (carrying a mark). Never
touch the high–voltage section. The high–voltage section presents a severe risk of electric
shock. Before starting any check of the operation, confirm that the cover is mounted on
the high–voltage section. When the high–voltage section itself must be checked, note that
touching a terminal presents a severe danger of electric shock.
(2) Within the power magnetics cabinet, internal units present potentially injurious corners and
projections. Be careful when working inside the power magnetics cabinet.
3. Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the machine.
Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating correctly by performing
a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate override, or machine lock function or
by operating the machine with neither a tool nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the
correct operation of the machine may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
4. Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
5. Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation. Generally, for each
machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The appropriate feedrate varies with the
intended operation. Refer to the manual provided with the machine to determine the maximum
allowable feedrate. If a machine is run at other than the correct speed, it may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the
user.
6. When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and amount of
compensation. Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the workpiece and/or machine itself, or
injury to the user.

s–3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–62705EN/03

3 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO REPLACEMENT

WARNING

1. Always turn off the power to the CNC and the main power to the power magnetics cabinet. If
only the power to the CNC is turned off, power may continue to be supplied to the serve section.
In such a case, replacing a unit may damage the unit, while also presenting a danger of electric
shock.
2. When a heavy unit is to be replaced, the task must be undertaken by two persons. If the
replacement is attempted by only one person, the replacement unit could slip and fall, possibly
causing injury.
3. After the power is turned off, the servo amplifier and spindle amplifier may retain voltages for
a while, such that there is a danger of electric shock even while the amplifier is turned off. Allow
at least twenty minutes after turning off the power for these residual voltages to dissipate.
4. When replacing a unit, ensure that the new unit has the same parameter and other settings as the
old unit. (For details, refer to the manual provided with the machine.) Otherwise, unpredictable
machine movement could damage the workpiece or the machine itself, and present a danger of
injury.

s–4
B–62705EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4 WARNINGS AND NOTES RELATED TO PARAMETERS

WARNING

1. When machining a workpiece for the first time after modifying a parameter, close the machine
cover. Never use the automatic operation function immediately after such a modification.
Instead, confirm normal machine operation by using functions such as the single block function,
feedrate override function, and machine lock function, or by operating the machine without
mounting a tool and workpiece. If the machine is used before confirming that it operates
normally, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or workpiece,
and presenting a risk of injury.
2. The CNC and PMC parameters are set to their optimal values, so that those parameters usually
need not be modified. When a parameter must be modified for some reason, ensure that you
fully understand the function of that parameter before attempting to modify it. If a parameter
is set incorrectly, the machine may move unpredictably, possibly damaging the machine or
workpiece, and presenting a risk of injury.

s–5
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–62705EN/03

5 WARNINGS RELATED TO DAILY MAINTENANCE

WARNING

1. Memory backup battery replacement


When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

NOTE

The CNC uses batteries to preserve the contents of its memory, because it must retain data such as
programs, offsets, and parameters even while external power is not applied.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
contents of the CNC’s memory will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.6 of this manual.

s–6
B–62705EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

2. Absolute pulse coder battery replacement


When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the power to the machine (CNC) turned on,
and apply an emergency stop to the machine. Because this work is performed with the power
on and the cabinet open, only those personnel who have received approved safety and
maintenance training may perform this work.
When replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits (marked and
fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching the uncovered high–voltage circuits presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

NOTE

The absolute pulse coder uses batteries to preserve its absolute position.
If the battery voltage drops, a low battery voltage alarm is displayed on the machine operator’s panel
or CRT screen.
When a low battery voltage alarm is displayed, replace the batteries within a week. Otherwise, the
absolute position data held by the pulse coder will be lost.
To replace the battery, see the procedure described in Section 2.6 of this manual.

s–7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–62705EN/03

WARNING

3. Fuse replacement
Before replacing a blown fuse, however, it is necessary to locate and remove the cause of the
blown fuse.
For this reason, only those personnel who have received approved safety and maintenance
training may perform this work.
When replacing a fuse with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
(marked and fitted with an insulating cover).
Touching an uncovered high–voltage circuit presents an extremely dangerous electric shock
hazard.

s–8
B–62705EN/03 PREFACE

PREFACE

Description of This manual consists of following chapters.


this manual
1.DISPLAY AND OPERATION

This chapter covers those items, displayed on the screen, that are related
to maintenance. A list of all supported operations is also provided at the
end of this chapter.

2.HARDWARE

This chapter covers hardware–related items, including the hardware


configuration, connection, and NC status indicated on printed circuit
boards. A list of all units is also provided as well as an explanation of how
to replace each unit.

3.INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

This chapter describes the input/output of data, including programs,


parameters, and tool compensation data, as well as the input/output
procedures for conversational data.

4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

This chapter describes the PMC specifications, the system configuration,


and the signals used by the PMC.

5.DIGITAL SERVO

This chapter describes the servo tuning screen and how to adjust the
reference position return position.

6.AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

These chapters describe the spindle amplifier checkpoints, as well as the


spindle tuning screen.

7.TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter describes the procedures to be followed in the event of


certain problems occurring, for example, if the power cannot be turned on
or if manual operation cannot be performed. Countermeasures to be
applied in the event of alarms being output are also described.

APPENDIX

The appendix consists of a list of all alarms, a list of maintenance parts,


and boot system.
This manual does not provide a parameter list. If necessary, refer to the
separate PARAMETER MANUAL (B–62710EN) .

p–1
PREFACE B–62705EN/03

Applicable models This manual can be used with the following models. The abbreviated
names may be used.
Product Name Abbreviations Software series (Specification)

21–MB Series 21 D201(A02B–0179–H800#D201)


FANUC Series 21–MB
21 MB
21–MB Series 21 M series DDA1(A02B–0218–H501#DDA1)
FANUC Series 210–MB 210–MB Series 210 DDA1(A02B–0218–H501#DDA1)
21–TB DE01(A02B–0210–H501#DE01)
Control unit A Series 21 DE02(A02B–0210–H501#DE02)
(Control unit A)
FANUC Series 21 TB
21–TB
21–TB T series
Control unit B Series 21 DEA1(A02B–0219–H501#DEA1)
(Control unit B)
FANUC Series 210–TB Control unit B 210–TB Series 210 DEA1(A02B–0219–H501#DEA1)

NOTE
Some function described in this manual may not be applied
to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B–62702EN).

Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to MODEL B of Series 21, Series,
Series 210.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk(*).

Table 1 Related Manuals

Specification
Manual name
number
DESCRIPTIONS B–62702EN

CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–62703EN

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–62703EN–1

OPERATOR’S MANUAL FOR LATHE B–62534E

OPERATOR’S MANUAL FOR MACHINING CENTER B–62704EN

MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–62705EN *


PARAMETER MANUAL B–62710EN

MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTOR B–61803E–1


PROGRAMMING MANUAL

FAPT MACRO COMPILER (For Personal Computer) B–66102E


PROGRAMMING MANUAL

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION B–61874E–1


FOR MACHINING CENTER OPERATOR’S MANUAL

p–2
B–62705EN/03 Table of Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1

PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1

1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1


1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.1.1 Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.1 Loading of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.2 System Monitor Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2.3 Slot Status Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.4 Setting Module Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.2.5 Configuration Display of Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.2 Configuration of PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.3.3 Software Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.3.4 Module Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.3 Clearing Alarm History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.4.4 Alarm Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.1 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.2 Deletion of External Operator Messages Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.3 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.5.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.6.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.6.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.6.3 Setting The Input Signal or Output Signal to Be Recorded in The Operation History . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1.6.4 Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.6.5 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.7 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.7.2 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.8.1 Displaying Diagnostic Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.8.2 Contents Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.10 WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.10.1 Setting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.10.2 Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.10.3 Graphic of Wave Diagnosis data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.10.4 Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
1.10.5 Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1.10.6 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.11.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.11.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

c–1
Table of Contents B–62705EN/03

1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76


1.14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.15 POWER MOTION MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.15.1 Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.15.2 Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
1.15.3 Parameter Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
1.15.4 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
1.16 BIOS SETUP OF THE MMC–IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.16.1 BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.16.2 Keys Used for Operation on the Set–Up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.16.3 How to Begin the “Set–Up” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
1.16.4 How to End the “Set–Up” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1.17 BIOS SETUP OF INTELLIGENT TERMINALS 1 AND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.17.1 BIOS Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.17.2 Keys Used for Operation on the Set–Up Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.17.3 How to Begin the Set–Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
1.17.4 Details of the Set–up Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
1.17.5 How to End the Set–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

2. HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
2.1 GENERAL OF HANDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
2.2 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AND LED DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2.2.1 Main PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2.2.2 I/O Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
2.2.3 Power Supply Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
2.2.4 Option 1 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.2.5 Loader Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
2.2.6 HSSB Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
2.2.6.1 Parts layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
2.2.6.2 System block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.2.6.3 Configuration switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.2.6.4 LED display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
2.2.7 MMC–IV PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2.2.7.1 A02B–0207–C020, A02B–0207–C021, A02B–0207–C022 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2.2.7.2 A16B–2203–0180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
2.2.8 Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
2.2.9 Intelligent Terminal 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
2.3 LIST OF UNIT AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
2.3.1 Control Unit P.C.B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
2.3.2 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
2.4 HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.4.1 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.4.2 Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.5 REPLACING THE FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.5.1 Replacing the Fuses for Power Supply of Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.5.2 Replacing the Fuses for New MMC–IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.5.3 Replacing the Fuses for Intelligent Terminal 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
2.5.4 Replacing the Fuse for LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
2.6 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.6.1 Replace the Battery for Memory Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.6.2 Replacing Batteries for Separate Absolute Pulse Coder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

c–2
B–62705EN/03 Table of Contents

2.6.3 Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder (α series servo amplifier module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
2.6.4 Replacing the Battery for New MMC–IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2.6.5 Replacing the Battery for Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2.7 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2.7.1 Replacing the Fan Motor for Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2.7.2 Replacing the Fan for Intelligent Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.8 REPLACING THE LCD BACKLIGHT FOR DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.9 ADJUSTING THE FLAT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.9.1 Adjusting the Color Liquid Crystal Display and Plasma Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.9.2 How to Replace the Monochrome Liquid Crystal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
2.10 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2.12 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.13 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
2.13.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
2.13.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
2.13.3 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
2.13.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
2.13.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175


3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.2 INPUTTING/ OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
3.2.1 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
3.2.2 Outputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
3.2.3 Outputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3.2.4 Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
3.2.5 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.2.6 Outputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.2.7 Outputting Part Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
3.2.8 Inputting CNC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
3.2.9 Inputting PMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
3.2.10 Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3.2.11 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
3.2.12 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3.2.13 Inputting Part Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
3.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
3.3.1 Setting Input/Output–Related Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
3.3.2 Inputting and Outputting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
3.3.3 Inputting and Outputting Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
3.3.4 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
3.3.5 Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
3.3.6 Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200


4.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
4.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.2.1 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.2.2 Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.2.3 Address List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4.2.4 Built–in Debug Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
4.2.5 System Reserve Area of Internal Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
4.2.6 Execution Period of PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

c–3
Table of Contents B–62705EN/03

4.3 PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219


4.3.1 Display Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.3.2 PMCLAD Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
4.3.3 PMCDGN Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
4.3.4 Memory Display (M.SRCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
4.3.5 PMCPRM Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
4.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

5. DIGITAL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246


5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.2.1 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.2.2 Displaying Servo Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION (DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.3.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.4.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.4.2 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.4.3 Associated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257


6.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.1.1.1 Method A of Gear Change for Machining Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6.1.1.2 Method B of Gear Change for Machining Center(PRM 3705#2=1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6.1.1.3 For Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
6.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.1.2.1 Display method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.1.2.2 Spindle setting screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.1.2.3 Spindle tuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
6.1.2.4 Spindle monitor screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
6.1.2.5 Correspondence between operation mode and parameters on spindle tuning screen . . . . . . . 265
6.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
6.2 AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
6.2.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
6.2.1.1 Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
6.2.1.2 Calculation of S analog voltage and related parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
6.2.1.3 Tuning S analog voltage (D/A converter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

7. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.1.1 Investigating the Conditions under which Failure Occurred . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . 275
7.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.4 HANDLE OPERATION (MPG) CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
7.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.7 NO DISPLAY APPEARS AT POWER–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

c–4
B–62705EN/03 Table of Contents

7.8 ALARM 85 TO 87 (READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294


7.9 ALARM 90 (REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
7.10 ALARM 300 (REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
7.11 ALARM 301 TO 305 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER IS FAULTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.12 ALARM 306 TO 308 (ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER BATTERY IS LOW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7.13 ALARM 350 (SERIAL A PULSE CODER IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
7.14 ALARM 351 (SERIAL A PULSE CODER COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
7.15 ALARM 400 (OVERLOAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
7.16 ALARM 401 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
7.17 ALARM 404 AND 405 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED ON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
7.18 ALARM 410 (EXCESSIVE POSITION ERROR AMOUNT DURING STOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
7.19 ALRAM 411 (EXECESSIVE POSITION ERROR DURING MOVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
7.20 ALARM 414 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
7.21 ALRAM 416 (DISCONNECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
7.22 ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
7.23 ALARM 704 (SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
7.24 ALARM 749 (SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
7.25 ALARM 750 (SPINDLE SERIAL LINK CANNOT BE STARTED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
7.26 ALARM 751, 761 (SPINDLE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
7.27 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT AT CONTROL SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
7.28 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
7.29 ALARM 910 TO 913 (RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
7.30 ALARM 920 AND 921 (WATCH DOG OR RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
7.31 ALARM 924 (SERVO MODULE MOUNTING ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
7.32 ALARM 930 (CPU ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
7.33 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
7.34 ALARM 970 (NMI ALARM IN PMC CONTROL MODULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
7.35 ALARM 971 (NMI ALARM IN SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
7.36 ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
7.37 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM BY UNKNOWN CAUSE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

APPENDIX
A. ALARM LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
A.2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
A.3 SPINDLE ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

C. BOOT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368


C.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
C.2 STARTING AND EXITING FROM THE SYSTEM MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
C.2.1 Starting the System Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

c–5
Table of Contents B–62705EN/03

C.2.2 Exiting from the System Monitor (Activating the CNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
C.3 SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
C.3.1 Loading a File from a Memory Card into Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen) . . . . 372
C.3.2 Listing the Names of the Files Stored in Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen) . . . . . . . 374
C.3.3 Deleting a File from Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA DELETE Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
C.3.4 Outputting a File, Stored in Flash Memory, to a Memory Card (SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen) . . . 376
C.3.5 Backing up SRAM Data to a Memory Card and Subsequently Restoring Data from a Memory Card
(SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
C.3.6 Deleting a File from a Memory Card (MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
C.3.7 Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
C.4 ERROR MESSAGES AND CORRESPONDING CORRECTIVE ACTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384


D.1 OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
D.2 DISTINCTION OF SUPPORTED CARD AND UNSUPPORTED CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
D.3 RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
D.3.1 Standard of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
D.3.2 Kind of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
D.3.3 Method of Format of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
D.3.4 File Operation in Flash Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
D.3.5 The Capacity of Flash Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
D.3.6 Notice when Flash Memory Card is Formatted with CardPro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
D.3.7 When Flash Memory Card Formatted with BOOT SYSTEM is Used with Each Company Device . . 388
D.3.8 When Flash Memory Card Formatted with Each Company Device is Used with BOOT SYSTEM . . 388
D.3.9 Names and Function of Memory Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
D.4 OPERATING OF MEMORY CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
D.4.1 Connection of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
D.4.2 Disconnection of Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
D.5 BATTERY CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
D.5.1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
D.5.2 Battery Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
D.5.3 Procedure of Battery Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

c–6
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1 DISPLAY AND OPERATION

This chapter describes how to display various screens by the function


keys. The screens used for maintenance are respectively displayed.

1.1 FUNCTION KEYS AND SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2


1.2 SCREEN DISPLAYED IMMEDIATELY AFTER
POWER IS TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.4 ALARM HISTORY SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.5 EXTERNAL OPERATOR MESSAGES
RECORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.6 OPERATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1.7 HELP FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.8 DISPLAYING DIAGNOSTIC PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.10 WAVE FORM DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . 57
1.11 OPERATING MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.12 LIST OF OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
1.13 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED WHEN
AN OPTION IS CHANGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
1.14 WARNING SCREEN DISPLAYED
WHEN SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.15 POWER MOTION MANAGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.16 BIOS SETUP OF THE MMC–IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
1.17 BIOS SETUP OF INTELLIGENT
TERMINALS 1 AND 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

1
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.1 Operations and soft key display staturs for each function key are described
below:
FUNCTION KEYS
AND SOFT KEYS

1.1.1 To display a more detailed screen, press a function key followed by a soft
Soft Keys key. Soft keys are also used for actual operations.
The following illustrates how soft key displays are changed by pressing
each function key.
The symbols in the following figures mean as shown below :

: Indicates screens

: Indicates a screen that can be displayed by pressing a


function key(*1)

  : Indicates a soft key(*2)

  : Indicates input from the MDI panel.

  : Indicates a soft key displayed in green (or highlighted).

: Indicates the continuous menu key (rightmost soft key)(*3).

*1 Press function keys to switch between screens that are used frequently.
*2 Some soft keys are not displayed depending on the option configuration.
*3 In some cases, the continuous menu key is omitted when the 12 soft keys
type is used.

2
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

POSITION SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key POS

POS 1.

Absolute coordinate display

[ABS] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]

[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

Relative coordinate display

[REL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]

[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]

(Axis name) [EXEC]


[PTSPRE] [EXEC]

[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

Current position display

[ALL] [(OPRT)] (Axis or numeral) [PRESET]

[ORIGIN] [ALLEXE]

(Axis name) [EXEC]


[PTSPRE] [EXEC]

[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

Handle interruption

[HNDL] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]

[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

Monitor screen

[MONI] [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE] [EXEC]

[RUNPRE] [EXEC]

3
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the MEM mode

1/2
PROG 2.

Program display screen

[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH]
 (N number) [N SRH]
[REWIND]

[P TYPE]
[Q TYPE]

[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]

Program check display screen

[CHECK] [ABS] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
[REL] (O number) [O SRH]
(N number) [N SRH]
[REWIND]

[P TYPE]
[Q TYPE]

[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]

Current block display screen

[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

Next block display screen

[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

Program restart display screen

[RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

(2)(Continued on the next page)

4
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2
(2)

[FL.SDL] [PRGRM] Return to (1) (Program display)

File directory display screen

[DIR] [(OPRT)] [SELECT] (File No. ) [F SET]


[EXEC]

Schedule operation display screen

[SCHDUL] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR] [CAN]


[EXEC]

(Schedule data) [INPUT]

5
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the EDIT mode

1/2
PROG 3.

Program display

[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]

[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[DELETE] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [∼CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]

(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP]


[1–EXEC]
[EXEC]

(1)(Continued on the next page)

6
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2
(1)

Program directory display

[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program

[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]

Floppy directory display

[FLOPPY] [PRGRM] Return to the program


[DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[READ] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]

7
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the MDI mode

PROG 4.

Program display

[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

Program input screen

[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
[START] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]

Current block display screen

[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See When the soft key [BG-EDT] is pressed"

Next block display screen

[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

Program restart display screen

[RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

8
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode

5.
PROG

Program display

[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

Current block display screen

[CURRNT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

Next block display screen

[NEXT] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

Program restart display screen

[RSTR] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”

PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key PROG

in the TJOG or THDL mode

PROG 6.

Program input screen

[MDI] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]

Program directory display

[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT] See “When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed”
(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program

9
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

PROG
PROGRAM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key
(When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed in all modes)

1/2
PROG
7.
Program display

[PRGRM] [(OPRT)] [BG–END]


(O number) [O SRH]
(Address) [SRH↓]
(Address) [SRH↑]
[REWIND]

[F SRH] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[READ] [CHAIN] (The cursor moves to the end of a program.)
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[DELETE] [CAN]
(N number) [EXEC]
[EX–EDT] [COPY] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MOVE] [CRSR∼] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼CRSR]
[∼BTTM]
[ALL]
[MERGE] [∼CRSR] (O number) [EXEC]
[∼BTTM]
[CHANGE] (Address) [BEFORE]

(Address) [AFTER] [SKIP]


[1–EXEC]
[EXEC]

(1)(Continued on the next page)

10
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2
(1)

Program directory display

[LIB] [(OPRT)] [BG–EDT]


(O number) [O SRH] Return to the program

[READ] [CHAIN]
[STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]
[PUNCH] [STOP]
[CAN]
(O number) [EXEC]

Floppy directory display

[FLOPPY] [PRGRM] Return to the program


[DIR] [(OPRT)] [F SRH] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[READ] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] (Numeral) [F SET]
(Numeral) [O SET]
[STOP]
[CAN]
[EXEC]
[DELETE] (Numeral) [F SET]
[CAN]
[EXEC]

11
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

Soft key transition triggered by the


OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (T series) function key OFFSET
SETTING

1/2
OFFSET

SETTING
8.

Tool offset screen

[OFFSET] [WEAR] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


[GEOM] (Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR]
(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

[CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]

Setting screen

[SETING] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

Workpiece coordinate system setting screen

[WORK] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


(Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

Macro variables display screen

[MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]

(1)(Continued on the next page)

12
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2
(1)

Pattern data input screen

[MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT]

Software operator’s panel screen

[OPR]

Tool life management setting screen

[TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


[CLEAR] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

Y axis tool offset screen

[OFST.2] [WEAR] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


[GEOM] (Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR]
(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

[CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]

Workpiece shift screen

[WK.SHFT] [(OPRT)] (Numeral) [+INPUT]


(Numeral) [INPUT]

Chuck/tailstock barrier setting screen

[BARRIER] [(OPRT)] (Numeral) [INPUT]


(Numeral) [+INPUT]
[SET]

B axis tool offset screen

[OFST.B]

13
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

Soft key transition triggered by the


OFFSET/SETTING SCREEN (M series) function key OFFSET
SETTING

1/2
OFFSET

SETTING 9.

Tool offset screen

[OFFSET] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

[CLEAR] [ALL]
[WEAR]
[GEOM]
[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]
[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]

Setting screen

[SETING] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

Workpiece coordinate system setting screen

[WORK] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


(Axis name and numeral) [MEASUR]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

Macro variables display screen

[MACRO] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


(Axis name) [INP.C.]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

[PUNCH]

(1)(Continued on the next page)

14
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

2/2
(1)

Pattern data input screen

[MENU] [(OPRT)] (Number) [SELECT]

Software operator’s panel screen

[OPR]

Tool life management setting screen

[TOOLLF] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


[CLEAR] [CAN]
[EXEC]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

15
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

SYSTEM SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key SYSTEM

1/3
SYSTEM 10.

Parameter screen

[PARAM] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]


[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]

[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]

Diagnosis screen

[DGNOS] [(OPRT)] (Number) [NO SRH]

PMC screen

[PMC] [PMCLAD] [SEARCH] [TOP]


[BOTTOM]
[SRCH]
[W–SRCH]
[N–SRCH]

[F–SRCH]
[ADRESS]/[SYMBOL]
[TRIGER] [TRGON]
[TRGOFF]
[START]

[DUMP] [SEARCH]

[DPARA]/[NDPARA] [BYTE]
[TRGSRC] [WORD]
[INIT] [D.WORD]
[WINDOW] [DIVIDE]
[CANCEL]
[DELETE]
[SELECT]
[WIDTH]
(1) (2) (3)
(Continued on the next page)

16
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

(1) (2) (3) 2/3


[DUMP] [SEARCH]

[BYTE]
[WORD]
[D.WORD]
[DRARA]/[NDPARA]
[PMCDGN] [TITLE]
[STATUS] [SEARCH]
[ALARM]
[TRACE] [T.DISP]/[TRCPRM]
[EXEC]
[PMCPRM] [TIMER]
[COUNTR]
[KEEPRL]
[DATA] [G.DATA] [C.DATA]
[G.CONT] [G–SRCH]
[NO.SRH] [SEARCH]
[INIT]
[SETTING] [YES]/[MANUAL]/[ROM]
[NO]/[AUTO]/[RAM]
[STOP]/[RUN]
[I/O] [EXEC]
[CANCEL]
(No.)

[SPEED] [INPUT]
[INIT]
[MDI]/[ROM]

System configuration screen

[SYSTEM]

Pitch error compensation screen

[PITCH] [(OPRT)] (No.) [NO SRH]


[ON:1]
[OFF:0]
(Numeral) [+INPUT]
(Numeral) [INPUT]

[READ] [CAN]
[EXEC]

[PUNCH] [CAN]
[EXEC]

(4)
(Continued on the next page)

17
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

(4) 3/3

Servo parameter screen

[SV.PRM] [SV.SET] [ON:1]


[(OPRT)]
[SV.TUN] [OFF:0]
(Numeral) [INPUT]
[TRACE]
[SV.TRC] [(OPRT)]
[TRNSF]

Spindle parameter screen

[SP.PRM] [SP.SET] [ON:1]


[(OPRT)]
[SP.TUN] [OFF:0]
[SP.MON] [INPUT]

Waveform diagnosis screen

[W.DGNS] [W.PRM]
[W.GRPH] [START]
[TIME→]
[←TIME]
[H–DOBL]
[H–HALF]

[START]
[CH–1↑]
[CH–1↓]
[V–DOBL]
[V–HALF]

[START]
[CH–2↑]
[CH–2↓]
[V–DOBL]
[V–HALF]

18
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

MESSAGE SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key MESSAGE

MESSAGE 11.

Alarm display screen

[ALARM]

Message display screen

[MSG]

Alarm history screen

[HISTRY] [(OPRT)] [CLEAR]

HELP SCREEN Soft key transition triggered by the function key HELP

HELP
12.

Alarm detail screen

[ALARM] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]

Operation method screen

[OPERAT] [(OPRT)] [SELECT]

Parameter table screen

[PARAM]

19
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

GRAPHIC SCREEN (T series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH

Tool path graphics

GRAPH
13.
Mode 0

Tool path graphics

[G.PRM] [(OPRT)] [NORMAL]

[GRAPH] [(OPRT)] [ERASE]

[ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [ACT]


[HI/LO]

GRAPHIC SCREEN (M series) Soft key transition triggered by the function key GRAPH

Tool path graphics

GRAPH

Tool path graphics

[PARAM]

[EXEC] [(OPRT)] [AUTO]


[STSRT]
[STOP]
[REWIND]
[CLEAR]

[ZOOM] [(OPRT)] [EXEC]


[←]
[→]
[POS]
[↑]
[↓]

20
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.2
SCREEN DISPLAYED
IMMEDIATELY AFTER
POWER IS TURNED ON

1.2.1 Series 21 stores the following software in FLASH–ROM.


Loading of Software (1) CNC control software
(2) Macro executer software
(3) Digital servo software
(4) PMC control software
When a Series 21 unit that uses A16B–2201–0721 as its main board is used,
software (1) above is first loaded into DRAM for execution at power–up.
When a Series 21/210 unit that uses A16B–2202–0900 as its main board is
used, software (1) is executed in the flash ROM, so that the screen display
begins from the slot status display described in Section 1.2.3.
In the Series 21, which uses the A16B–3200–0020 main board, (1) is
executed on the EPROM. The screens of Section 1.2.4 and subsequent
sections are displayed immediately after the power is turned on.
Loading screen to DRAM

LOADING BASIC TO DRAM. Blink


character

1.2.2 When the software is loaded in DRAM, data in FLASH–ROM is checked


and if trouble occurs, the System monitor screen is displayed. If the
System Monitor Screen
System monitor screen is displayed, FLASH–ROM module or main
board may be faulty.
For details of the system monitor screen, see Appendix C, ”Boot System.”

SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU

1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING


2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5. SRAM DATA BACKUP
6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7. NENORY CARD FORMAT
9. END
***MESSAGE***
SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY

[SELECT] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]

21
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.2.3 Types of PCBs mounted on the slots are displayed.


Slot Status Display If a hardware trouble or an incorrect mounting is found, this screen is
displayed.

D Slot state screen

SLOT CONFIGURATION DISPLAY

0: 01B34000 0:
1: 30464202 1:
2: 00504303 2:
3: 3:
4: 4:
5: 5:
… …

Physical slot number (2ndary side)


Module ID of the PCB mounted (*1)
Physical slot number (primary side)

*1) Module ID of PCB


ff j j ∆ ∆

Internal slot number


Module function (software ID)
Type of PCB (module ID)

D Module ID ID Name
B3 21–MB (DDA1 series)/210–MB main P.C.B.(A16B–2201–0721)
21–TB (control unit B)/210–TB P.C.B.(A16B–2202–0900)
B5 Loader control board
94 MMC–IV P.C.B.
AA HSSB interface board
3F Option 1 board (for remote buffer)
82 21–MB (D201 series) main P.C.B.
_ 21–TB (control unit A main P.C.B. (A16B–3200–0020))

D Software ID 40 : Main P.C.B.


5E : MMC–IV (HSSB interface)
4A : Remote buffer
53 : Loader control

22
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.2.4
Setting Module Screen

END : Setting
DDA1–01 completed

SLOT 01 (01B3) : END Space :


SLOT 02 (0050) : Setting incom-
pleted
Module ID
Slot number

1.2.5
Configuration Display
of Software

CNC control
DDA1–01 software

SERVO : 9060–25 Digital servo


OMM : yyyy–yy ROM
PMC : zzzz–zz
Order made
macro/macro
compiler

PMC

23
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.3 After the system has been installed correctly, you can find the PCBs
installed and the softwares integrated on the system configuration screen.
SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION
SCREEN
1.3.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key.
Display Method
(2) Press soft key [SYSTEM], then the system configuration screen is
displayed.
(3) The system configuration screen is composed of three screens and
PAGE
each of them can be selected by the page key PAGE
.

1.3.2
Configuration of PCBs
D Screen
Software series of mod-
ule with CPU

SYSTEM CONFIG (SLOT) PAGE01

SLOT MODULE ID SERIES VERSION


00 01B3 : 40 DDA1 0006 Software version
08 1194 : 5E of module with
CPU

Software ID (type)

Module ID
Slot No.
(80 to 8F is 2nd side)
D Module ID ID Name
B3 21–MB (DDA1 series)/210–MB main P.C.B.(A16B–2201–0721)
21–TB (control unit B)/210–TB main P.C.B.(A16B–2202–0900)
B5 Loader control board
94 MMC–IV P.C.B.
AA HSSB interface board
3F Option 1 board (for remote buffer)
82 21–MB (D201 series) main P.C.B.
_ 21–TB (control unit A main P.C.B. (A16B–3200–0020))

D Software ID 40 : Main P.C.B.


5E : MMC–IV (HSSB interface)
4A : Remote buffer
53 : Loader control

24
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.3.3
Kind of software
Software Configuration Software series
Screen
SYSTEM CONFIG(SOFTWARE)

SYSTEM DDA1 0001 Software version


BASIC Software
configuration
SERVO 9060 0001
PMC 4084 0001
LADDER I/OB 0001 Character written on
MACRO BBBB bbbb PMC title screen
GRAPHIC 600L 0001
BOOT 60M2 0001
Character written
on macro compiler
and on CAP.

1.3.4 Configuration of the modules displayed on PCB.


(1)
Module Configuration
Screen SYSTEM CONFIG(MODULE)

SLOT 00 MAIN CPU BOARD (2)


FLASH ROM MODULE : 2MB
SPINDLE LSI & SRAM : POS+512KB
MATRIX DI/DO : –––
PMC MODULE : PMP+SLC
CRTC MODULE : 9ICRT
SERVO AXIS MODULE : 1/2 +3/4
H–SKIP DI & ANALOG I/O : MOUNTED (4)
GRAPHIC MODULE : MOUNTED

(3)

EDIT **** *** *** 16:53:44


[ PARMA ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ ]

Contents of display
(1) Slot number (The number is corresponding to PCB configuration
screen)
(2) Type of PCB mounted
(3) Type of mounted module or hardware
(4) Mounted or not, or type of module
Pressing the PAGE key displays the system configuration screen of
other PCBs.

NOTE
The displayed information varies with the model and
software series.

25
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

Screen for 21–TB (control unit A)

SYSTEM CONFIG (HARDWARE)

MAIN BOARD TYPEA


FROM 256KB
RAM 512KB
PMC BIT+SLC
CRTC 9”CRT
SERVO 1/2 MOUNTED
SERVO 3/4 MOUNTED
SIC MOUNTED
DI/DO 96/64 Mounted or not, or
type of module

Hardware configuration

26
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.4
ALARM HISTORY
SCREEN

1.4.1 Alarms generated in the NC are recorded. The latest 25 alarms generated
General are recorded. The 26th and former alarms are deleted.

1.4.2 (1) Press MESSAGE


key .
Screen Display (2) Press soft key [HISTRY] and an alarm history screen is displayed.
PAGE
(3) Other pages are displayed by PAGE
or key.

ALARM HISTORY O1234 N12345

97/04/18 20:56:26
506 OVERTRAVEL : +X
97/04/18 19:58:11
000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:52:45
000 TURN OFF POWER
97/04/18 19:48:43
300 APC ALARM : X–AXIS ZERO RETURN REQUEST
97/04/18 18:10:10
507 OVERTRAVEL : +B

[ ALARM ][ MSG ][ HISTRY ][ ][(OPRT)]

1.4.3 (1) Press soft key [(OPRT)].


Clearing Alarm History (2) Press soft key [(CLEAR], then the alarm history is cleared.

1.4.4 When an external alarm (No. 1000 to 1999) or a macro alarm (No. 3000
Alarm Display to 3999) is output, the alarm history function can record both the alarm
number and message if so specified in the following parameter. If
recording of the message is not set or if no message is input, only an
external alarm or macro alarm is displayed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 EAH

[Data type] Bit


#3 (EAH) The alarm history function:
0 : Does not record the messages output with external alarms or macro
alarms.
1 : Records the messages output with external alarms or macro alarms.

27
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.5 This function enables the saving of external operator messages as a


record.
EXTERNAL The record can be viewed on the external operator message history screen.
OPERATOR
MESSAGES
RECORD

1.5.1 (1) Press the MESSAGE function key.


Screen Display
(2) Press the rightmost soft key .
(3) Press the [MSGHIS] soft key.
PAGE

(4) To display the previous or subsequent screen, press the PAGE


or
key.

MESSAGE HISTORY O1234 N12345


Date, time, and page → 97/04/01 17:25:00 PAGE : 1
Message number → No. ****

Display range Up to 255 characters

MEM STRT MTN FIN ALM 17:25:00


[ ][ MSGHIS ][ ][ ][ ]

1.5.2
Deletion of External (1) The recorded external operator message can be deleted by setting the
MMC bit (bit 0 of parameter 3113) to 1.
Operator Messages Pressing the [CLEAR] soft key erases all the records of the external
Record operator message.
(2) The MS1 and MS0 bits (bits 7 and 6 of parameter 3113) specify the
number of records to be displayed on the external operator message
history screen. When the bits are changed, all external operator
message records retained up to that point are erased.

28
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.5.3
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 MS1 MS0 MHC

#0 (MHC) The records of an external operator message:


0 : Cannot be erased.
1 : Can be erased.
#6, #7 (MS0,MS1) These bits set the number of characters to be retained in each record of an
external operator message, as well as the number of records, as shown in
the following table:
Number of characters in
MS1 MS0 Number of records
each record
0 0 255 8
0 1 200 10
1 0 100 18
1 1 50 32

* An external operator message of up to 255 characters can be specified.


Combining the MS1 bit and MS0 bit (bits 7 and 6 of parameter No.
3113) selects the number of records by limiting the number of
characters to be retained as the record of an external operator message.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OMH

#2 (OMH) The external operator message history screen is:


0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.

NOTE
After setting this parameter, briefly turn the power off, then
on again.

1.5.4 When the number of an external operator message is specified, the system
Notes starts updating the records of the specified message. The system
continues to perform update until another external operator message is
specified or until an instruction to delete the records of the external
operator message is specified.

29
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.6 This function displays the key and signal operations performed by the
operator upon the occurrence of a fault or the output of an alarm, together
OPERATION with the corresponding alarms.
HISTORY This function records the following data:
(1) MDI key operations performed by the operator
(2) Status changes (ON/OFF) of input and output signals (selected signals
only)
(3) Details of alarms
(4) Time stamp (date and time)

1.6.1
Parameter Setting #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3106 OHS OHD

[Data type] Bit


OHD The operation history screen is:
0 : Not displayed.
1 : Displayed.

NOTE
For the system software of the following series, the
operation history screen is always displayed, regardless of
the setting of this parameter:
– 21–TB (control unit A)
– 21–MB: Software series D201

OHS Operation history sampling is:


0 : Performed.
1 : Not performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 OPH

NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Data type] Bit


OPH Specifies whether the operation history function is to be enabled. Note
that the usage of this parameter varies with the CNC model and system
software series. Set the parameter according to the following table:
Model (software series)
Value 21–MB 21–MB 21–TB 21–TB
(series D201) (series DDA1) (control unit A) (control unit B)
(series DEA1)
0 Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled
1 Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled

30
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

3122 Interval at which the clock time is recorded in the operation history

[Data type] Word

[Units of data] Minutes

[Valid data range] 0 to 1439

The clock time is recorded to the operation history at specified intervals.


If zero is set as the interval, ten minutes is assumed. The time is recorded
only when data is recorded within the corresponding interval.

1.6.2
Screen Display
D Displaying the operation
(1) Press the SYSTEM
function key.
history
(2) Press the continue menu key [ ]. The [OPEHIS] [(OPRT)] soft key
are displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key twice. The operation history screen is
displayed.

OPERATION HISTORY O1234 N12345


Page : 123
No.DATA No.DATA No.DATA
01 97/06/03 11 F0000.7↑ 21 F0001.0↓
02 08:40:00 12 F0000.5↑ 22 <POS>
03 <DELETE> 13 F0001.0↑ 23 <PROG>
04 F0000.6↑ 14 F0000.5↓ 24 <RESET>
05 MEM 15 P/S0010 25 EDIT
06 G0009.0↑ 16 97/06/03 26 O
07 G0009.1↑ 17 09:27:49 27 1
08 G0009.2↑ 18 <PROG> 28 2
09 ST↑ 19 <RESET> 29 3
10 ST↓ 20 F0000.7↓ 30 4

EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52


[ TOP ][ BOTTOM ][ ][ ][PG.SRH]

On the operation history screen, the soft keys are configured as shown
below:

⇒[ ] [ PARAM ] [ DGNOS ] [ PMC ] [ SYSTEM ] [ (OPE) ] [ ]


ãpush
[ ] [ W.DGNS ] [ ] [ ] [ OPEHIS ] [ (OPE) ] [ ]
ã push
[ ] [ OPEHIS ] [ SG–SEL ] [ ] [ ] [ (OPE) ] [ ]
ãpush
[ ] [ TOP ] [ BOTTOM ] [ ] [ ] [ PG.SRH ] [ ]

31
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

(4) To display the next part of the operation history, press the page down
PAGE

key . The next page is displayed.

To display the interface between two pages, press cursor key or

. The screen is scrolled by one row. On a display unit with 12


soft keys, pressing the cursor key scrolls the screen by half a page.
These soft keys can also be used:
1) Pressing the [TOP] soft key displays the first page (oldest data).
2) Pressing the [BOTTOM] soft key displays the last page (latest
data).
3) Pressing the [PG.SRH] soft key displays a specified page.
Example) By entering 50 then pressing the [PG.SRH] key, page 50 is
displayed.

Data displayed on the operation history screen


(1) MDI keys
Address and numeric keys are displayed after a single space.
Soft keys are displayed in square brackets ([ ]).
Other keys (RESET/INPUT, for example) are displayed in angle
brackets (< >).
A key pressed at power–on is displayed in reverse video.
1) Function key: <POS>, <PROG>, <OFFSET>, etc.
2) Address/numeric key: A to Z, 0 to 9, ; (EOB), +, –, (, etc.
3) Page/cursor key: <PAGE ↑>, <CUR ↓>, <CUR ←>
4) Soft key: [SF1], [SF2], etc.
5) Other key: <RESET>, <CAN>, etc.
6) Key pressed at power–on: <RESET>
(2) Input and output signals
General signals are displayed in the following format:
G0000.7↑

The ↑ mark indicates that the signal is


turned on.
The ↓ mark indicates that the signal is
turned off.
Indicates the bit.

Indicates the address.

Some signals are indicated by their symbol names.

SBK ↑ (Indicates that the single block switch is turned on.)

32
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Mode selection signals and rapid traverse override signals are displayed
as indicated below:
Input signal
Name displayed
MD1 ND2 MD4 REF DNC1
0 0 0 0 0 MDI
1 0 0 0 0 MEM
1 0 0 0 1 RMT
0 1 0 0 0 NOMODE
1 1 0 0 0 EDT
0 0 1 0 0 H/INC
1 0 1 0 0 JOG
1 0 1 1 0 REF
0 1 1 0 0 TJOG
1 1 1 0 0 THND

Input signal
Name displayed
ROV1 ROV2
0 0 R 100%
1 0 R 50%
0 1 R 25%
1 1 R F0%

(3) NC alarms
NC alarms are displayed in reverse video.
P/S alarms, system alarms, and external alarms are displayed together
with their numbers.
For other types of alarms, only the alarm type is displayed. (No details
are displayed.)
Example) P/S0050, SV_ALM, S_APC_ALM

(4) Time stamp (date and time)


The following time data (date and time) is recorded:
1) Date and time of power–on
2) Date and time of power–off
3) Date and time when an NC alarm occurs
4) The clock time is recorded at predetermined intervals, together
with each new calendar day.
1) The power–on time is displayed as shown below:
97/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day
09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second
2) The power–off time and the time when an NC alarm occurred are
displayed in reverse video.
97/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day
09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second
If a system alarm occurs, the date and time are not recorded.

33
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

3) At predetermined intervals, the clock time is displayed in reverse


video. Set the interval in minutes in parameter No. 3122. If zero
is set, the time is stamped at ten–minute intervals.
09:15:30 ==== Hour:Minute:Second
Each new calendar day is displayed in reverse video.
97/01/20 ==== Year/Month/Day

NOTE
The clock time is recorded for a specified interval only when
data is stored within that interval.

D Input signal or output


(1) P ress the SYSTEM function key.
signal to be recorded in
the operation history (2) Press the continuous menu key . The [OPEHIS] (operation
history) soft key is displayed.
(3) Press the [OPEHIS] soft key, then press the [SG–SEL] soft key. The
operation history signal selection screen is displayed.

OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000

No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL


01 X0000 00001000 11 G0000 00000001
02 X0004 10000000 12 G0004 00000011
03 X0008 00001100 13 G0008 00000111
04 X0009 00111000 14 G0003 00001111
05 X0012 00001111 15 G0043 01100000
06 Y0000 01000000 16 ********
07 Y0004 00110000 17 ********
08 Y0007 00011100 18 ********
09 Y0008 00011100 19 ********
10 Y0010 00011100 20 ********
>
EDIT **** *** * * * 00:00:00
[OPEHIS] [SG–SEL] [ ] [ ] [ (OPE) ]

34
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.6.3
Setting the Input Signal (1) On the operation history signal selection screen, press the [(OPRT)]
or Output Signal to be soft key.
Recorded in the OP_HIS SIGNAL SELECT O1000 N02000
Operation History
No. ADDRES SIGNAL No. ADDRES SIGNAL
01 G0004 00000010 11 ********
02 ******** 12 ********
03 ******** 13 ********
04 ******** 14 ********
05 ******** 15 ********
06 ******** 16 ********
07 ******** 17 ********
08 ******** 18 ********
09 ******** 19 ********
10 ******** 20 ********
>
EDIT **** *** *** *** 00:00:00
[ ALLDEL ][ DELETE ][ ON:1 ][ OFF:0 ][ ]

(2) Press the cursor key or to position the cursor to a desired


position.
(3) Key in a signal type (X, G, F, or Y) and an address, then press the INPUT

key.
Example) G0004 INPUT

Signal address G0004 is set in the ADDRES column. The


corresponding position in the SIGNAL column is initialized to
000000000.
(4) Select the bit to be recorded.
To select all bits of the specified signal address, press the [ON:1] soft
key while the cursor is positioned to 00000000 .
To select a particular bit, position the cursor to that bit by pressing the
cursor key or , then press the [ON:1] soft key. To cancel
a selection made by pressing the [ON:1] soft key or to cancel a
previously selected signal, press the [OFF:0] soft key.
(5) Up to 20 addresses can be specified by means of this signal selection.
These addresses need not always be specified at consecutive positions,
starting from No.1.
(6) Pressing the [ALLDEL] and [EXEC] soft keys deletes all data. If the
[ALLDEL] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by pressing
the [CAN] key.
(7) To delete a selected signal address, position the cursor to the
corresponding position then press the [DELETE] and [EXEC] soft
keys. In the SIGNAL column, asterisks ******** are displayed in
place of the deleted data. In the ADDRES column, the corresponding
position is cleared.
If the [DELET] key is pressed by mistake, it can be cancelled by
pressing the [CAN] key.

35
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

(8) Pressing the return menu key causes the [OPEHIS] (OPE) soft
key to be displayed again.
D Input signals and output
signals to be recorded in
the history NOTE
1 A cross (×) indicates that a signal will not be recorded. Also,
any signal for which an address is not specified will not be
recorded, either.
2 A circle (f) indicates that a signal can be recorded.
3 A signal indicated by its symbol name will also be displayed
by its symbol name.

1. M/T addresses
MT→PMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X000 f f f f f f f f
to
X127 f f f f f f f f

PMC→CNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 f f f f f f f f
to
G003 f f f f f f f f

G004 f f f f FIN f f f

G005 f f f f TFIN SFIN f MFIN

G006 f f f f f *ABS f SRN

G007 RLSOT EXLM *FLUP f f ST STLK f

G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP f f f *IT

G009 f f f f f f f f
to
G013 f f f f f f f f

G014 f f f f f f f f

G015 f f f f f f f f
to
G018 f f f f f f f f

G019 RT f f f f f f f

36
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G020 f f f f f f f f
to
G042 f f f f f f f f

G043 f × f × × f f f

G044 f f f f f f MLK BDT1

G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2

G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 f SBK f

G047 f f f f f f f f
to
G060 f f f f f f f f

G061 f f f f f f f RGTA

G062 f f f f f f f f
to
G099 f f f f f f f f

G100 f f f f +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1

G101 f f f f f f f f

G102 f f f f –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1

G103 f f f f f f f f
to
G105 f f f f f f f f

G106 f f f f MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1

G107 f f f f f f f f

G108 f f f f MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1

G109 f f f f f f f f

G110 f f f f +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1

G111 f f f f f f f f

G112 f f f f –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1

G113 f f f f f f f f

G114 f f f f *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1

37
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G115 f f f f f f f f

G116 f f f f *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1

G117 f f f f f f f f

G118 f f f f *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1

G119 f f f f f f f f

G120 f f f f *–ED4 *–ED3 *–ED2 *–ED1

G121 f f f f f f f f
to
G125 f f f f f f f f

G126 f f f f SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1

G127 f f f f f f f f
to
G129 f f f f f f f f

G130 f f f f *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1

G131 f f f f f f f f

G132 f f f f +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1

G133 f f f f f f f f

G134 f f f f –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1

G135 f f f f f f f f
to
G255 f f f f f f f f

PMC→MT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y000 f f f f f f f f
to
Y127 f f f f f f f f

CNC→PMC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 f f f f f f f f
to
F255 f f f f f f f f

38
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.6.4 Recorded data can be output to an input/output unit connected via a


Inputting and reader/punch interface. An output record can be input from the
input/output unit.
Outputting the Set the input/output unit to be used in setting parameters No. 0020 and
Operation History Data 0100 to 0135.
To output the data, set a code in the ISO bit of a setting parameter (bit 1
of parameter No. 0020).

D Output (1) Select EDIT mode.


(2) Press the SYSTEM key, then select the operation history display screen.
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] in this
order.
The data output to the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FANUC FA Card is
stored under file name OPERATION HISTORY.

D Input (1) Select EDIT mode.


(2) Press the SYSTEM key, then select the operation history display screen.
(3) Press the soft keys [(OPRT)], , [READ], and [EXEC] in this
order.
D Output data format 1. MDI/soft key
2. Signal
3. Alarm
4. For extension (date or time)
The header and recorded operation data are output, in this order. The
operation history data is divided into four parts by identifier words. Data
other than the identifier words depends on the type.

T(identifier word)

T0 : Header
T50 : MDI/soft key
T51 : Signal
T52 : Alarm
T53 : For extension (date or time)

39
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1) Header

T 0 C O P E R A T I O N

H I S T O R Y ;
C: Data word

2) MDI/soft key

T 5 0 P 0 to 1 H * * ;

P0: Usually
P1: At power–on
H **: Key code (See the following table.)

3) Signal

T 5 1 P 0 to 6 N 0 to 255 H * * , * * ;

New data Old data


P0: X0000 and above
P2: G0000 and above
P4: Y0000 and above
P6: F0000 and above
N***: DI/DO number
H **: Signal information data (hexadecimal)

4) Alarm

T 5 2 P 0 to 10 N * * * * ;

P0: P/S No. 100


P1: P/S No. 000
P2: P/S No. 101
P3: P/S No. 0001 to 254
P4: Overtravel alarm
P5: Overheat alarm
P6: Servo alarm
P7: System alarm
P8: APC alarm
P9: Spindle alarm
P10: P/S alarm No. 5000 to 5999
P15: External alarm
N****: Alarm number (for P/S alarm, system alarm, and external alarm only)

5) For extension (date or time)

Date T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 0 D * * * * * * * * ;

Time T 5 3 P 0 to 1 E 1 D * * * * * * ;

P0: Usually
P1: At power–on
E0: Date
E1: Time
D*..*: Data Example) October 29, 1997
D 1 9 9 7 1 0 2 9

40
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Key codes (MDI/soft key)


(00H to 7FH)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Space 0 @ P

1 ! 1 A Q

2 ” 2 B R

3 # 3 C S

4 $ 4 D T

5 % 5 E U

6 & 6 F V

7 ’ 7 G W

8 ( 8 H X

9 ) 9 I Y

A ; * : J Z
(EOB)
B + K [

C ’ < L ¥

D – = M ]

E . > N

F / ? O –

41
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

(80H to FFH)
8 9 A B C D E F
0 Reset F0
*2 *2
1 MMC F1
*2 *2
2 CNC F2
*2 *2
3 F3
*2
4 Shift Insert F4
*2 *2
5 Delete F5
*2 *2
6 CAN Alter F6
*2 *2
7 F7
*2
8 Cur→ Input POS F8
*2 *2 *2 *2
9 Cur← PROG F9
*2 *2 *2
A Cur↓ Help OFFSET
*2 *2 SETTING
*2
B Cur↑ SYSTEM
*2 *2
C MESSAGE
*2
D CUSTOM
GRAPH
*1, *2
E Page↓ CUSTOM FR
*2 *2 *2
F Page↑ FL
*2 *2

*1:On the small–sized keypad, ED corresponds to the CUSTOM


GRAPH key. On a

standard keyboard, ED corresponds to the GRAPH key and EE to the


CUSTOM
key.
*2:Command key

42
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.6.5
Notes (1) While the operation history screen is displayed, no information can be
recorded to the history.
(2) An input signal having an on/off width of up to 16 msec is not recorded
in the history. Some signals are not recorded in the history. See
Appendix A.
(3) Once the storage becomes full, old data is deleted, starting from the
oldest record. Up to about 8000 key information items can be
recorded.
(4) The recorded data is retained even after the power is turned off. A
memory all clear operation, however, erases the recorded data.
(5) The operation history function cannot execute sampling when the
OHS bit (bit 7 of parameter No. 3106) is set to 1.
(6) Set the date and time on the setting screen.
(7) The time needed to input and output 6000 operation records at a rate
of 4800 baud is as follows:
Output : About 5 minutes
Input : About 2 minutes and 30 seconds
This file corresponds to a paper tape of about 180 m in length.

43
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.7
HELP FUNCTION

1.7.1 The help function displays alarm information, operation method and a
General table of contents for parameters. This function is used as a handbook.

1.7.2
Display Method

D Display of help screen


Press HELP key on any screen other than PMC screen, then a help screen
appears. (However, it is not available when PMC screen/CUSTOM
screen is displaying)

HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345

***** HELP *****


1. ALARM DETAIL
2. OPERATION METHOD
3. PARAMETER TABLE

[ALARM] [OPERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [ ]

D Help for alarm (1) When an alarm is generated, press soft key [ALARM], then a help
message of the alarm is displayed.

HELP (INITIAL MENU) O1234 N12345

NUMBER : 010
M’SAGE : IMPROPER G CODE
FUNCTION :
ALARM :
A G CODE NOT LISTED IN G–CODE TABLE
IS BEING COMMANDED
ALSO G–CODE FOR FUNCTION NOT ADDED
IS BEING COMMANDED

[ALARM] [OPERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [ (OPRT) ]

(2) Pressing soft key [OPERAT],(alarm No.), and soft key [SELECT]
in this order, a help message corresponding to the input alarm number
is displayed.

44
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

D Help for operation (1) Press [OPERAT], then a menu for operation method is displayed.
HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345

1. PROGRAM EDIT
2. SEARCH
3. RESET
4. DATA INPUT WITH MDI
5. DATA INPUT WITH TAPE
6. OUTPUT
7. INPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
8. OUTPUT WITH FANUC CASSETTE
9. MEMORY CLEAR

[ALARM] [OPRERAT] [PARAM] [ ] [(OPRT)]

(2) Press [OPERAT], (an item number) and soft key [SELECT], then an
operation method of the item is displayed.
PAGE
Pressing PAGE key PAGE
or displays another pages.

HELP (OPERATION METHOD) O1234 N12345


<<1.PROGRAM EDIT>> 1/4 Current
page/ Total
DELETE ALL PROGRAMS page
MODE :EDIT
SCREEN :PROGRAM
OPR :(0–9999) – (DELETE)

DELETE ONE PROGRAM


MODE : EDIT
SCREEN : PROGRAM
OPR :(0+PROGRAM NUMBER) – <DELETE>

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [SELECT]

D Parameter table Press soft key [PARAM], then a parameter table is displayed.
HELP (PARAMETER TABLE) O1234 N12345
1/4 Current
page/ Total
·SETTING (NO.0000~ ) page
·READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE (NO.0100~ )
·AXIS CONTROL/SETTING UNIT (NO.1000~ )
·COORDINATE SYSTEM (NO.1200~ )
·STROKE LIMIT (NO.1300~ )
·FEED RATE (NO.1400~ )
·ACCEL/DECELERATION CTRL (NO.1600~ )
·SERVO RELATED (NO.1800~ )
·DI/DO (NO.3000~ )

[ ALARM ] [OPERAT][ PARAM ] [ ][SELECT]

PAGE
Another screen can be selected by the PAGE key PAGE
or .

45
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.8
DISPLAYING
DIAGNOSTIC PAGE

1.8.1 (1) Press SYSTEM key.


Displaying Diagnostic
(2) Press soft key [DGNOS], then a diagnostic screen is displayed.
Page

1.8.2
Contents Displayed

D Causes when the


machine does not travel 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL
in spite of giving a An auxiliary function is being executed.
command 001 MOTION Travel command of cycle operation is being executed.
002 DWELL DWELL Dwell is being executed.
003 IN–POSITION CHECK
In–position check is being done.
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0%
Feedrate override is 0%.
005 INTERLOCK/START LOCK
Interlock or start lock is input.
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK
Waiting for spindle speed arrival signal.
010 PUNCHING Data is being output through reader/puncher interface.
011 READING Data is being input through reader/puncher interface.
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP
Waiting for the end of index table indexing
013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0%
Manual feedrate override is 0%.
014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP,RRW OFF
NC is in reset state.
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH
External Program Number Search External program
number search is being done
016 BACKGROUND ACTIVE
Background is being used.

46
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

D Cause of the cycle start


LED turned off 020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
021 RESET BUTTON ON
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
024 RESET ON
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL
1 1 1 1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 0

Input of emergency stop signal


Input of external reset signal
Reset button On of MDI
Input of reset & rewind
Servo alarm generation
Switching to other mode, Feed hold
Single block stop

D State of TH alarm
030 CHARACTER NUMBER TH ALARM
Position of the character that caused TH alarm.
The position is counted from the head.
031 TH DATA Data of the character that caused TH alarm.
D Detail of serial pulse
coder #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH

#0(SPH): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.


Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#1(CKA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Internal block stopped.
#2(BZA): Battery voltage became 0.
Replace the battery and set the reference position.
#3(RCA): Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Counting of feedback cable is erroneous.
#4(PHA): Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is erroneous.
#5(BLA): Battery voltage is low (warning)
#6(CSA): Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0203 DTE CRC STB PRM

#4(PRM): Parameter detected by the Digital servo is invalid.


#5(STB): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#6(CRC): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
Transferred data is erroneous.
#7(DTE): Communication failure of serial pulse coder.
There is no response for communication.

47
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

D Details of digital servo


alarm #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

#0(OFA): Overflow alarm


#1(FBA): Disconnection alarm
#2(DCA): Discharge alarm
#3(HVA): Overvoltage alarm
#4(HCA): Abnormal current alarm
#5(OVC): Over current alarm
#6(LV): Insufficient voltage alarm
#7(OVL): Overload alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0201 ALD EXP

Overload 0 – – – Motor overheat


alarm
l 1 – – – Amplifier overheat
Disconnection 1 – – 0 Built–in pulse coder (hard)
alarm
l 1 – – 1 Disconnection of separated type
pulse coder (hard)
0 – – 0 Disconnection of pulse coder
(software)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0204 OFS MCC LDA PMS

#3(PMS): Feedback is not correct due to faulty serial pulse coder C or feedback
cable.
#4(LDA): Serial pulse coder LED is abnormal
#5(MCC): Contacts of MCC of servo amplifier is melted.
#6(OFS): Abnormal current value result of A/D conversion of digital
This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC.
If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)
is set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT

#0 (MOT): The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2 (PLC): The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#3 (PLS): The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
parameter No. 2024, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#4 (DIR): The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No.
2022 (the value is other than 111 or –111).
#6 (AXS): In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside the
range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 is
specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in the
parameter are not consecutive.

48
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

D Position error amount


DGN 0300 Position error of an axis in detection unit

Feed rate [mm/min] 1


Position error= ×
60servo loop gain [1/sec] Detection unit

D Machine position
DGN 0301 Distance from reference position of an axis in detection unit

D Cause of the APZ bit (bit


4 of parameter 1815)
brought to 0 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 310 DTH ALP NOF BZ2 BZ1 PR2 PR1

#0(PR1): The setting of the following parameters has been changed: Parameters
1821, 1850, 1860, 1861.
#1(PR2): The setting of the ATS bit (bit 1 of parameter 8302) has been changed.
#2(BZ1): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (Inductosyn).
#3(BZ2): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (separate position detector).
#4(NOF): The Inductosyn output no offset data.
#5(ALP): Before the α pulse coder detects a full single rotation, reference position
establishment by parameters was attempted.
#6(DTH): A controlled axis detach signal/parameter was input.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 311 DUA XBZ GSG AL4 AL3 AL2 AL1

#0(AL1): An APC alarm was issued.


#1(AL2): A disconnection was detected.
#2(AL3): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial pulse coder).
#3(AL4): An abnormal rotation speed (RCAL) was detected.
#4(GSG): The G202 signal was brought from 0 to 1.
#5(XBZ): The detected APC battery voltage is 0 V (serial separate position
detector).
#6(DUA): While the dual position feedback function was being used, the difference
in error between the semi–closed loop side and the closed loop side
became too large.
D Diagnostic data related
to the Inductosyn
absolute position
detector 380 Difference between the absolute position of the motor and offset data
DGN

[Data type] Two–word axis


[Units of data] Detection units
M (absolute position of the motor) – S (offset data)
λ(pitch interval)

The remainder resulting from the division is displayed.

49
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

DGN 381 Offset data from the Inductosyn

[Data type] Two–word axis


[Units of data] Detection units
Offset data is displayed when CNC calculates the machine position.
D Serial spindle
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0400 SAI SS2 SSR POS SIC

#0 (SIC) A module required for spindle serial control is


0 : not mounted
1 : mounted
#1 (POS) A module required for spindle analog control is
0 : not mounted
1 : mounted
#2(SSR) 0 : Spindle serial control is not performed.
1 : Spindle serial control is performed.
#3(SS2) 0 : Spindle serial doesn’t control 2nd spindle.
1 : Spindle serial control 2nd spindle.
#4(SAI) 0 : Spindle analog control is not used.
1 : Spindle analog control is used.

DGN 0401 Serial spindle alarm state of 1st spindle

DGN 0402 Serial spindle alarm state of 2nd spindle

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0408 SSA SCA CME CER SNE FRE CRE

#0 (CRE): A CRC error occurred. (Warning)


#1 (FRE): A framing error occurred. (Warning)
#2 (SNE): The transmission/reception target is invalid.
#3 (CER): An error occurred during reception.
#4 (CME): No response was returned during automatic scanning.
#5 (SCA): A communication alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side.
#7 (SSA): A system alarm occurred on the spindle amplifier side.
(These problems cause spindle alarm 749. Such problems are mainly
caused by noise, disconnection, or instantaneous power–off).

50
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0409 SPE S2E S1E SHE

Refer to this diagnosis when alarm 750 has generated.


#0 (SHE) 0 : Serial communication module is correct on CNC side.
1 : An error occurred in serial communication module on CNC side
#1 (S1E) 0 : 1st spindle started normally in spindle serial control.
1 : 1st spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.
#2 (S2E) 0 : 2nd spindle started normally in spindle serial control.
1 : 2nd spindle did not start normally in spindle serial control.
#3 (SPE) In spindle serial control serial spindle parameters
0 : Satisfy start condition of spindle unit
1 : Do not satisfy start condition of spindle unit

DGN 0410 Load meter of 1st spindle [%]

DGN 0411 Speed meter of 1st spindle [%]

DGN 0412 Load meter of 2nd spindle [%]

DGN 0413 Speed meter of 2nd spindle [%]

DGN 0414 Position error in 1st spindle synchronous control mode

DGN 0415 Position error in 2nd spindle synchronous control mode

DGN 0416 Absolute value of synchronization error between 1st and 2nd spindles

DGN 0417 Feedback information of 1st spindle position coder

DGN 0418 Position error of 1st spindle position loop mode

DGN 0419 Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coder

DGN 0420 Feedback information of 2nd spindle position coder

D Diagnostic data related


to rigid tapping
DGN 450 Spindle position error during rigid tapping

[Data type] Word


[Unit of data] Detection units

DGN 451 Spindle distribution during rigid tapping

[Data type] Word


[Unit of data] Detection units

51
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

DGN 454 Accumulated spindle distribution during rigid tapping

[Data type] Two–word


[Unit of data] Detection units

DGN 455 Instantaneous difference for the move command, calculated in terms of the spindle,
during rigid tapping (signed, accumulated value)

[Data type] Two–word


[Unit of data] Detection units

DGN 456 Instantaneous difference for the travel error, calculated in terms of the spindle,
during rigid tapping (signed)

[Data type] Word


[Unit of data] Detection units

DGN 457 Width of synchronization error during rigid tapping (maximum value)

[Data type] Word


[Unit of data] Detection units

D State of remote buffer


(protocol A)
DGN 0500 Send command

1: SYN 2: RDY 3: RST 4: ALM


5: SAT 6: GTD 7: RTY 8: SDI

DGN 0501 Receive command

1: SYN 2: RDY 3: ARS 4: AAL


5: CLB 6: SET 7: DAT 8: EOD
9: WAT 10: RTY 11:RDI 12: SDO

DGN 0502 State of remote buffer

0: Not ready
1: Reset state
2: Operation state
3: Alarm state
4: Circuit disconnection

D Open CNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 510

This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to
general users).

52
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 511

This data indicates the internal Open CNC information (not available to
general users).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 512 PA1 PA0 BNK THH THL PRA

This data indicates the cause of a system alarm that has occurred in Open
CNC.
#0(PRA) 1 : A RAM parity error occurred in shared RAM.
#2(THL) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too low.
1 : Normal
#3(THH) 0 : The temperature of the harddisk of Open CNC is too high.
1 : Normal
#4 0 : Normal
1 : An NMI has occurred in HSSB.
#5(BNK) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
0 : An alarm occurred in the lower half of shared RAM.
1 : An alarm occurred in the upper half of shared RAM.
#6 (PA0) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
1 : An alarm occurred at an even–numbered address.
#7 (PA1) If bit 0 (PRA) is set to 1,
1 : An alarm occurred at an odd–numbered address.
D Diagnostic data related
to a small–diameter peck
drilling cycle (M series
only)
DGN 520 Total number of retractions during cutting after G83 is specified

Executing the G83 command clears the value to zero.

DGN 521 Total number of retractions made by receiving the overload signal during cutting
after G83 is specified

Executing the G83 command clears the value to zero.

DGN 522 Position on the drill axis from which retraction is started

The units are the same as the minimum input increment.

DGN 523 Difference between the position on the drill axis from which the previous retraction
was started and the position from which the current retraction is started

The units are the same as the minimum input increment.

53
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

D Diagnostic data related


to simple synchronous
control
DGN 540 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchro-
nas control

DGN 541 Difference in the position error between the master and slave axes in simple synchro-
nas control

DGN 540 indicates the difference in the position error between the master
and slave axes when a single axis pair is subjected to simple synchronous
control. DGN 541 is used when two or more pairs are subjected to simple
synchronous control. The position error is indicated for the master axis.

DGN 540 and 541 indicate values in detection units. They are displayed
only with the M series.

D Diagnostic data related


to the dual position
feedback function 0550 Closed loop error

[Data type] 2–word axis


[Unit of data] Detection units
[Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999

0551 Semi–closed loop error

[Data type] 2–word axis


[Unit of data] Detection units
[Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999

0552 Error between semi–closed and closed loops

[Data type] word axis


[Unit of data] Detection units
[Valid data range] –32768 to +32767

0553 Amount of dual position compensation

[Data type] 2–word axis


[Unit of data] Detection units
[Valid data range] –99999999 to +99999999
The data items displayed on the diagnosis screen are obtained at the
following positions:

54
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Semi–closed loop
error (No. 551)

Motor
Command
+ + +
 Kp Speed Machine
- + control
-
Servo amplifier
Ps

Conversion
coefficients

Closed loop error (Parameters No. 2078 and 2079)


(No. 550) Amount of dual
+ position compensa-
Time
tion (No. 553)
constant
+ - +
 (Parameter No. 2080)
- +

Error between semi–


Pf closed and closed
loops (No. 552)

55
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.9
CNC STATUS ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE) O1000 N00010
DISPLAY
X 217.940
Y 363.233
Z 0.000
PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000MM/M S 0 T0000

MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35

[ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

MEM STRT MTN ***


ALM/BAT (Alarm state/
Low battery)
FIN (Waiting for auxiliary
funciton finish)
MTN/DWL( Axis travelling/dwelling)

– –EMG– –/–RESET–
(Emergency stop/reset state)
STRT/STOP/HOLD/INC
(Start/Stop/Hold state)

Mode display
EDIT/MEM/RMT/MDI/INC
HND/JOG/REF/THND/TJOG
EDIT : Edit mode
MEM : Memory mode
RMT : Remote operation mode
MDI : MDI operation mode
INC : Incremental feed mode
(Without manual pulse
generator)
HND : Handle feed mode
JOG : Jog feed mode
REF : Reference position
return mode
THND : TEACH IN NANDLE
mode
TJOG : TEACH IN JOG mode

56
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.10 Tuning becomes easier by graphically displaying servo error amount and
torque command, etc. (Graphic option is required).
WAVE FORM
DIAGNOSTIC The following two types of waveform diagnosis functions are supported:
FUNCTION (1) One–shot type
The one–shot type waveform diagnosis function can graphically
display, as a waveform, any variation in those data items listed below.
The start of data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge
of a machine signal. This function facilitates the adjustment of the
servo and spindle motors.
a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and
thermal simulation data for the servo motor of each axis
b. Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes
c. Spindle motor speed and load meter value
d. On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal address
(2) Storage type
The storage type waveform diagnosis function enables the storing of
any variation in the data items listed below and, if a servo alarm occurs,
the graphical display (as a waveform) of the stored data. The end of
data sampling can be triggered by the rising or falling edge of a
machine signal. This function facilitates the estimation of erroneous
locations. Stored data can be output via the reader/punch interface.
a. Error, pulse distribution amount, torque, speed, current, and
thermal simulation data for the servo motor for each axis

NOTE
1 To output stored waveform data, the optional reader/punch
interface must have been installed.
2 The waveform diagnosis function is enabled when bit 0
(SGD) of parameter No. 3112 is set to 1. Note, however, that
a graphics module is necessary to display waveforms.

1.10.1 (1) Set a parameter to utilize the servo waveform diagnostic function.
Setting Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3112 SGD

#0(SGD) 0 : Do not display servo waveform (usual graphic display).


1 : Displays servo waveform (usual graphic display function cannot be
used).
(2) Turn off the power once and turn it on again.
3120 Time between servo alarm and sampling stop (storage type)

[Data type] Word


[Unit of data] ms
[Valid data range] 1 to 32760

57
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.10.2 1. Press the SYSTEM key to display a system screen such as aparameter.
Waveform Diagnostic
Parameter Screen 2. Press the continuous menu key several times, and the soft key
[W.DGNS] is displayed.
3. Press [W.DGNS], then the parameter screen for the waveform
diagnosis is displayed.

Set the necessary data items. Position the cursor to the item to be set,
enter the corresponding data, then press INPUT . Data items for which
***** is displayed cannot be set. To assist in data setting, the frame on
the right side of the screen displays help information for that data to which
the cursor is positioned. Help information which cannot fit into a single
frame is split into several pages, which the user can scroll through using
PAGE
the page keys PAGE
and .

WAVE DIAGNOSE (PARAMETER) O1234 N12345

GRP CONDITION 100 GRP CONDITION

SAMPLING TIME *****MS (ONE–S TYPE)


0:START
TRIGGER ******* 1:START&TRG ↑
2:START&TRG ↓
(CH–1) (CH–2) (MEMORY TYPE)
100: DATA OF
DATA NO. 11 22 MEMORY
UNIT 1000 10 1/3
SIGNAL ******* *******
> S 0 T0000
EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52
[W.PRM] [W.GRPH] [ W.MEM ] [ ] [ ]

D Waveform diagnosis (1) Display start condition


parameters (one–shot
0 : Starts data sampling upon the [START] key being pressed,
type)
samples data for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
1 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first rising edge of
the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data
for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
2 : Starts data sampling upon the detection of the first falling edge of
the trigger signal after the [START] key is pressed, samples data
for the specified period, then draws a waveform.
(2) Sampling period: Set the period during which data will be sampled.
Valid data range: 10 to 32760
Units: ms
(3) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the
start of data sampling, when 1 or 2 is set for the start condition.

Example) G0007.2: ST signal

58
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

(4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for
which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 4).
Data Description Units
No.
00 Does not display a waveform. –
0n Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis (positional deviation) Pulses
(detection units)
1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis (move command) Pulses
(input increments)
2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
3n Servo error (2 ms) for the n–th axis (positional deviation) Pulses
(detection units)
5n Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM
6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ratio)
90 Composite speed for the first, second, and third axes Pulses
(input increments)
99 On/off state of a machine signal specified with a signal None
address
10n Actual spindle speed for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
mum rotation speed)
11n Load meter for the spindle for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
mum output)
161 Difference in position error calculated on the spindle Pulses
basis (detection unit)

(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are
automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless
the units must be changed for some reason.
[Valid data range] 1 to 1000
[Unit] 0.001
(6) Signal address: PMC address and bit number. Set in the same way as
that for trigger, when the data number is 99.

59
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

D Waveform diagnosis (1) Display start condition


parameters (storage 100 : Draws a waveform for the stored data.
type)
(2) Sampling period: Invalid
(3) Trigger: Invalid
(4) Data number: The table below lists the numbers of the data items for
which a waveform can be displayed (n = 1 to 4). Numbers for which
no data is stored cannot be specified.
Data Description Units
No.
00 Does not display a waveform. –
0n Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis (positional deviation) Pulses
(detection units)
1n Pulse distribution for the n–th axis (move command) Pulses
(input increments)
2n Torque for the n–th axis (actual current) % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
5n Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM
6n Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
7n Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis % (OVC alarm ratio)

(5) Data units: Weight of data when 1 is specified. The data units are
automatically specified for each data item and need not be set unless
the units must be changed for some reason.
[Valid data range] 1 to 1000
[Unit] 0.001
(6) Signal address: Invalid

60
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.10.3 1. Press soft key [W.GRPH], then graph of waveform diagnosis is


Graphic of Wave displayed.
Diagnosis data
WAVE DIAGNOSE (GRAPHIC)

CH1 CH2

1.0 1.0

0.5 0.5

0 0

–0. –0.
5 5

–1. –1.
0 0
[START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF]

2. Press soft key [(OPRT)], then the following soft keys are displayed.
The following three sets of soft keys are displayed by the key.

[START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF]

[START] [CH–1°] [CH–1±] [V–DOBL] [V–HALF]

[START] [CH–2°] [CH–2±] [V–DOBL] [V–HALF]

1) [START ] : Starts Graphic data


2) [TIME→] : Shift the waveform of channel 1 and 2 rightward
3) [←TIME] : Shift the waveform of channel and 2 leftward
4) [H–DOBL] : Double the time scale of the waveform of channel 1
and 2
5) [H–HALF] : Half the time scale of the waveform of channel 1 and 2
6) [H–DOBL] : Double the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2
7) [V–HALF] : Half the height of waveform of channel 1 and 2
8) [CH–1↑] : Shift the zero point of channel 1 upward
9) [CH–1↓] : Shift the zero point of channel 1 downward
10) [CH–2↑] : Shift the zero point of channel 2 upward
11) [CH–2↓] : Shift the zero point of channel 2 downward

D Drawing a waveform for The one–shot type waveform diagnosis function draws a waveform for a
one–shot type waveform specified data item in real time as the data is sampled. The sampled data,
diagnosis however, is not stored and thus cannot be output later.

To sample data for one–shot type waveform diagnosis, press the


[START] key on the WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) screen. Then, data
is sampled when the specified start condition is satisfied. Data sampling
continues for the specified period.

61
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

Pressing the [SATART] soft key starts data sampling. While sampling
is being performed, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once data
sampling has been completed, a waveform is automatically displayed.

WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345

CH1 CH2

EDIT **** ******


[START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF]

D Drawing a waveform for To use storage type waveform diagnosis, set 100 for the display start
storage type waveform condition. The maximum data width for storage type waveform diagnosis
diagnosis is 32760 ms. Data must be sampled before starting drawing. The next
page explains sampling in detail.
Pressing the [START] soft key loads stored data. While the data is being
loaded, SAMPLING blinks at the top of the screen. Once the data has
been loaded, a waveform is displayed. The date on which the data was
stored is displayed at the top left of the screen. If the [START] soft key
is pressed while data is being stored, storage is stopped and the waveform
for the data stored up to that point is displayed. The WAVE DIAGNOS.
(MEMORY) screen indicates whether data is being stored.

WAVE DIAGNOS. (GRAPHIC) O1234 N12345

CH197/01/13 12:15:00 CH2

EDIT **** ******


[START] [TIME³] [²TIME] [H–DOBL] [H–HALF]

62
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.10.4 (1) Press the SYSTEM function key. Pressing the menu continuation key
Data Sampling for
displays the [W.DGNS] soft key. Press this soft key to display
Storage Type
the WAVE DIAGNOS. (PARAMETER) screen.
Waveform Diagnosis
(2) Press the [W.MEM] soft key to display the WAVE DIAGNOS.
(MEMORY) screen. The operation selection soft keys appear.
The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as follows:

WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY) O1234 N12345

CONDITION: 100 TRIGGER: G0123.4

DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS


POS ERROR XYZA
MOTION CMD XYZA
CURRENT (%) XYZA
SPEED (RPM) NONE
TORQUE CMD NONE
HEAT SIMLT XYZA
SMPL TIME : 2. 0SEC
DATE : MEMORY

EDIT **** *** *** 08:20:52


[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]

(3) The configuration of the operation selection soft keys is as


follows:

[W.PRM] [W.GRPH] [ W.MEM ] [ ] [ ]

Press

[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]

[ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]

Fig. 1.10.4 Soft keys

(4) Using the cursor, set the necessary data items. To set the sampling
axes, position the cursor to the data item to be set, enter the names of
the axes for which data will be sampled for that data item, then press
[SELECT] or INPUT . The axis names are displayed to the right of the
data items.

Example) XYZ + [SELECT] or INPUT

(5) Once the sampling axes have been selected, the sampling period for
each axis is displayed. Subsequently pressing the [START] soft key
starts data sampling.

63
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

CAUTION
1 Data items for which ***** is displayed cannot be set.
2 To change the sampling axes, enter new axis names then
press the [SELECT] soft key. Pressing the [SLELCT] soft
key without entering an axis name results in no sampling
axis being set.
3 If the sampling axes are changed during data sampling,
data sampling is stopped. In this case, press the [START]
soft key to restart data sampling for the new sampling axes.
4 Initially, no sampling axis is set.

D Storage data parameters (1) Storage stop condition


100: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm.
101: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the
detection of the rising edge of the trigger signal.
102: Stops data storage upon the issue of a servo alarm or the
detection of the falling edge of the trigger signal.
The maximum stored data width is 32760 ms. If the storage stop
condition is not satisfied within 32760 ms, data is overwritten, starting
with the oldest data.
Parameter No. 3120 can be used to delay data storage being stopped
by a specified period (ms), after the issue of a servo alarm.
(2) Trigger: Set the PMC address and bit for the signal used to trigger the
stopping of data storage, when 101 or 102 is set for the stop condition.
Example) G0007.2: ST signal
(3) Data type: The following table lists the types of data for which a
waveform can be displayed.
Data type Description Units
POS ERROR Servo error (8 ms) for the n–th axis Pulses
(detection units)
MOTION CMD Pulse distribution for the n–th axis Pulses
(input increments)
CURRENT (%) Torque for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
SPEED (RPM) Actual speed for the n–th axis RPM
TORQUE CMD Command current for the n–th axis % (relative to maxi-
mum current)
HEAT SIMLT Thermal simulation data for the n–th axis %
(OVC alarm ratio)

(4) Sampling axis: The axes along which data will be sampled are
displayed.
(5) Sampling period: The sampling period for each axis is displayed.
(6) Date of storage: While data is being sampled, MEMORY blinks in this
field. When data sampling stops, the date at that point appears in this
field.

64
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.10.5 Waveform diagnosis data of servo alarm format can be output to an I/O
Outputting Waveform device, as follows:
Diagnosis Data 1) Select EDIT mode.
(Storage Type) 2) Press the SYSTEM key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY)
screen.
3) Press the [W.MEM], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this
order.
For details of input/output to/from the FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA
Card, see “Output to FANUC Floppy Cassette or FA Card,” below.

WAVE DIAGNOSE (MEMORY) O1234 N12345

CONDIGION: 100 TRIGGER: G0123.4

DATA KINDS SAMPLING AXIS


POS ERROR XYZA
MOTION CMD XYZA
CURRENT (%) XYZA
SPEED (RPM) NONE
TORQUE CMD NONE
HEAT SIMLT XYZA
SMPL TIME : 2.0SEC
DATE : 97/01/13 12:15:00

EDIT **** *** *** 12:15:52


[SELECT] [ ] [ ] [ ] [START]

[ ] [ ] [PUNCH] [ ] [ ]

Press

[ ] [ ] [ ] [ CAN ] [ EXEC ]

Press

D Output to FANUC Floppy


Cassette or FA Card 1) Select EDIT mode.
2) Press the SYSTEM key, then display the WAVE DIAGNOS. (MEMORY)
screen.
3) Open the write protect tab on the floppy disk or card.
4) Press the [W.MEM], , [PUNCH], and [EXEC] soft keys, in this
order.
The waveform diagnosis data is output to a file named WAVE
DIAGNOS, to which the number of the last file is assigned.
If a file named WAVE DIAGNOS already exists in the floppy disk or
on the card, P/S alarm 86 is issued. A floppy disk or card can contain
only one file for waveform diagnosis data. If the existing WAVE
DIAGNOS file contains unnecessary waveform diagnosis data of
servo alarm format, delete that file before attempting to output new
data. The procedure for deleting a file is described later.

65
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

D Directory display The directory in the cassette or card is displayed by means of the
following procedure:
1) Select EDIT mode.

2) Press the PROG function key to select the program screen.

3) Press the continuous menu key , then press [FLOPPY].

4) Press page key .

The directory is displayed.

D Deleting a file A file stored on a cassette or card is deleted by means of the following
procedure:
1) Select EDIT mode.

2) Press the PROG function key to select the program screen.

3) Set the write protect switch on the cassette or card to enable writing.
4) Press [FLOPPY].
5) Press [DELETE].
6) Enter the file number, then press [F SET].
7) Press [EXEC].
The file corresponding to the specified file number is deleted. The
number of each file subsequent to the deleted file is decremented by
one.

66
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

D Output format In the servo alarm format, the header, date and time, selected axes, and
waveform diagnosis data are output in this order. Data items are identified
by nine identifier words. Output data other than the identifier words
varies with the data type.

T(identifier word)

T0 : Header
T60 : Positional deviation
T61 : Move command
T62 : Actual current
T63 : Actual speed
T64 : Command current
T65 : Thermal simulation
T68 : Selected axes
T69 : Date and time

1) Header

T 0 C W A V E D I A G N O S ;

C: Data word

2) Data word

T 6 9 D * * * * * * , * * * * * * ;

D *..*: Data Example: 12:14 59 seconds on June 23, 1997

T 6 9 D 1 9 9 7 0 6 2 3 , 1 2 1 4 5 9 ;

3) Selected axes

T 6 8 P * * D * * , * * , to * * ,

P0: Positional deviation


P1: Actual speed
P2: Move command
P3: Command current
P4: Actual current
P5: Thermal simulation
D*.. *: Axis number (1 to 8)

67
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

4) Waveform diagnosis data

T 6 0 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,

T 6 1 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,

T 6 2 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,

T 6 3 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,

T 6 4 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,

T 6 5 D * * , * * , * * , to * * ,

D *..*: Waveform diagnosis data x number of axes

NOTE
1 Records are classified into header records and data records.
2 ”%” is used as an end–of–record code.
3 Each record starts with an identifier and ends with an end–of–block code.
4 Either the ISO or EIA code system is used.
5 The output code type is specified with parameter ISO (bit 1 of No. 0100). For ISO code,
parameter NCR (bit 3 of No. 0100) is used to specify whether the end–of–block code is <LF>
only, or a sequence of <LF> <CR> <CR>.
6 Parameter NFD (bit 7 of No. 01X1, where X is the channel number) is used to specify whether
a feed code is output before and after the data.
7 No identifier word is output for a data item for which no axis is selected.
8 The above file corresponds to a paper tape of about 200 m in length.

1.10.6
Notes (1) Once the storage is full, the oldest data is overwritten.
(2) Stored–type waveform diagnostic data is not lost, even when the
power is turned off.
(3) The waveform diagnostic function is disabled when parameter SGD
(bit 0 of No. 3112) is set to 0.
(4) Set the correct date and time using the setting screen.

68
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.11 Load meter of the servo axis and the serial spindle and the speed meter
can be displayed.
OPERATING
MONITOR

1.11.1 1. Set a parameter to display operating monitor. (Bit 5 (OPM) of


Display Method parameter No.3111)

2. Press the POS key to display the position display screen.

3. Press continuous menu key , then soft key [MONI] is displayed.


4. Press the soft key [MONI], then the operating monitor screen is
displayed.

OPERATING MONITOR O0001 N00001


(LOAD METER)

X : * * * 80% S1: 200%

Y : * * * * * 0% (SPEED METER RPM)


S1: * * * 1500
Z : * * * * * 0%

PART COUNT 5
RUN TIME 0H15M CYCLE TIME 0H 0M38S
ACT.F 3000 MM/M S 0 T 0000

MEM STRT MTN *** 09:06:35


[ [ ABS ] [ REL ] [ ALL ] [ HNDL ] [ OPRT ]

NOTE
1 The bar graph for the load meter shows load up to 200%.
2 The bar graph for the speed meter shows the ratio of the
current spindle speed to the maximum spindle speed
(100%). Although the speed meter normally indicates the
speed of the spindle motor, it can also be used to indicate
the speed of the spindle by setting bit 6. (OPS) of parameter
3111 to 1.
3 The servo axes for their load meters are displayed are set
to parameter No. 3151 to 3154. If parameters 3151 to 3154
are all zero, the load meter of the basic axes are displayed.
4 For color display, the bar of the load meter that exceed
100% shows purple color.

69
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.11.2
Parameters #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 OPS OPM

[Data type] Bit


#5(OPM) Operating monitor display is:
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
#6(OPS) The speed meter on the operating monitor screen displays:
0 : Spindle motor speed
1 : Spindle speed

3151 Axis number for which the first servo motor load meter is displayed

3152 Axis number for which the second servo motor load meter is displayed

3153 Axis number for which the third servo motor load meter is displayed

3154 Axis number for which the fourth servo motor load meter is displayed

[Data type] Byte


[Valid data range] 0, 1, ... number of controlled axes
These parameters specify the numbers of the axes for which load meters
for servo motors are to be displayed. Up to four load meters can be
displayed. Set 0 for those axes for which no load meter is to be displayed.

70
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.12
LIST OF
OPERATIONS

Reset
Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
Resetting run hour [(OPRT)] [RUNPRE]→[EXEC]
– POS

Resetting no. of [(OPRT)] [PTSPRE]→[EXEC]


machined parts – POS

Resetting OT alarm At Power


ON
– P and CAN

Resetting alarm 100


– – CAN and RESET

Registration from MDI


Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1
key button

Inputting MDI or SYSTEM Parameter no.→[NO.SRH]→Data→ INPUT


Yes
parameters E.Stop
(PARAM)
→ PWE =0 → RESET

Inputting offset
OFF – OFFSET
SETTING Offset number→[NO.SRH]→Offset value→ INPUT
values

Inputting setting
OFF MDI OFFSET
SETTING Setting no.→[NO.SRH] or Data→ INPUT
data

Input of PMC
parameters, counter OFF [PMCPRM]→[COUNTR] or [DATA]→Data→ INPUT
and data table MDI or
SYSTEM

Inputting PMC E.Stop


parameters OFF (PMC) [PMCPRM]→[TIMER] or [KEEPRL]→Data→ INPUT
(Timer, keep relay)

POS POS (Display of relative coordinate)<AXIS>→ [ORIGIN]


Tool length
JOG → → OFFSET
→Jog the tool to measuring position
measurement SETTING

OFFSET
SETTING
Offset no.→[NO.SRH]→<AXIS>→[INP.C]

71
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

Input/Output with FANUC Cassette


Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
Heading a file EDIT
PROG N →File no.→[ ]→[F SRH]→[EXEC]

Deleting a file OFF EDIT


PROG N →File no.→[ ]→[DELETE]→[EXEC]

Collating a program EDIT


PROG Heading a file→ O →Program number→[(OPRT)]

→[ ]→[READ]→[EXEC]

Inputting From FANUC Cassette


Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
Inputting OFF EDIT or [(OPRT)]→[ ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
SYSTEM
parameters E.Stop
(PARAM)

Inputting PMC OFF E.Stop


parameters SYSTEM
[ ]→[I/O]→(CANNEL NO) 1 INPUT →
(PMC) (DEVICE NAME) [FDCAS]→(KIND OF DATA)

[PARAM]→[READ]→(FILE NO) File no. INPUT →[EXEC]

Inputting offset OFF EDIT OFFSET


(Heading a file no.)→[(OPRT)]→[ ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
values SETTING

Registering a OFF EDIT


program PROG
N →File no.→ INPUT →[ ]→[READ]→[EXEC]

Inputting macro OFF EDIT


variables PROG N →File no.→ INPUT →[ ]→ O →

Program no. → [READ]→[EXEC]


MEMORY <START>
PROG

72
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Output to FANUC Cassette

Data Param- Func-


Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
[(OPRT)]→[ ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
Output of SYSTEM
EDIT
parameter
(PARAM)

[ ]→[I/O]→(CANNEL NO) 1 INPUT →(DEVICE


Output of PMC SYSTEM

parameter
EDIT NAME) [FDCAS] →(KIND OF DATA) [PARAM] → [WRITE]
(PMC)
→ (FILE NO) * 1 INPUT →[EXEC]

[(OPRT)]→[ ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
Output of offset EDIT OFFSET
SETTING

Output of all
EDIT PROG O →–9999→[ ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
programs

Output of one
EDIT PROG O →Program no.→[ ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]
program

Output of macro [ ]→[MACRO]→[(OPRT)]→[ ]→[PUNCH]→[EXEC]


EDIT OFFSET
SETTING
variables

Search

Data Param- Func-


Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
Searching a MEMORY
program number or EDIT
PROG O →Program no.→[O SRH]

Searching a
sequence number MEMORY PROG Program no. search→ N →Sequence number→[NSRH]

Searching an
address word Data to be searched→[SRH↑] or[SRH↓] or
EDIT PROG

(cursor key)
Searching an
Address to be searched→[SRH↑] or[SRH↓] or
address only EDIT PROG

(Cursor key)
Searching an offset Offset no.→[NO.SRH]
number – OFFSET
SETTING

Searching a Diagnostic number→[NO.SRH]


SYSTEM
diagnostic number –
(DGNOS)
Searching a Parameter no.→[NO.SRH]
SYSTEM
parameter number –
(PARAM)

73
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

Edit
Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
Display of memory [LIB]
EDIT PROG
capacity used

Deleting all OFF


EDIT PROG O →–9999→ DELETE
programs

OFF
Deleting a program EDIT PROG O →Program no.→ DELETE

Deleting several N →Sequence no.→ DELETE


OFF EDIT PROG
blocks
(Deleted up to a block with a specified sequence no.)
OFF
Deleting a block EDIT PROG EOB → DELETE

OFF
Deleting a word EDIT PROG Searching a word to be deleted→ DELETE

OFF
Changing a word EDIT PROG Searching a word to be changed→New Data→ ALTER

OFF Searching a word immediately before a word to be


Inserting a word EDIT PROG
searched→New Data→ INSERT

Collation
Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key
ON [(OPRT)]→[ ]→[READ]→[EXEC]
Collating memory EDIT PROG

Playback
Data Param- Func-
Function protec- eter Mode tion Operation
tion write=1 button
key

TEACH–IN Jog the machine→ X , Y or Z → INSERT

Input of NC data JOG/ PROG


HANDLE → NC data → INSERT → EOB → INSERT

74
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Clear
Data Param- Func-
Function prote- eter Mode tion Operation
ction write=1 key
key
Memory all clear
RESET
At M/T : AND DELETE

ower
power
ON Loader is controlled : CAN AND 5
Parameter/offset
clear M/T : RESET
At
f Power
ON Loader is controlled : RESET AND 5 (Parameter

only)
Clearing a program
At M/T : DELETE

f Power
ON Loader is controlled : RESET AND 5
Program under
edition at power – PROG AND RESET

off(PS101)
PMC RAM *
At Main CPU : X AND O
Power
ON Loader is controlled : X AND 5

* PMC ladder program is not cleard in FROM.

75
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.13
WARNING SCREEN
DISPLAYED WHEN
AN OPTION IS
CHANGED

D Warning screen This CNC displays a warning screen when the configuration of the
options using the SRAM area is changed. The data for the function
indicated on the screen is cleared the next time the system is turned on.

WARNING

YOU SET THE PARAMETER NO.jjjj#j

THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE CLEARED.

* PART PROGRAM MEMORY

PLEASE PRESS <DELETE> OR <CAN> KEY.


<DELETE> : CLEAR ALL DATA
<CAN> : CANCEL

NOTE
Mark* varies with the parameter settings. Two or more
function names may be displayed.

76
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

D Allocation error screen When an option which uses the SRAM area is added, the system software
may require more SRAM than is currently installed in the system. In this
case, an allocation error screen appears the first time the system is turned
on after the addition of the option, thus restoring the state existing before
the addition.

FILE ALLOCATION ERROR

S–RAM CAPACITY IS NOT SUFFICIENT.


ADDITIONAL S–RAM IS NECESSARY.

PLEASE PRESS <CAN> KEY :


RETURN TO THE STATE BEFORE
OPTION PARAMETER IS CHANGED.

NOTE
When the currently installed SRAM is not sufficient,
additional SRAM can be mounted. Newly installed SRAM
must be cleared before it can be used.
Operation:When turning on the power, hold down the
following keys:

O + DELETE
for M/T series

When installing additional SRAM, however, perform all


clear.

77
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.14 System software can be replaced only with compatible system software.
Otherwise, the first time the CNC is turned on after the system software
WARNING SCREEN is replaced, the following screen will be displayed and the system will not
DISPLAYED WHEN be activated:
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
IS REPLACED
(SYSTEM LABEL
CHECK ERROR)

DDF1–01

SYSTEM LABEL CHECK ERROR:


CLEAR ALL SRAM MODULE

NOT READY

In this case, perform memory all clear (by holding down the RESET and

DELETE MDI keys then turning on the power) or reinstall the original system
software.

78
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.15 When the Power Motion series is used as an additional axis (slave) of the
CNC, the power motion manager allows the slave data to be displayed and
POWER MOTION set by the CNC.
MANAGER The power motion manager enables the following display and setting:
(1) Current position display (absolute/machine coordinates)
(2) Parameter display and setting
(3) Diagnosis display
(4) System configuration screen display
(5) Alarm display
The Power Motion series that can be used as the slave is a β amplifier with
I/O Link.

1.15.1
Parameter #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0960 PMN MD2 MD1 SLV

[Data type] Bit


#0(SLV) When the power motion manager is selected, the screen shows the data of:
0 : A single slave.
1 : Up to four slaves by dividing the screen into four segments.
#1, #2(MD1, MD2) The slave parameters are input from and output to the following devices:
MD2 MD1 I/O device
0 0 Part program storage
0 1 Memory card

The parameters are input or output in the program format, no matter which
I/O device is selected.
#3(PMN) The power motion manager function is:
0 : Enabled.
1 : Disabled. (Communication with the slave is not performed.)

79
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.15.2
Screen Display 1. Press the SYSTEM
function key.
2. Press the continuous menu key several times. The [PMM] soft
key appears.
3. Press the [PMM] soft key. The system configuration screen, which is
the initial screen of the power motion manager, appears. The screen
has the following soft keys (function selection soft keys).

[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ]

The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse video. Pressing a soft
key enables the corresponding function, as indicated below:

POS: Current position display


SYSTEM: System information
MSG: Alarm list

To select another function after one of the functions listed above is


selected, press the return menu key several times until the soft keys
are displayed as shown above. Then, select the desired function.
4. To terminate the power motion manager, repeatedly press the return
menu key until the function selection keys are displayed as
shown above. Then, press the return menu key once more. The soft
keys of the CNC system appear, and the power motion manager
terminates. The system configuration screen of this function is
displayed as the termination screen.
Alternative termination method is to select another function while this
function is enabled. To do this, press an MDI function key ( POS , PROG ,

MESSAGE , etc.).

NOTE
After another screen is displayed by pressing a function key,
pressing the function key, restores the initial status
SYSTEM

of this function. That is, the soft keys shown above are
restored. The data that was being input is canceled.

80
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

D System configuration This screen displays the system software information of the slave. The
screen screen is displayed first when the power motion manager function is
selected. This screen is automatically displayed also at the termination
of the function.

1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft
keys are displayed together with the screen displayed when SYSTEM
was last selected. The currently active soft key is displayed in reverse
video.

[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][ ]

2. Press the [SYSTEM] soft key again. The system configuration screen
appears. While this screen is displayed, the [SYSTEM] soft key is left
displayed in reverse video.
POWER MOTION MANAGER
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.GROUP0 / β

SYSTEM <SERIES/VERSION> 88A1 01

[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ ]

Sample screen: Series and edition of the servo unit β series system list

81
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

D Parameter screen The parameters necessary for the functions of the slave must be specified
in advance.
1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft
keys appear.

[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][ ]

2. Press the [PARAM] soft key. The parameter screen appears.


POWER MOTION MANAGER
PARAMETER
1.GROUP0 / β
0000 00001000 0010 11110000
0001 00010101 0011 01010000
0002 11111011 0012 00000000
0003 00000000 0013 00000000
0004 00000000 0014 10110001
0005 10100001 0015 00000000
0006 00000000 0016 00000000
0007 10000000 0017 10000010
0008 00000000 0018 00000000
0009 00000000 0019 00000000

[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ ]

The screen displays just the bit and decimal data. For details of the
parameters, refer to the connection manual of the corresponding Power
Mate.
D Searching for a parameter
A search can be made for the parameter to be displayed.
1. Select the active slave.
2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear.

[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]

3. Enter a desired number in the key–in field by using MDI numeric keys.
Then, press the [NO.SRC] soft key. The search starts.
D Setting a parameter
A parameter of a slave Power Mate can be directly set from the CNC.
1. Select the active slave.
2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:

[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]

3. Move the cursor to the parameter to be set.


4. Enter desired data in the key–in buffer by using MDI numeric keys.
Then, press the [INPUT] soft key. Alternatively, press the MDI INPUT

key.

82
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

D Diagnosis screen This screen shows the current status of the slave.

1. Press the [SYSTEM] function selection soft key. The following soft
keys appear:

[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][ ]

2. Press the [DGNOS] soft key. The diagnosis screen appears. The
displayed data is basically the same as the data displayed on the
parameter screen.
For details of the diagnosis information, refer to the connection
manual of the corresponding Power Mate.
D Current position display The screen shows the current position on the workpiece coordinate
system or machine coordinate system.

1. Press the [POS] function selection soft key. The following soft keys
appear:

[ WORK ][ ][MACHIN][ ][ ]

2. To see the absolute coordinate screen, press the [WORK] soft key. To
see the machine coordinate screen, press the [MACHIN] soft key.

POWER MOTION MANAGER


ACTUAL POSITION (MACHINE)
1.GROUP0 / β

1 1267900
F 3500

[ WORK ][ ][ MACHIN ][ ][ ]

1: Coordinate F: Actual speed

83
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

D Alarm screen If an alarm is issued during operation, the group number of the slave
causing the alarm is indicated at the right end of the message field on the
screen. Check the details on the alarm screen. For example, (13) means
that the first and third power motion units are in the alarm state.

1. Press the [MSG] function selection soft key. Just the error code is
displayed on the screen.

POWER MOTION MANAGER


ALARM
1.GROUP0 / β

442 210 232

[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM ][ MSG ]

Up to forty codes can be displayed on the screen.

For details of the alarm, refer to the connection manual of the


corresponding Power Mate.

D Operating the active The active slave is subjected to the ZOOM function, which will be
slave described later, and parameter overwrite. The title of the active slave is
displayed in a color different from the display color of the other slave
titles.

The active slave can be selected by pressing the [±NEXT] or [°BACK]


soft key, which is displayed after the continuous menu key is
pressed several times.
[±NEXT]: Displays the screen of the Power Mate connected after the
currently active slave. The equipment other than the Power
Mate is ignored.
[°BACK]: Displays the screen of the Power Mate connected before the
currently active slave.

84
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

D Single–slave display/ Whether the screen displays the data of just a single unit or of four units
Four–slave display in four segments is specified in the SLV bit (bit 0 of parameter 960).
To switch the four–slave display to the single–slave display, press the
[ZOOM] soft key, which is displayed after the continuous menu key
is pressed several times. The single–slave display shows the data
of the active slave. To switch the single–slave display to the four–slave
display showing the data of four slaves including the active slave, press
the [ZOOM] key.
When five or more slaves are connected, the four–slave display has two
or more pages. To see the slave data that is not displayed on the current
page, press soft key [±NEXT].

POWER MOTION MANAGER/ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION O12345678 N12345


1.GROUP0 / β O12345678 N12345 2.GROUP1 / β

SYSTEM 88A101 SYSTEM 88A101

3.GROUP2 / β 4.GROUP3 / β

SYSTEM 88A101 SYSTEM 88A101

PARAM DGNOS SYSTEM (OPRT)

The figure above shows a sample four–slave display screen on a display


unit with twelve soft keys. A unit with seven soft keys can also display
the four–slave display screen.
POWER MOTION MANAGER O12345678 N12345
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.GROUP0 / β

SYSTEM <SERIES/VERSION> 88A101

[ POS ][ DGNOS ][ ][ SYSTEM ][ MSG ]

85
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

The figure above shows a sample single–slave display screen on a display


unit with seven soft keys. A unit with twelve soft keys can also display
the single–slave display screen.
D Guidance message While the following soft keys are being displayed, a guidance message
is displayed in the message field.

[ POS ][ ][ ][SYSTEM][ MSG ]

[ WORK ][ ][MACHIN ][ ][ ]

[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ ][SYSTEM][(OPRT) ]

When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, “SELECT ACTIVE
SLAVE [>]” is displayed.

[ ± NEXT ][ ° BACK ][ ZOOM ][ ][ ]

When the soft keys are displayed as shown above, “SELECT ACTIVE
SLAVE [↓] [↑]” is displayed.

D Key–in field When the [(OPRT)] soft key is pressed, the message line may turn into
a key–in field as required. The numeric data input by using MDI keys is
displayed after the prompt (>).

On the parameter and diagnosis screens, the key–in field appears when
just a numeric value is input. The soft key [(OPRT)] need not be pressed.

86
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.15.3
Parameter Input/Output

D Saving parameters Parameters can be saved in CNC memory or a memory card as a data file
of program format. Specify the first digit of the registration program
number in parameter 8760. Programs with predetermined numbers are
created for individual slaves. When the parameters are saved in CNC
memory, a program having the specified program number is created.
When the parameters are saved in a memory card, a file is created, to
which the file name consists of the specified program number and an
extension PMM.
Example: When parameter 8760 is set to 8000
The program number for group n is 8000 + n*10.
The group number n is indicated in the title area of each slave.

CAUTION
In case that the parameters are saved in a memory card, If
the specified program number already exists on memory
card, the corresponding program is overwritten with new
data.

Specify a desired input device in the MD1 and MD2 bits (bits 1 and 2 of
parameter 960). Connect a memory card. Alternatively, check the free
area of CNC memory. Then, follow the steps given below:

1. Select the active slave.


2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:

[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]

3. Press the continuous menu key . The following soft keys appear:

[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]

4. Press the [READ] soft key. The following soft keys appear:

[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]

5. Press the [EXEC] soft key.


During input, “INPUT” blinks in the message field.

87
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

D Writing parameters The data file of parameters saved in CNC memory or a memory card as
a program is written into the slave determined by the program number.
The program number and memory device are determined as described in
“Saving parameters.”

1. Select the active slave.


2. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key. The following soft keys appear:

[ NO.SRC ][ ][ ][ ][ INPUT ]

3. Press the next–menu key. The following soft keys appear:

[ ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][ ][ ]

4. Press the [PUNCH] soft key. The following soft keys appear:

[ ][ ][ ][CANCEL ][ EXEC ]

5. Press the [EXEC] soft key.


During output, “INPUT” blinks in the message field.

The screen cannot be changed to another screen during parameter


input/output.

When the RESET key is pressed, or when an alarm status is detected in


communication, the input/output stops.

88
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.15.4
Notes
D Connecting an I/O Link When the Power Motion series is used as a slave of an I/O Link, the CNC
assigns I/O addresses. The salve data is input and output in units of 16
bytes. Therefore, 128 input/output points are necessary. Up to eight
slaves can be connected.

The module name is OC021 (16–byte input) or OC020 (16–byte output).


BASE is always 0, and SLOT is always 1.

D Ignoring the power After the data necessary for each slave connected is set and checked, the
motion manager function communication of the power motion manager (PMM) can be stopped to
send a command from the CNC ladder to the slave.

When the PMN bit (bit 3 of parameter 960) is set to 1, all communication
between CNC and the slave via the I/O Link is open to the ladder.

While the bit is held 1, the screen shows just the title, function name, and
other items that are independent of the communication. The following
message appears to indicate that communication has stopped.

COMMUNICATION PROHIBITED BY P960#3

D Data input/output by I/O When the power motion manager is used, the function for data
Link input/output by I/O Link cannot be used.

D Alarm (1) CNC


When a CNC alarm status is detected, the screen is automatically
switched to the CNC alarm screen. Check the details of the alarm. If
necessary, display and select the power motion manager screen again
by pressing function key SYSTEM
.

(2) Slave
A guidance message is usually displayed in the message field. If a
slave alarm is detected, the corresponding slave group number is
displayed at the right end.
Display the alarm screen to check the details.
D Data protection key When the data protection key of the CNC is turned on, parameters cannot
be input to CNC memory.

89
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.16 This section describes the BIOS setup for the following MMC–IV.
BIOS SETUP OF THE Order code Printed circuit board code
MMC–IV A02B–0207–J001 A02B–0207–C020
A02B–0207–J002 A02B–0207–C021
A02B–0207–C022

1.16.1 The BIOS setup is a program for setting the operating environment of the
BIOS Setup MMC–IV. The BIOS setup, however, need not be executed to set up a
typical operating environment. A typical operating environment for the
MMC–IV is factory–set. Inadvertently modifying the setting may cause
a failure.
The BIOS setup should be executed when:
– A printed circuit board is replaced.
– A hard disk unit is replaced.
– The peripheral configuration is changed. (A floppy disk drive or
keyboard is connected or disconnected, for example. Whether
execution of the BIOS setup is needed varies with the BIOS
parameters.)
– POST (Power On Self Test) has issued an error message relating to
the setup.
The setting made by the BIOS setup is stored into SRAM on the printed
circuit board of the MMC–IV main body. The SRAM is provided with a
battery backup to retain the recorded settings.

For the BIOS setup, a full keyboard is necessary.

1.16.2 The keys used for set–up have the following functions.
Keys Used for – and keys : Move the cursor to the next item.
Operation on the
Set–Up Screen – and keys : Move the cursor to the previous item.
PAGE

– key : Move to the next page of the set–up menu.

– PAGE
key : Move to the previous page of the set–up
menu.
– spacebar
and – keys : Display the desired value at a set–up menu
item.
– ESC Key : Ends the set–up menu.

90
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.16.3 1. End work and store the data:


How to Begin the 2. If a full keyboard has been connected.
“Set–Up” Press the CTRL + ALT + DELETE keys to reset the MMC–IV PCB.
If a full keyboard has not been connected.
Switch off the power, connect a full keyboard, and switch on the
power, again.
3. Immediately when POST ends, and DOS loading begins, press the
CTRL + ALT + ESC keys. The Standard System Parameters display
appears on the screen.
If it does not appear, retry starting at step 2.
PAGE

Pressing the and PAGE


keys displays the next and previous pages
of the set–up menu, respectively.
Standard System Parameters screen
Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1.00)
(C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved

Page 1 of 3
∗∗ Standard System Parameters ∗∗

System Time: 12: 00: 00


System Date: Sep 14, 1993

Diskette A : 3.5”, 1. 44MB


Diskette B : Not Installed Cyl Hd Pre LZ Sec Size
Hard Disk 1 : AUTO 1 722 10 0 722 23 81
Hard Disk 2 : Not Installed
Base Memory : 640 KB
Extended Memory: 3072 KB
Video Card : VGA/EGA NumLock on at boot: NO
CPU Speed : Fast Quick Boot: Off

Esc F2  Space/- PgUp/Dn


Menu Sys Info Field Value Page

91
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

D Detailed descriptions of The details of the set–up items are as follows:


the set–up items
Item Description
System Time The time is displayed in the”time:minute:second” format.
To adjust the clock, set the cursor to a respective item and press the
[spacebar] or [–] key. When the second display is selected, pressing
the [spacebar] or [–] key resets the second display to 00.
System Date The date is displayed in the ”month day, year” format.
pressing [spacebar] advances the month display in the order of Jan,
Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, and Dec. Pressing
the [–] key reverses the order.
Diskette A The type of a floppy disk is specified. To use a portable 3.5–inch floppy
disk drive, specify ”3.5–inch, 1.44MB.”
If no floppy disk drive is connected, specify ”Not Installed.”
Diskette B The type of a second floppy disk is specified. To use a portable 3.5–inch
floppy disk drive, specify ”3.5–inch, 1.44MB.” If no second floppy disk
drive is connected, specify ”Not Installed.”
Hard Disk 1 The type of a hard disk drive built in the MMC–IV main unit is specified.
”AUTO 1” is factory–set. Do not change in this item.
Hard Disk 2 The type of a second hard disk drive is specified. Because the MMC–IV
main unit does not contain a second hard disk drive, ”Not Installed” is
factory–set. Do not change in this item.
Base Memory The capacity of the base memory detected by POST is displayed. Do
not change the setting.
Extended The capacity of the extended memory detected by POST is displayed.
Memory Do not change the setting.
Video Card The display rating of the CRT display is specified. ”VGA/EGA” is facto-
ry–set. Do not change the setting.
CPU Speed The CPU operating speed is specified.
Fast :The CPU clock is at full speed.
Slow :The CPU operates at low speed.
NumLock on at How the Num Lock feature is handled at system boot is specified.
boot Yes :The system is booted up with the Num Lock feature
switched on.
No : The system is booted up with the Num Lock feature
switched off.
Quick Boot It is specified whether the memory is tested when power is applied.
Off : The memory test is performed.
On : The memory test is skipped.
Always select ”Off”.

92
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Device Feature Control screen


Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1.00)
(C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved

Page 2 of 3
∗∗ Device Feature Control ∗∗

Serial Port: 03F8h Floppy Boot: Enabled


Track Ball: 02F8h
Parallel Port: 03BChDisplay: Simulataneous
Video Mode Graphics: Normal
Internal Cache: Enabled Video Mode Text: Normal
Vertical Compensation: Enabled

Esc F2  Space/- PgUp/Dn


Menu Sys Info Field Value Page

D Detailed descriptions of The details of the set–up items are as follows:


the set–up items
Item Description
Serial Port The I/O address of serial port 1 is specified.
”03F8h” is factory–set.
Track Ball The I/O address of serial port 2 is specified.
”02F8h” is factory–set.
Parallel Port The I/O address of the parallel port is specified.
”03BCh” is factory–set.
Internal Cache It is specified whether to enable or disable the cache memory in the
CPU.
Enabled : The built–in cache memory is enabled.
Disabled : The built–in cache memory is disabled.
Floppy Boot It is specified whether to boot the system from a floppy disk.
Enabled : The system is booted from a floppy disk.
Disabled : The system is not booted from a floppy disk.
Display A display unit to be used is specified.
Always select ”Simultaneous.”

Video The setting has no meaning.


Mode Graphics
Video Mode Text The setting has no meaning.
Vertical It is specified whether the entire surface of the LCD display screen is
Compensation used. Always select ”Enabled.”

93
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

Power Management Feature Control screen


Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1. 00)
(C) Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved

Page 3 of 3
∗∗ Power Management Feature Control ∗∗
Power Management Disabled

System Doze After: Disabled Hard Disk Off After:Disabled


System Standby After:Disabled LCD Panel Off Time: Disabled
System Suspend After:15 minute
Suspend Mode: Suspend/Resume
System Doze Speed: Divide by 2 Low Battery Action:Divide by 2
System Standby Speed:Divide by 2

Esc F2  Space/- PgUp/Dn


Menu Sys Info Field Value Page

D Detailed descriptions of The details of the set–up items are as follows:


the set–up items
Item Description
Power Management
Always select ”Disabled”.

94
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.16.4 This section describes how to save the information specified in the set–up
How to End the menu and to exit the set–up menu.
“Set–Up” Pressing the ESC key on the set–up menu causes the Exiting SETUP
menu to appear on the right section of the screen.

** Exiting SETUP **

ESC Continue with SETUP.

F4
Save Values, exit
setup, and reboot.

F5 Load default values


for allpages.

F6 Abort SETUP without


saving value.

(1) Pressing the ESC key resumes the set–up menu. You can continue
to set up on the set–up menu.

(2) Pressing the F4 key saves the set information before ending the
set–up program. After the set–up program ends, the MMC–IV is
reset, and the system is booted.

(3) Pressing the F5 key cancels all set information and loads the initial
settings.

Inadvertently pressing the F5 key loses the factory settings of


the MMC–IV, possibly causing a failure.

(4) Pressing the F6 key ends the set–up program without changing the
previous settings; the information you set up is not saved.

95
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.17 This section describes the BIOS setup for intelligent terminals 1 and 2 and
the following MMC–IV.
BIOS SETUP OF
Order code Printed circuit board code
INTELLIGENT
A02B–0207–J031 A02B–2203–0180
TERMINALS 1 AND 2 A02B–0207–J032 A02B–2203–0180

1.17.1 The BIOS setup is a program for setting the operating environment of the
BIOS Setup MMC–IV or intelligent terminal. The BIOS setup, however, need not be
executed to set up a typical operating environment. A typical operating
environment for the MMC–IV or intelligent terminal is factory–set.
Inadvertently modifying the setting may cause a failure.
The BIOS setup should be executed when:
– A printed circuit board is replaced.
– A hard disk unit is replaced.
– The peripheral configuration is changed. (A floppy disk drive or
keyboard is connected or disconnected, for example. Whether
execution of the BIOS setup is needed varies with the BIOS
parameters.)
– POST (Power On Self Test) has issued an error message about setup.
The setting made by the BIOS setup is stored into SRAM in the MMC–IV
or intelligent terminal. The SRAM is provided with a battery backup to
retain the recorded settings.

For the BIOS setup, a full keyboard is necessary.

1.17.2 The keys used on the set–up screen have the following functions:
Keys Used for – and keys : Move the cursor.
Operation on the
Set–Up Screen – F1 key : Displays the help.

– ENTER
key : Selects the item to which the cursor is
positioned.
– ESC key : Abandons the current setting.

96
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.17.3 1. Terminate the current operation and save the data.


How to Begin the 2. Turn the power off, connect a full keyboard, then turn the power on
Set–Up again.

3. Press the F1 key on the initial screen once, as shown in Fig. 1.17.3
(a). The BIOS setup starts a few seconds later, with the display of the
menu screen. In some cases, the BIOS setup starts automatically,
showing error screen (1), as shown in Fig. 1.17.3 (c). If the error screen
appears, press the , , and ENTER
keys as indicated in Figs.
1.17.3 (a), (b), and (c). The menu screen appears. If the BIOS setup
does not begin, return to step 2 above.
4. The menu screen appears. The triangle indicates that the
corresponding item has been changed. Check the new setting. If
necessary, make a modification.

(C) Copyright IBM Corporation 1981,1994 ALL


RIGHTS RESERVERD 486DX2–50MHz

Copyright (C) Matsushita Electric Industrial


Co.,LTD 1995 Release 01 1.02

0640KB System Memory


7168KB Extended Memory
Indicating that pressing
the F1 key starts BIOS
setup.

Press F1 for configration/Setup


Press ESC for fast POST

Fig. 1.17.3 (a) Initial Screen

IBM SurePath Setup – (C) Copyright IBM Corporation 1994

Configuration/Setup Utility

Select Options:

System Summary
Devices and I/O Ports
Date and Time
System Security
Start Options
Advanced Setup



<F1> Help < " # > Move


<ESC> Exit <Enter> Select

Fig. 1.17.3 (b) Menu Screen

97
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

IBM SurePath Setup – (C) Copyright IBM Corporation 1994

POST Startup Error(s)

The following error(s) were detected when the system was


started:
162 Configuration Change Has Occured
163 Date and Time Incorrect
Select one of the following:
Continue. Select this item.
Exit Setup

<F1> Help <   > Move


<ESC> Exit <Enter> Select

Fig. 1.17.3 (c) Error Screen (1) Displayed after Automatic


Activation

IBM SurePath Setup – (C) Copyright IBM Corporation 1994

Error

The configration settings are invalid.


Select one of the following:
Automatically reconfigure system and continue.
Continue with the corrupted values.
Exit Setup
Select this item.

<F1> Help <   > Move


<ESC> Exit <Enter> Select

Fig. 1.17.3 (d) Error Screen (2) Displayed after Automatic


Activation

IBM SurePath Setup – (C) Copyright IBM Corporation 1994

Configration Error

Configration errors were detected.


Select one of the following:
Continue. Select this item.
Exit Setup

<F1> Help <   > Move


<ESC> Exit <Enter> Select

Fig. 1.17.3 (e) Error Screen (3) Displayed after Automatic


Activation

98
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

1.17.4
Details of the Set–up
Items
   Indicates the current system configuration. This information cannot be
changed.
   
 Indicates the basic I/O settings, which are as listed below:

Item Description
Serial Port A I/O Address The I/O address and IRQ of serial port A are specified.
3F8–IRQ4 is usually specified.

Serial Port B I/O Address The I/O address and IRQ of serial port B are specified.
2F8–IRQ3 is usually specified.

Parallel Port I/O Address The I/O address and IRQ of the parallel port are specified.
3BC–IRQ7 is usually specified.

Parallel Port Mode The operation mode of the parallel part is specified. Stan-
dard corresponds to AT mode while Extended corresponds
to PS/2 mode.
Standard is usually specified.

Parallel Port Extended Bidirectional is specified if the parallel port mode is


Mode Extended.
Mouse Install is specified when a mouse is connected.
Diskette Drive A The media type for drive A is specified.
Diskette Drive B The media type for drive B is specified.
Video Setup... The type of the video chip is indicated. This setting cannot
be changed.
IDE Drives Setup... The HDD type is indicated. This setting cannot be
changed.

    The date and time can be changed. If an invalid value is included, correct
that value. The values are indicated as follows:
Hours : Minutes : Seconds
Month : Day : Year

99
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

   
  A password and other access right settings are specified.

Item Sub–item Description


Secure Hard Hard Disk Access
Disk Drives and Only Enable (default) can be specified.
Diskette Drives
Diskette Drive When Disable is specified, a connected floppy
Access disk drive cannot be accessed.
Power–on Pass- Enter Power–on A power–on password is input. The password
word Password must consist of seven or more characters.
Enter Power–on The same password is input again.
Password Again
Set or change To set or change the power–on password, this
Power–on item is selected after the above two items have
Password been set.
Delete Power–on This item is selected to delete the power–on
Password password.
Password Prompt When Off is specified, the password input
immediately before booting is unnecessary.
(The set–up password is still necessary.)
Administrator Enter Administrator An administrator password is input. The pass-
Password Password word must consist of seven or more characters.
Enter Administrator The same password is input again.
Password Again
Set or change To set or change the administrator password,
Administrator this item is selected after the above two items
Password are set.
Delete Administrator This item is selected to delete the administrator
Password password.
Power–on Pass- When YES is specified, the power–on pass-
word changeable by word can be changed.
user

NOTE
The administrator password has a higher priority than the
power–on password. If the BIOS setup is started with the
power–on password when both passwords have been
specified, only the system summary and power–on
password can be changed. Both the power–on password
and administrator password can be used as the password
immediately before booting.

100
B–62705EN/03 1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION

    Indicates the basic I/O settings, which are as listed below:

Item Description
Keyboard NumLock State This item specifies whether the keyboard NumLock is set
to on or off at power–up.
Keyboard Speed The typematic rate of the keyboard is specified.
Disketteless Operation When Enable is specified, no configuration error will occur,
irrespective of whether a floppy disk drive is connected.
Enable is usually specified.

Monitorless Operation Only Disable can be specified.

Keyboardless Operation When Enable is specified, no configuration error will occur,


irrespective of whether a keyboard is connected. Enable is
usually specified.
Automatic Configuration When Enable is specified, setting an environment will not
result in a configuration error. The environment is updated
automatically. Enable is usually specified.
PCMCIA ATA Card Enable should be specified when a PCMCIA ATA card is
used.
First Startup Device A boot sequence is specified.
Second Startup Device
Third Startup Device
Fourth Startup Device
Power On Self Test When Quick is specified, no memory test is performed at
power–up. Only ENHANCED can be specified.

Virus Detection When the contents of the boot sector of the hard disk drive
are changed, notes relating to virus protection are dis-
played. (These notes are also displayed at the first booting
after Enable is specified.)

    


Item Sub–item Description
Cache Control Cache State Whether the internal cache is set to on or off is
specified. Enable (ON) is usually specified.
ROM F0000H–FFFFFH BIOS ROM shadowing in the individual areas is
Shadowing E8000H–EFFFFH specified.
E0000H–E7FFFH When the BIOS version is changed, the BIOS
D8000H–DFFFFH areas may be changed. The use of the default
D0000H–D7FFFH settings is recommended.
C0000H–CFFFFH
Non Cacheable Region A non–cacheable region in the area between
D0000H and DFFFFH is specified. Disable is
usually specified.


   
Item Description

Doze Timer Only Disable can be specified.

Sleep Timer Only Disable can be specified.

IDE Standby Timer Only Disable can be specified.

101
1. DISPLAY AND OPERATION B–62705EN/03

1.17.5 This section describes how to save and end the BIOS setup and how to
How to End the Set–up abort the BIOS setup.
1. Saving and ending the BIOS setup
(1) Position the cursor to “ExitSetup” on the menu screen, then press
the Enter key.
(2) Position the cursor to “Yes, Save and exit the Setup Utility.” Press
the Enter key. The system is automatically rebooted.
2. Aborting the BIOS setup
(1) Position the cursor to “ExitSetup” on the menu screen, then press
the Enter key.
(2) Position the cursor to “No, Exit the Setup Utility without saving.”
Press the Enter key. The system is automatically rebooted.

102
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2 HARDWARE

This chapter describes structure of CNC control section, connection of


units and the functions of PCBs and modules mounted on PCBs.

2.1 GENERAL OF HANDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104


2.2 CONFIGURATION OF PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
AND LED DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
2.3 LIST OF UNIT AND PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . 142
2.4 HOW TO REPLACE THE MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2.5 REPLACING THE FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.6 HOW TO REPLACE THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.7 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
2.8 REPLACING THE LCD BAKLIGHT FOR
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.9 ADJUSTING THE FLAT DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
2.10 MAINTENANCE OF HEAT PIPE TYPE HEAT
EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
2.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENT . . . . . . . . . . . 166
2.12 POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
2.13 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

103
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.1
GENERAL OF
HANDWARE
D Series 21

Option board Main board I/O board

(21–TB) S Main CPU S Power PCB (built–in)


S Loader control S Memory DC–DC converter
S Remote buffer System software, S DI/DO
(21–MB) Macro program, S Reader/puncher I/F
S Remote buffer Ladder program, S MDI control
Parameter, and etc. S Display control
S PMC control S Manual pulse generator
S I/O Link control control
S Servo control
S Spindle control
S Memory card I/F
S LED display

Option Main I/O

2–slot
3–slot

104
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D Series 210

MMC–IV Main board I/O board

S MMC function S Main CPU S Power PCB (built–in)


S Memory DC–DC converter
System software, S DI/DO
Macro program, S Reader/puncher I/F
Ladder program, S MDI control
Machining program, S Display control
Parameter, and etc. S Manual pulse generator
S PMC control control
S I/O Link control
S Servo control
S Spindle control
S Memory card I/F
S LED display

MMC Empty Main I/O


Mini slot

S HSSB board

2–slot
4–slot

105
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.2
CONFIGURATION OF
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD AND LED
DISPLAY

2.2.1
Main PCB

(1) A16B–3200–0020
D Module mounting
location

(CP8 : Battery for memory)


CPU (1) (2)

Memory card

ROM ROM ROM ROM

IOLINK (JD1A) : I/ O– Link

SPDL–1 (JA7A) : Serial spindle

A–OUT1 (JA8A) : Analog spindle

SERVO1 (JS1A) : 1st axis (SAM)

(3) SERVO1 (JS2A) : 2nd axis (SAM)

SERVO1 (JS3A) : 3rd axis (SAM)

SERVO1 (JS4A) : 4th axis (SAM)

SCALE1 (JF21) : 1st axis Linear scale signal

SCALE1 (JF22) : 2nd axis Linear scale signal

SCALE1 (JF23) : 3rd axis Linear scale signal

SCALE1 (JF24) : 4th axis Linear scale signal

SC– ABS (JF25) : Battery for absolute scale

106
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D Kind of mounting module

Mounting
Module name Module specification Remarks
position
(1) PMC Control A20B–2900–0142 RA1, with I/O LINK
module
d l A20B–2900–0143 RA1, without I/O LINK
A20B–2901–0660 RA3, with I/O LINK
A20B–2901–0661 RA3, without I/O LINK
(2) Memory and A20B–2901–0760 SRAM : 256KB, FROM 256KB, with analog spindle control
S i dl module
Spindle d l A20B–2901–0761 SRAM : 256KB, FROM 256KB, with serial spindle control
A20B–2901–0764 SRAM : 0KB, FROM 128KB, with analog spindle control
A20B–2901–0765 SRAM : 0KB, FROM 128KB, with serial spindle control
(3) Servo module A20B–2902–0290 For 3rd, 4th axis

NOTE
1 256KB SRAM is mounted on the main board. When both
this memory & spindle module A20B–2901–0760 or
A20B–2901–0761 is used, the total SRAM capacity
becomes 512KB.
2 The control circuit for the first and second axes is configured
on the main board.

D Block diagram

Bus I/ F SRAM 256KB

Memory & spindle

Main CPU SRAM 0/256KB

PMC Control module FROM 128/256KB

I/O Link RA1/RA3


Spindle control Serial spindle

D/A converter Analog spindle


Memory card ³ Memory card I/ F

Control circuit for 1st


Inverter, scale, etc
and 2nd axes

Servo module

Control circuit for 3rd


Inverter, scale, etc
and 4th axes

107
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

(2) A16B–2201–0721
D Module mounting
location

CPU ROM (CP8: Battery for memory)

(1) (2) (3)


Memory card

Rotary switch for maintenance

IOLINK (JD1A): I/O LINK

SPDL–1 (JA7A): Serial spindle


A–OUT1 (JA8A): Analog spindle
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) SERVO1 (JS1A): 1st axis (Servo amp. module)
SERVO2 (JS2A): 2nd axis (Servo amp. module)
SERVO3 (JS3A): 3rd axis (Servo amp. module)
SERVO4 (JS4A): 4th axis (Servo amp. module)
SCALE1 (JF21): 1st axis linear scale signal
SCALE2 (JF22): 2nd axis linear scale signal
SCALE3 (JF23): 3rd axis linear scale signal
SCALE4 (JF24): 4th axis linear scale signal
SC–ABS (JF25): Battery for absolute scale

D Kind of mounting
modules
Position Name code Remarks
(1) RAM module A20B–2901–0711 SRAM : 256KB, DRAM : 3. 5MB
A20B–2901–0713 SRAM : 256KB, DRAM : 2. 5MB
A20B–2901–0714 SRAM : 256KB, DRAM : 3MB
A20B–2901–0716 SRAM : 128KB, DRAM : 3. 5MB
A20B–2901–0718 SRAM : 128KB, DRAM : 2. 5MB
A20B–2901–0719 SRAM : 128KB, DRAM : 3MB
(2) PMC control module A20B–2900–0142 RA1, with I/O LINK
A20B–2900–0143 RA1, without I/O LINK
A20B–2901–0660 RA3, with I/O LINK
A20B–2901–0661 RA3, without I/O LINLK
(3) F–ROM module A20B–2900–0812 2MB
A20B–2900–0814 3MB
A20B–2900–0811 4MB
(4) System control module A20B–2900–0102 With serial spindle control
A20B–2900–0103 with analog spindle control
(5) Servo control module A20B–2901–0340 For 3rd, 4th axis
(6) A20B–2902–0400 For 1st and 2nd axis
(7) Servo interface module A20B–2901–0700 For 3rd, 4th axis servo amp. Pulse coder interface
(8) For 1st and 2nd servo amp. Pulse coder interface

108
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D Block diagram

System control module

Bus I/F Calender clock

Main CPU Spindle control Serial spindle

BOOT–ROM D/A converter Analog spindle

RAM module
Servo control module

F–ROM module
Servo amp. module, Pulse
Servo I/F module coder, Linear scale

I/O LINK PMC control module


Servo control module

Memory card ³ Memory card Servo amp. module, Pulse


interface Servo I/F module coder, Linear scale

109
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

(3) A16B–2202–0900
D Module mounting
location

(1)
(CP8: Battery for memory)
CPU

Memory card

ROM
Rotary switch for maintenance

IOLINK (JD1A): I/O LINK


ROM for boot

SPDL–1 (JA7A): Serial spindle

A–OUT1 (JA8A): Analog spindle

SERV01 (JS1A): 1st axis (Servo amp. module)


(2) (3) (4)
SERV02 (JS2A): 2nd axis (Servo amp. module)

SERV03 (JS3A): 3rd axis (Servo amp. module)

SERV04 (JS4A): 4th axis (Servo amp. module)

SCALE1 (JF21): 1st axis Linear scale signal

SCALE2 (JF22): 2nd axis Linear scale signal

SCALE3 (JF23): 3rd axis Linear scale signal

SCALE4 (JF24): 4th axis Linear scale signal

SC–ABS (JF25): Battery for absolute scale

110
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D Types of modules
mounted

Mounting
Module name Specification Remarks
location
(1) F–ROM module A20B–2901–0721 2MB
A20B–2901–0720 4MB
(2) PMC control module A20B–2900–0142 RA1, with I/O Link
A20B–2900–0143 RA1, without I/O Link
A20B–2901–0660 RA3, with I/O Link
A20B–2901–0661 RA3, without I/O Link
(3) Memory and spindle A20B–2901–0760 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 256KB, Analog spindle control
module A20B–2901–0761 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 256KB, Serial spindle control
A20B–2901–0762 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 128KB, Analog spindle control
A20B–2901–0763 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 128KB, Serial spindle control
A20B–2901–0764 SRAM: 0KB, FROM: 128KB, Analog spindle control
A20B–2901–0765 SRAM: 0KB, FROM: 128KB, Serial spindle control
A20B–2901–0766 SRAM: 256KB, FROM: 256KB, Serial spindle control
(4) Servo module A20B–2902–0290 For third/fourth axis

NOTE
A servo control circuit for the first/second axis is mounted on
the main board.

D Block diagram

Memory and spindle module

Bus I/F F–ROM

Main CPU SRAM

Spindle control Serial spindle


F–ROM module

A/D conversion Analog spindle

I/O LINK PMC control module

First/second axis SVM, pulse coder, linear


control circuit scale, etc.
Memory card ³ Memory card I/F

Servo module

Third/fourth axis SVM, pulse coder, linear


SRAM
control circuit scale, etc.

111
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

D LED display
A16B–2201–0721 (1) LED status in power on routine (Green LED)
A16B–2202–0900 j:OFF J:ON
STATUS jjjj Power off
STATUS JJJJ State in which software is being loaded to DRAM after
power–on, or when CPU operation is stopped be-
cause of an error
STATUS JjJJ Waiting for other CPU’s answer (ID setting)
STATUS jjJJ Detect other CPU’s answer (Finished of ID setting)
STATUS JJjJ FANUC BUS initialized
STATUS jJjJ PMC initialization finished
STATUS JjjJ All PCBs configuration finished
STATUS JJJj PMC initial running finished
STATUS jJJj Waiting for digital servo initialization
STATUS Jjjj All initialized, running

(2) LED status in power of alarm


j:OFF J:ON
STATUS jJjj RAM parity alarm occured in main CPU board
ALARM JJj
STATUS jJjj Servo alarm (watch dog alarm) occured
ALARM jJJ
STATUS jJjj Other system alarm occured
ALARM jJj

A16B–3200–0020 (1) LED status in power on routine (Green LED)


j:OFF J:ON
STATUS jjjj Power in not turned on
STATUS JJjj Immediately after power–on or when the CPU is not
operating due to the occurrence of an error
STATUS Jjjj Normal operation underway

(2) LED status in power of alarm


j:OFF J:ON
ALARM JJjj Watch dog timer alarm is generated (Servo alarm)
ALARM jJjj Other alarm is generated
ALARM jjjj normal operation underway

112
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.2.2
I/O Printed Circuit
Board

(1) A16B–2201–073V,
A16B–2201–092V
D Module mounting
lacation

MPG (JA3B): Manual pulse generator

DC–IN (CP1A): Control unit 24V input


Power supply PCB
DC–OUT (CP1B): 24V output for CRT

(1)
I/O: Machine side DI/DO
I/O: Matrix DI/DO for machine

CRT (JA1): CRT video signal

MDI (JA2): MDI key signal

RS232–1 (JD5A): RS–232–C 1st channel

RS232–2 (JD5B): RS–232–C 2nd channel

I/O: Machine side DI/DO


I/O: Machine side DI/DO

113
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

(2) A16B–2201–091V,
A16B–2202–098V,
A16B–3200–012V
D Module mounting
lacation

MPG (JA3B): Manual pulse generator

DC–IN (CP1A): Control unit 24V input


Power supply PCB
DC–OUT (CP1B): 24V output for CRT

(1)
I/O: Machine side DI/DO
I/O: Machine side DI/DO

CRT (JA1): CRT video signal

MDI (JA2): MDI key signal

RS232–1 (JD5A): RS–232–C 1st channel

RS232–2 (JD5B): RS–232–C 2nd channel

I/O: Machine side DI/DO


I/O: Machine side DI/DO

114
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

(3) A16B–2203–007V
D Module mounting
lacation

RS232–1 (JD5A): RS–232–C 1st channel

DC–IN (CP1A): Control unit 24V input


Power supply PCB
DC–OUT (CP1B): 24V output for CRT

(1)
I/O: Machine side DI/DO
I/O: Machine side DI/DO

CRT (JA1): CRT video signal

MDI (JA2): MDI key signal

MPG (JA3): Manual pulse generator

RS232–2 (JD5B): RS–232–C 2nd channel

I/O: Machine side DI/DO


I/O: Machine side DI/DO

D Kind of module
Position Name Code Remarks
(1) Graphic module A20B–2900–0310 Graphic control

115
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.2.3
Power Supply Printed
Circuit Board

(1) A20B–1005–0421,
A20B–1005–0420
D Module mounting (Mounted on the I/O printed circuit board)
location

D LED display A green LED is provided at position A in the figure above. The LED lights
when +24 V is input.

116
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.2.4
Option 1 Board Name Specifications Function
Option 1 board A16B–2200–0913 Remote buffer

D LED display
Status of communication function

STATUS jjjj
ALARM jjj

D Communication function
j:OFF, J:ON, :Don’t care l:Blink
STATUS JJJJ Initial status after power on (CPU is not run yet)
ALARM Jjj
STATUS jJ Remote buffer CPU initialized, running
ALARM jjj
STATUS ll Communication error occured from OPTION 1 board
ALARM jjj

D Location of modules
Connector Connector
Name Number Use
LED
CPU
R232–3 JD5C RS–232–C serial port
 R422–1 JD6A RS–422 serial port
Communication
function ROM

JNA
F–BUS
back plane
connector

D Type of modules
Display of system
No. Name Specifications Function
configuration screen
(1) Commu- A20B–2900–0361 Commu- COMMUNICATION MODULE
nication nication
control control
module

117
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.2.5
Loader Control Board Name Code Function
Loader control board A16B–2202–0880 Loader control function

D LED display transition when the power is turned on


j: OFF, J: ON
No. LED display Description
1 STATUS jjjj The power is off
2 STATUS JJJJ The power has just been turned on, or the
CPU is not operating
3 STATUS jJJJ RAM is initialized
4 STATUS JjJJ The software ID has been set. The keys are
initialized. All data is cleared.
5 STATUS jjJJ Software initialization is being awaited
(wait state 1)
6 STATUS JJjJ Software initialization is being awaited
(wait state 2)
7 STATUS jJjJ The position coder is initialized
8 STATUS jJJj Digital servo initialization is being awaited
9 STATUS Jjjj Initialization has been completed
(steady state)

D LED display upon occurrence of an error


j:OFF, J:ON
No. LED display Description
1 STATUS jJjj Parity alarm in loader control
ALARM Jjj
2 STATUS jJjj Servo alarm in loader control
ALARM jjJ
3 STATUS jJjj Alarm other than parity or servo alarm
ALARM jjj

118
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D Location of modules
Connector Connector
LED
name number Use

BRAKE CNBK Brake output


ESP CNPW Emergency stop
(1) (2)
IO–1 CNWF DI/DO for workpiece feeder
TP CNTP DI/DO for teach pendant

IOLINK JD1A FANUC I/O LINK


A–OUT JA8 Servo waveform check output

AMP1 JS1A Servo amplifier for first axis


AMP2 JS2A Servo amplifier for second axis
(3) (4) (5) AMP3 JS3A Servo amplifier for third axis
AMP4 JS4A Servo amplifier for fourth axis

IO- 2 CRM1 DI/ DO for loader main body


AMP1

Display of system
No. Name Specifications Function
configuration screen
(1) – – – –
(2) DRAM A20B–2901–0941 Loader sys- DRAM:4MB
mod le
module tem RAM
A20B–2901–0942 DRAM:2MB
(3) PMC A20B–2900–0142 PMC control PMC MODULE: BSI+SLC
module
d l
A20B–2900–0143 PMC MODULE: BSI
(4) Servo A20B–2902–0290 Servo SERVO 3/4 AXIS
module control 3rd
or 4th axis
(5) Servo A20B–2902–0290 Servo SERVO 1/2 AXIS
module control 1st
or 2nd axis

119
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.2.6
HSSB Interface Board
2.2.6.1
Parts layout
(1) Interface board for Drawing Number : A20B–2002–0210
CNC B

SW1
ST1
AL2(RED)
ST2
JNA ST3 AL1(RED)
ST4

COP7
(HSSB)

(2) Interface Board for Drawing Number : A20B–8001–0300


Personal Computer
type A

COP7
(HSSB)

LED2
(GREEN)

LED1
(RED)

(3) Interface Board for Drawing Number : A20B–8100–0100


Personal Computer
type B

COP7
(HSSB)

LED2
(GREEN)

LED1
(RED)

120
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.2.6.2
System block diagram

(1) Interface B board for


CNC

BUS HSSB COP7


JNA Optical Module
INTERFACE CONTROLLER (HSSB)

COMMON RAM

(2) Interface board for


personal computer
(Includes type 1 and 2)
ISA–BUS HSSB COP7
CARD CONTROLLER Optical Module (HSSB)
EDGE

Decode circuit

Setting : Interface board for PC type 2


Switch JJJ only

2.2.6.3
Configuration switch Interfacece Board
Setting
I/F Board for CNC B

ON This is the Maintenance setting.


The start up menu is displayed.
OFF The operation of BOOT and IPL can be done
SW1 from PC.
8421
ALL=OFF

ON This is the Normal setting.


OFF
The start up menu is not displayed.
So, the operation of BOOT and IPL is skipped.
SW1
8421
ALL=OFF

121
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.2.6.4
LED display

(1) LED Display


(General) – : DON’T CARE
LED
PCB Spec
Spec. Name
RED RED GREEN
A20B–2002–0210 I/F board for CNC B AL1 AL2 Status
A20B–8001–0300 I/F board for PC Type 1 LED1 LED2
A20B–8100–0100 I/F board for PC Type 2 LED1 LED2
ON – – Communication is stopped.
– ON – Parity Error at common RAM is occured.
– – ON CNC status is good.

(2) LED Display (Status)


J : ON j : OFF
LED Status
Stat s
Status
7seg.LED ST4 to ST1
4321 Start up status after power–on.
 JJJJ
JJJj Initializing for HSSB board.

JJjJ Executing a boot operation by PC.

JJjj Displaying CNC screen on CRT of PC.

Jjjj Start up has been completed and the system is


now in normal operation mode.
jJJj The thermal error occured in the Intelligent Termi-
nal.
jJjJ Communication is not ready.

jJjj Parity Error at common RAM is occured.

jjJJ Communication Error.

jjJj Battery alarm occureed in the Intelligent Terminal.

122
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.2.7
MMC–IV PCB

2.2.7.1
A02B–0207–C020,
A02B–0207–C021,
A02B–0207–C022

(1) PART LAYOUT

MARKING
UPPER LOWER FUNCTION
TMA LED
CPU 9 STATUS ALARM LED INDICATOR
910
11 13
4 GND NC CRT JA1B ⇐ NC VIDEO SIGNAL
DRAM 12
MODULE 1 CRT JA1A ⇐ VIDEO SIGNAL
8
7 R232–1 JD5F ⇔ SERIAL PORT 1
6
ODP
SWA R232–2 JD5G ⇔ SERIAL PORT 2
SOCKET
DRAM LCD VARIABLE REGISTOR
VRA1
MODULE 2 ADJUST FOR LCD DISPLAY
FDD JD8 ⇔ FLOPPY DISK UNIT

SWA5
TMA3
SWA4 PARALLEL PORT
TMA2
SWA3 CENTRO JD9 ⇔ (CENTRONICS)
EX KEY JD21 ⇔ EXTENDEN KEYBOARD
TMA1
BIOS ROM KEYBOARD CD32A ⇔ FULL KEYBOARD

+5V GND

SWA2

MEM CARD CNA MEMORY CARD


(PCMCIA)
JNA

SWA1 MOUSE CD32B ⇔ MOUSE

HARD DISK UNIT ⇐ INPUT


⇒ OUTPUT
BACKPLANE MEMORY CARD SOCKET
CONNECTOR THERMAL ⇔ I/O
: Check pin
: Jumper plugs

123
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

(2) ADJUSTMENT
LOCATIONS

DRAM Module 1
DRAM Module 2

(1) (3) (4) (5)


(2) (6)

CPU CPU
Socket i486SX

(18) (7)(8)(9)(10)(11)

(15)
PCMCIA (19)
Socket (16)
(12)(13)(14)
(17)

LED
(20)

JAMPER PLUGS

No. Name Description Location


(1) SWA3 The board– (1) 1 2 3 (3) 1 2 (4) 3 2 1
(2) SWA4 Specifies
S ecifies the use mounted d i486SX SWA3 TMA3 SWA5
(3) TMA3
3 of the CPU and iss used
(4) SWA5 CPU socket
(2) 1 2 3
SWA4

i486DX2 CPU on (1) 1 2 3 (3) 1 2 (4) 3 2 1


CPU socket
k isi SWA3 TMA3 SWA5
used (Note)
(2) 1 2 3
SWA4

NOTE
In this setting, i486DX CPU is necessary.
MMC–IV cannot run without i486DX CPU on CPU socket.

124
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

No. Name Description Location


(5) SWA9 (5) 1 2 3 (13) SWA7 (16) SWA12
(6) SWA10 S ecifies whether
Specifies SWA9 (12) SWA6  (14) SWA8 (15) SWA11  (17) SWA13
the display unit is An
((12)) SWA6
S 6 LCD 1 3
(13) SWA7 the LCD or CRT
is (6) 1 2 3 2 2
(14) SWA8 used SWA10 3 1
((15)) SWA11
(16) SWA12
See the next page
(17) SWA13 (5) 1 2 3 (13) SWA7 ((16)) SWA12
An SWA9 (12) SWA6  (14) SWA8 (15) SWA11  (17) SWA13
CRT 1 3
is (6) 1 2 3 2 2
used SWA10 3 1

(7) TMA4 TMA TMA TMA TMA TMA


(8) TMA6 Eliminates flicker 4 6 7 8 9 If the NC screen flickers, try moving the
( )
(9) TMA
TMA7 of the NC screen jumper
jum er plug
lug until the flicker is eliminated
eliminated.
1
(10) TMA8
2
(11) TMA9

ADJUSTING SWA6 TO SWA13

SWA6 to SWA13 and the BIOS display unit setting must be set according
to the actual display unit to be connected.
SWA6 to SWA13 and the BIOS display unit setting are factory–adjusted
according to the user’s specifications. The settings must be modified in
the following cases:
i) When the BIOS setup parameters, including the display unit setting,
are cleared or destroyed. (The default display unit (LCD) is
selected.)
ii) When the BIOS display unit setting is changed such that it does not
correspond to the connected display unit
iii) When the connected display unit is changed such that it does not
correspond to the BIOS settings.
The tables below list the screen statuses that depend on the jumper plug
and BIOS display unit settings, and the actual display unit connected.
D When an LCD is connected
BIOS SETTING SIMULTANEOUS
LCD (Default)
(Defa lt) CRT
SWA6 to 13 (LCD & CRT)
LCD f f L
CRT l 1 1

f : A normal screen is displayed.


l, L : Nothing is displayed.
1 : A dark screen (half luminance) is displayed.

125
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

D When a CRT is connected


BIOS SETTING SIMULTANEOUS
LCD (Default)
(Defa lt) CRT
SWA6 to 13 (LCD & CRT)
LCD 2 2 l
CRT L f f
f : A normal screen is displayed.
l, L : Nothing is displayed.
2 : The displayed screen is overly bright (about double
luminance) and all characters are blurred.
* If the display unit is used for an extended period with
these settings, the lifetime of the unit will be shortened.
When nothing is displayed with the settings indicated by a solid star L,
adjust the setting as described below:
(1) Adjust SWA6 to SWA13 to the opposite of the actually connected
display unit.
When a CRT is connected, adjust SWA6 to SWA13 to the LCD
positions.
When an LCD is connected, adjust SWA6 to SWA13 to the CRT
positions.
(2) Change the BIOS setting to SIMULTANEOUS.
(3) Set SWA6 to SWA13 according the actually connected display unit.
When nothing is displayed with the settings indicated by a hollow star l,
modify the settings of SWA6 to SWA13.
BIOS SETUP UTILITY SCREEN (SECOND PAGE)
Phoenix SETUP Utility (Version 1.00)
(c)Phoenix Technologies Ltd. 1985, 1992 All Rights Reserved

Page 2 of 3
** Device Feature Control **

Serial Port: 01ABh Floppy Boot: Enabled


Track Ball: 02CDh
Parallel Port: 03EFh
Display: LCD
Video Mode Graphics : Normal
Internal Cache: Enabled Video Mode Text: Normal
Vertical Compensation: Disabled

LCD (default)
CRT
SIMULTANEOUS

Esc F2 ↑ ↓ Space/– PgUp/Dn


Menu Sys Info Field Value Page

SETTING THE VARIABLE RESISTOR


No. Name Description Method to specify
(20) VRA1 The video sig- This item is Factory–adjusted.
nal voltage level The screen may flicker depending on the
is adjusted. length of the cable used. In this case, follow
This setting is the procedure described below.
valid only for the 1. Display the LCD adjustment screen (see
MMC screen the next page.)
when an LCD is
connected. 2. Make adjustment so that an 8–shade gray
scale pattern displayed on the screen
does not flicker.

126
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

LCD ADJUSTMENT SCREEN

A gray scale graphic pattern is displayed on the LCD screen.


(1) Program name
The name of the program for LCD screen adjustment is
LCDCHECK. EXE.
The program is contained on standard driver/library disk
(A02B–0207–K700) version 01.2. and up.
(2) Activation method
Insert the standard driver/library disk in drive A, and enter the
following command.

C:¥> A:LCDCHECK

(3) Display screen


A gray scale pattern is displayed on the screen. It has 8 different
shades ranging from black at the left to white at the right. The lower
half screen consists of vertical stripes interlaced at one–bit intervals.
Rough sketch of the pattern

LCD CHECK PATTERN Ver1.0


for FANUC MMC–IV

Push any key to terminate process.

Black White
Gray scale with 8 different shades. The lower
half of the screen has vertical stripes interlaced
at one–bit intervals.

(4) Operation
Pressing anykey erases the gray scale pertern and causes the DOS
prompt to appear.

127
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

(4) LED INDICATOR The MMC–IV printed circuit board has two rows of status indicate LEDs
at the top of the front panel:
The upper row consists of four green STATUS LEDs.
The lower row consists of three red ALARM LEDs.
In the accompanying tables, the LED statuses MMC–IV
are represented as follows:
: Not lit
: Lit 1234
: Don’t care STATUS jjjj
ALARM jjj
(1) Normal statuses
LED
No
No. MMC–IV STATUS
STATUS ALARM
1 The power is turned off.
2 The MMC–IV reset status is released.
3 The hard disk drive is being accessed.

(2) Alarm statuses


LED
No
No. MMC–IV STATUS
STATUS ALARM
1 An NMI occurs in the MMC–IV CPU.
The ambient temperature around the hard
2
disk drive is below 5°C or above 55°C.
A parity alarm occurred in the backplane
3
DRAM.

128
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.2.7.2
A16B–2203–0180

(1) Parts layout

TMA4, LED (STATUS/ALARM) :State indicator


SW1
TMA6–9
MC CRT (JA1B) :NC video signal in
CRT (JA1A) :Video signal out
R232–1 (JD5F) :Serial port 1
SWA6–13 R232–2 (JD5G) :Serial port 2
Fuse LCD ADJUST :Adjuster for LCD display
(+3.3V) Card PC

Fuse FDD(JD8) :Floppy disk unit


(+12V)
DRAM :Parallel port (Centronics)
module CENTRO (JD9)

KEYBOARD (CD32A) :Full keyboard


HDD unit LED (FUSE) :Fuse indicator
LED (POWER) :+3.3V indicator

MOUSE (CD32B) :Mouse

129
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

(2) Setting points


D Setting of Short Plugs
Name Description Setting
SW1, Set up according CRT SW1 SWA13
SWA6 13
SWA6-13 to the connected
display
y unit (LCD
( SWA10 SWA12
or CRT) SWA9 SWA11
SWA6
SWA7
SWA8
LCD SW1 SWA13
SWA10 SWA12
SWA9 SWA11
SWA6
SWA7
SWA8
TMA4, 6-9 Eliminates flicker TMA9 If the NC screen flickers try
off the
h NC screen TMA8 i
moving h jjumper plug
the l
until the flicker is eliminated
TMA7
TMA6
TMA4
* It is not necessary to set up the BIOS according to the using display.

D Setting of variable
resistor Name Description Setting
VRA1 Adjust the voltage level of Factory–adjusted
the video signal. If the screen is flickering, please adjust
(Effective only for the MMC by this resistor referring to Page 127.
screen when the LCD is
connected.)

130
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

(3) LED display The details of the LED display on the new MMC–IV board is as follows.
: Not lit MMC–IV
: Lit
: Don’t care

1234
STATUS jjjj
(1) LED (STATUS/ALARM) ALARM jjj

Normal status
LED
No
No. Details
STATUS ALARM
1 The power it turned off.
2 The HDD is being accessed
3 The MMC–IV reset is released

Alarm status
LED
No
No. Details
STATUS ALARM
The ambient temperature around the HDD
1
is below 5°C or above 55°C
Parity alarm occurred in the back panel
2
DRAM

(2) LED (FUSE)


The new MMC–IV board has two fuses in it. This LED indicates that
either fuse melted down.
In this case please replace fuse according to the Subsec.2.5.2.
(3) LED (POWER)
This LED indicates that the power supply circuit for +3.3V become
abnormal state or the fuse for +3.3V melts down.
If this LED turns on, please replace the fuse or the board.

131
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.2.8
Intelligent Terminal

D Parts layout Specification : A16B–3300–0010, –0011/03A or later

*
BAT1(BATTERY) CN1(LCD)
*
VR1

JD33(RS232–1)
CA39
(FAN) JD34(RS232–2)

JD9(CENTRO)

PC
CD32(KEYBOARD)
CARD

HSSBC COP7(HSSB)

SW1
CN2 (FDD power)
SW2
SW4
CN8(HDD)
SW3
GND
SW5 SW4 SW5 SW3

–5V
*
+5V JNS (ISA extension backplane connector)
–24V
CD34(FDD)
+3.3V

–24V Thermostat
–12V

–12V

* CP5(+24V)
Fuse (5A)

: Check pin
CN7 CNH2 CNH1 : Jumper plug
(LCD power)

*
* The positions differ on the printed circuit boards of comprehensive version 01A and 02A.

132
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D Adjustment

PC
CARD

LED (6)
(5)
(2) (1)

(4) (3)

(1) Jumper plug settings


No. Name Description Setting
(1) SW1 Sets the dis
dis- Uses a color TFT dis
dis- SW2 SW1
(2) SW2 play unit
lay unit. play
lay.
(2) (1)
Uses a monochrome SW2 SW1
display
STN dis lay.
(2) (1)
(3) SW3 Reserved The factory adjusted
factory–adjusted A (5) B SW5 A (5) B SW5
(4) SW4 setting should not be
((5)) SW5 h g d O
changed. One off th
these (4) SW4
SW4 SW3
two ooptions set
tions is set. (4) (3)
(3) SW3

Note: SW4 may be connected for some specific applications.


(6) VR1 Adjusts the Set the resistor to the position where the optimum
view angle of display is obtained.
the mono-
chrome STN
display. (6) VR1

133
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

D LED display

DA16(GREEN)
DA17(GREEN)
DA18(GREEN)
DA19(RED)
COP7 DA20(RED)

CD32
CN2

Name Status
DA20 Indicates that a battery alarm has occurred. Replace the battery of
the intelligent terminal.
DA19 Indicates that the HSSB transfer has been aborted. The following
causes are possible:
– The CNC is turned off.
– The optical fiber cable is disconnected.
– The CNC or PC interface board is defective.
DA18 Lit while the CNC is operating normally.
DA17 HDD access lamp
DA16 Lit while +5V is being supplied.

D ISA extension board


(1) Board that can be used For an intelligent terminal, up to two ISA extension boards, as shown
below, can be used.
Height of the components on the back surface: Up to 3.81 mm

Height of the components on the front surface: Up to 13.34 mm

Feet of metal vibration isolator


5 5

79mm to 113mm
(If this range is 20 20
exceeded, the board
cannot be held tight by
a vibration isolator.)

Up to 170mm Unit: mm

NOTE
FANUC will not ensure the operation nor perform the
maintenance of a commercial ISA extension board.

134
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

(2) Procedure for 1. Remove the metal vibration isolator.


mounting the ISA 2. Insert the board connector into the slot.
extension board 3. Fasten the board using the screw.
(See the below figure.)
4. Fasten the metal vibration isolator, using the screw, while pressing it
against the board.
When two or more ISA extension boards are mounted, the board mounted
in slot A must be shorter than that mounted in slot B. Otherwise, the
boards cannot be held tight by different metal vibration isolators.

Slot B

Metal vibration isolator A

Screw

Slot A

Metal vibration isolator B

Screw hole B
Screw hole A

Mounting the ISA Extension Board

D Notes
(1) Address map D The memory space between D00000h and FFFFFFh is used by the
intelligent terminal and cannot be used by the ISA board. The other
areas are used as in an IBM PC compatible personal computer.
D The I/O space is used as in an IBM PC compatible personal computer.
No area is exclusively used by the intelligent terminal.
D The setup specifies COM1, COM2, and a parallel port.

(2) Interrupt and DMA D The intelligent terminal uses the following IRQ signals:
request IRQ1 : Keyboard
IRQ3 : COM2
IRQ4 : COM1
IRQ6 : Floppy disk drive
IRQ7 : Parallel port
IRQ12 : Mouse
IRQ14 : Internal hard disk drive
IRQ3, IRQ4, and IRQ7 can be changed by the BIOS setup.
D The intelligent terminal uses the following DRQ signal:
DRQ2 : Floppy disk drive

135
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

(3) Others When any of the following conditions is satisfied, normal operation may
not be possible:
D The ISA bus signal is subjected to pull–up/pull–down processing.
D The refresh cycle of the ISA bus is used.
Other conditions may be added in the future.

(4) Troubleshooting

Problem Countermeasure ( ⇒ : Yes → : No)


(1) The power is turned on, but nothing • Are all LEDs off? ⇒ Go (11)
i displayed.
is di l d ↓ No Yes
Y

• Is DA19 (red LED) on? ⇒ Go (2)


(See the description of the LED display.) Yes
↓ No
• Is the CNC interface ⇒ The intelligent terminal type
board as shown below? Yes is not set to within the correct
temperature range.
(See Section 2.11, ”Environ-
mental Requirement.”)
: ON
: OFF
ST1
or
ST4
Interface board
Interface board A for thin slot B for mini–slot

↓ No
• Are the settings of SW1 → Correct the settings.
to SW5 correct? No
(1) See the description of the jumper plug settings.
⇓ Yes
Is the printed circuit board defective?
(2) DA19 is on. • Is the optical fiber cable connected? → Connect the cable.
(HSSB isi not ready.)
d ) ⇓ Yes No
N

• Is the NC turned on? → Turn the NC on.


⇓ Yes No
N

• Is the printed circuit board or


NC interface board defective?
(3) The LCD backlight blinks. • A FAN alarm or battery alarm has been issued. Check whether the fan
of the intelligent terminal has stopped or whether the intelligent terminal
has issued a battery alarm (DA20 is on).
(4) COM or LPT cannot be used. Check the BIOS parameters.

Cause Countermeasure ( ⇒ : Yes → : No)


(11) The power supply circuit is not oper- • Has any fuse on the printed cir- ⇒ Replace the fuse.
ating normally. cuit board blown? Yes Remove the cause.
↓ No
• Does the status change when a cable ⇒ Check the cable.
of the peripheral equipment is discon- Yes
nected?
↓ No
Is the printed circuit board defective?

136
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.2.9
Intelligent Terminal 2

D Specification :
A20B–2100–0240
CN3
(INVERTER)

Thermal +3.3V BAT1


+24V
+12V
+5V
CNH1
–12V
–24V
CNH2 –5V
(BATTERY)

TM10

JNS (ISA Extension Backplane) GND

CN10 (PCMCIA I/F)


CN5 (PC CARD)
TM1

HSSBC
CN8 (HDD)

CD37
(TOUCH PANEL)
SW7
SW6
SW5
SW4

(FDD Power)
SW3

SW2

SW1

CN2

CN1 (LCD)
COP7
Thermal CD32A (HHSB)
JD34 (RS232–2)

JD33 (RS232–1)
JD9 (CENTRO)

(KEYBOARD)
FUSE CP5
(+24V)
(5A)
CD32B
CD34 (FDD) (MOUSE)
LED

137
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

D Adjustment

(7)(6)(5)(4) (3) (2) (1)

LED

(1) Setting of Rotary


Switches No. Name Description Notes
(1) SW1 15 to 04 bit of I/O port address Note that this settings are not
(2) SW2 used by I.T.2 duplicated with the space
(3) SW3 (Default settings are SW3=0, using by IBM–PC compat-
(Default settings are SW2=2, ible personal computers.
(Default settings are SW1=8)

(2) Setting of short Plugs


No. Name Description Location
(4) SW4 Reserved Never Change B : Open
(5) SW5
: Short
(6) SW6
A
(7) SW7 (7) (6) (5) (4)

138
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D LED display

COP7
JD33 JD34 JD9 CN2

DA59 (GREEN)
DA60 (GREEN)
DA61 (GREEN)
DA62 (RED)
DA63 (RED)

Name Color Status


DA59 GREEN Power is turned on (+5V).
DA60 GREEN HDD access LED.
DA61 GREEN CNC status is normal.
DA62 RED HSSB is not ready. The cause is as follows.
D CNC poer is not turned on.
D Optical fiber cable is not connected.
D Something goes wrong with the interface board
for CNC.
D Something goes wrong with the I.T.2.
DA63 RED Battery alarm. The battery on I.T.2 is exhausted.
Please exchange it.

139
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

D Mounting Position of
Maintenance Supplies

Bettery

Fan

LCD Backlight

Fuse Socket

Fuse

D Specification of
Maintenance Supplies Name Specification
Battery A02B–0200–K102
Fuse A13B–0172–K020
Fan A90L–0001–0423#105
LCD Backlight A61L–0001–0163#BL

140
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D Trouble Shooting
Problem Measure ( ⇒ : Yes → : No)
(1) Power supply is good, but nothing • Are LED all off? ⇒ Go (11)
di l
displayed.
d ↓ No Yes
Y

• Is DA62 (Red, Refer to Item “LED ⇒ Go (2)


display” 3) on? Yes
↓ No
• Are LED displaying ⇒ I.T.2 is not in proper temperature.
as below figure? Yes (Refer to Sec.2.11.)
: ON
: OFF
ST1
or
ST4

I/F board A for thin slot I/F board B for mini slot
↓ No
• Are the SW1 to SW7 correct? → Change setting
⇓ Yes N
No

Is the P.C.B. not good?


(2) HSSB is not ready. • Is the optical fiber cable connected? → Connect.
(DA62 is
i off.)
ff ) ⇓ Yes No
N

• Is the CNC on? → Turn on the CNC.


⇓ Yes No
N

Is the P.C.B. or the HSSB I/F board (CNC side) not good?
(3) LCD backlight blinks. • Periodical blink indicates a fan alarm or a battery alarm.
Check whether the fan is not rotating or a battery alarm occur (DA63 is on).
(4) COM, LPT is not usable. Check BIOS parameters.

Cause Countermeasure ( ⇒ : Yes → : No)


(11) Power is not good. • Has the fuse burnt out? ⇒ Exchange the fuse.
Yes Check the cause.
↓ No
• If all user cables are disconnect, has ⇒ Check user cables.
the state been changed? Yes
↓ No
Is the P.C.B. not good?

141
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.3
LIST OF UNIT AND
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD

2.3.1
Control Unit P.C.B.

Name Specification Remarks 21-TB 210-TB 21-MB 210-MB


Power supply P.C.B. A A20B–1005–0421 Small capacity f f
Power supply P.C.B. B A20B–1005–0420 Large capacity f f f f
A16B–3200–0020 Ordering No. A02B–0210–H001 f

Main board A16B–2201–0721 Ordering No. A02B–0179–H001 f


Ordering No. A02B–0218–H001
A16B–2202–0900 f f f f
A02B–0219–H002
Ordering No. A02B–0179–H011
Bult–in I/O board A1 A16B–2201–0732 f f
A02B–0218–H010#A1
Bult–in I/O board A2 A16B–2201–0737 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#A2 f f
Ordering No. A02B–0179–H016
Bult–in I/O board B1 A16B–2201–0910 f f
A02B–0218–H010#B1
Bult–in I/O board B2 A16B–2201–0915 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#B2 f f
Bult–in I/O board B3 A16B–2201–0918 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#B3 f
Ordering No. A02B–0179–H013
Bult–in I/O board C1 A16B–2201–0922 f f
A02B–0218–H010#C1
Ordering No. A02B–0179–H015
Bult–in I/O board C2 A16B–2201–0927 f f
A02B–0218–H010#C2
A16B–3200–0120 Ordering No. A02B–0179–H017
Bult–in I/O board D1 f f
A16B–2202–0980 A02B–0218–H010#D1
A16B–3200–0125 Ordering No. A02B–0179–H018
Bult–in I/O board D2 f f
A16B–2202–0985 A02B–0218–H010#D2
Bult–in I/O board D3 A16B–2202–0988 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#D3 f
A16B–3200–0030
Bult–in I/O board A Ordering No. A02B–0210–H010 f
A16B–2203–0040
A16B–3200–0031
Bult–in I/O board B Ordering No. A02B–0210–H011 f
A16B–2203–0041
A16B–3200–0035
Bult–in I/O board C Ordering No. A02B–0210–H012 f
A16B–2203–0045
A16B–3200–0036
Bult–in I/O board D Ordering No. A02B–0210–H013 f
A16B–2203–0046
Bult–in I/O board E0 A16B–2203–0070 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#E0 f f
Bult–in I/O board E1 A16B–2203–0071 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#E1 f f
Bult–in I/O board E2 A16B–2203–0072 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#E2 f
Bult–in I/O board E5 A16B–2203–0075 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#E5 f f
Bult–in I/O board E6 A16B–2203–0076 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#E6 f f
Bult–in I/O board E7 A16B–2203–0077 Ordering No. A02B–0218–H010#E7 f
A20B–1006–0260 2–slot f
A20B–2000–0880 2–slot f f f f
Back panel
A20B–2000–0890 3–slot f f
A20B–2002–0180 4–slot (For Series 210 with MMC–IV) f f
Option 1 board A16B–2200–0913 f f
(remote buffer)
Loader control board A16B–2202–0880 f

142
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

Name Specification Remarks 21-TB 210-TB 21-MB 210-MB


MMC–IV board A02B–0207–C020 CPU 486SX f f
A02B–0207–C022 CPU 486DX2 f f
DRAM module A76L–0500–0005 4MB f f
DRAM module A76L–0500–0006 8MB f f
HDD unit A02B–0207–C051 256MB f f
New MMC–IV main board A16B–2203–0180 f f
Card PC A15L–0001–0052#2 In new MMC–IV board f f
DRAM module 4MB A76L–0500–0007 In new MMC–IV board f f
HDD unit A02B–0207–C054 In new MMC–IV board f f
High–speed serial bus A20B–2002–0210 f f
interface board (CNC side)
High–speed serial bus A20B–8001–0300 Type 1 f f
i t f
interface b
board
d (PC side)
id )
(A20B–8001–0581) Type 2 f f
A20B–8100–0100
Intelligent terminal A16B–3300–0010 DRAM 8MB f f
A16B–3300–0011 DRAM 12MB f f
Intelligent terminal type 2 A20B–2100–0240 f f
Inverter P.C.B. A20B–2002–0500 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
Touch panel controller A20B–8001–0620 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
Card PC (DRAM 4MB) A13B–0178–H001 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
Card PC (DRAM 16MB) A13B–0178–H002 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
Card PC (DRAM 24MB) A13B–0178–H003 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
HDD unit A13B–0178–H030 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
ISA extension unit A13B–0178–H040 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
(with ISA extension)
ISA extension unit A13B–0178–H049 In the intelligent terminal type 2 f f
(without ISA extension)
ISA extension backplane A20B–2002–0240 f f
for intelligent terminal
Soft key P.C.B. for intelli- A20B–1006–0791 f f
gent terminal

143
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.3.2
Others

Name Specification Remarks


2–slot A02B–0210–C001 For Series 21–TB (FANUC)
2–slot A02B–0210–C011 For Series 21–TB (GEFANUC)
Control unit rack 2–slot A02B–0218–C002 For Series 21/210–TB/MB
3–slot A02B–0218–C003 For Series 21–TB/MB
4–slot A02B–0218–C004 For Series 210–TB/MB
7.2” monochrome LCD control board A20B–2001–0840
8.4” color LCD control board A16B–2300–0082
9.5” monochrome LCD control board A20B–2001–0840
9.5” color LCD control board A16B–2300–0081
A02B–0210–C041#TA For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
Horizontal type 9” CRT/MDI
A02B–0210–C041#TAS For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
Separate 9” CRT A02B–0210–C111 For Series 21/210–TB
Separate 7.2” monochrome LCD A02B–0200–C081 For Series 21/210–TB
Separate 9.5” monochrome LCD A02B–0200–C115 For Series 21/210–TB
Separate 8.4” color LCD A02B–0218–C050 For Series 21/210–TB
A02B–0210–C120#TA For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
Separate small MDI
A02B–0210–C120#TAS For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0210–C122#TA For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
A02B–0210–C122#TAS For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0218–C120#TR For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
Separate full–size
full size MDI
A02B–0218–C120#TS For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0218–C121#TR For Series 21/210–TB (English MDI)
A02B–0218–C121#TS For Series 21/210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0200–C071#TBR For Series 210–TB (English MDI)
A02B–0200–C071#TBS For Series 210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
14” color CRT/MDI
A02B–0200–C072#TBR For Series 210–TB (English MDI)
A02B–0200–C072#TBS For Series 210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0200–C065#TBR For Series 210–TB (English MDI)
A02B–0200–C065#TBS For Series 210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
9 5” color LCD/MDI
9.5”
A02B–0200–C066#TBR For Series 210–TB (English MDI)
A02B–0200–C066#TBS For Series 210–TB (Symbolic MDI)
A13B–0172–B001 For Series 210–TB/MB
9.5”TFT color LCD,8MBmemory, without ISA extension
A13B–0172–B002 For Series 210–TB/MB
9.5”TFT color LCD,12MBmemory, without ISA extension
A13B–0172–B021 For Series 210–TB/MB
9.5”STN color LCD,8MBmemory, without ISA extension
A13B–0172–B022 For Series 210–TB/MB
9.5”STN color LCD,12MBmemory, without ISA extension
Intelligent terminal
A13B–0172–B101 For Series 210–TB/MB
9.5”TFT color LCD,8MBmemory, with ISA extension
A13B–0172–B102 For Series 210–TB/MB
9.5”TFT color LCD,12MBmemory, with ISA extension
A13B–0172–B121 For Series 210–TB/MB
9.5”STN color LCD,8MBmemory, with ISA extension
A13B–0172–B122 For Series 210–TB/MB
9.5”STN color LCD,12MBmemory, with ISA extension

144
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

Name Specification Remarks


A13B–0178–B001 For Series 210–TB/MB
10.4”TFT color LCD, without soft key, without touch panel

Intelligent terminal type 2 A13B–0178–B002 For Series 210–TB/MB


10.4”TFT color LCD, with soft key
A13B–0178–B003 For Series 210–TB/MB
10.4”TFT color LCD, with touch panel
A02B–0210–C041#MA For Series 21/210–MB (English MDI)
Horizontal type 9”CRT/MDI
A02B–0210–C041#MAS For Series 21/210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
Separate 9”CRT A02B–0210–C111 For Series 21/210–MB
Separate 9”PDP A02B–0200–C100 For Series 21/210–MB
Separate 7.2” monochrome LCD A02B–0200–C081 For Series 21/210–MB
Separate 9.5” monochrome LCD A02B–0200–C115 For Series 21/210–MB
Separate 8.4” color LCD A02B–0218–C050 For Series 21/210–MB
A02B–0210–C120#MA For Series 21/210–MB (English MDI)
Separate small MDI
A02B–0210–C120#MAS For Series 21/210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0210–C122#MA For Series 21/210–MB (English MDI)
A02B–0210–C122#MAS For Series 21/210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0218–C120#MR For Series 21/210–MB (English MDI)
Separate full–size
full size MDI
A02B–0218–C120#MS For Series 21/210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0218–C121#MR For Series 21/210–MB (English MDI)
A02B–0218–C121#MS For Series 21/210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0200–C071#MBR For Series 210–MB (English MDI)
A02B–0200–C071#MBS For Series 210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
14” color CRT/MDI
A02B–0200–C072#MBR For Series 210–MB (English MDI)
A02B–0200–C072#MBS For Series 210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
A02B–0200–C065#MBR For Series 210–MB (English MDI)
A02B–0200–C065#MBS For Series 210–MB (Symbolic MDI)
9 5” color LCD/MDI
9.5”
A02B–0200–C066#MBR For Series 210–MB (English MDI)
A02B–0200–C066#MBS For Series 210–MB (Symbolic MDI)

145
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.4
HOW TO REPLACE
THE MODULES

2.4.1
Removing (1) Pull the latches of the module socket outwards. (Fig.(a))
(2) Pull out the module upward. (Fig.(b))

2.4.2
Insertion (1) Insert the new module board diagonally with B–SIDE outward.
(Fig.(b))
(2) While pushing on the upper edge of the module board, raise it until it
is locked. (Fig.(c))

(a)

No.1 pin

(b)

(c)

146
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.5
REPLACING THE
FUSES

2.5.1 When a fuse built–in I/O board blows in the power supply unit of the
Replacing the Fuses CNC, find and correct the cause of the failure and replace the fuse.
Fig.2.5.1 shows the fuse mounting diagram.
for Power Supply of
Control Unit Fuse specification : A60L–0001–0046 #7.5R

I/O board
Fuse

Fig.2.5.1 Mounting positions of fuses in the power supply unit

2.5.2 When fuses on the new MMC–IV board melted down, find the cause and
Replacing the Fuses take measures. After that, replace the fuse.
for New MMC–IV Name ORDERING NUMBER REMARKS
Fuse A02B–0207–K100 0.5A Fuse for +12V 1,
5.0A Fuse for +3.3V 1

147
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.5.3
Replacing the Fuses WARNING
for Intelligent Terminal Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the
2 cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only the personnel
who have a working knowledge of maintenance and safety
are allowed to carry out this work. When replacing a fuse
with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.

(1) At first, Check the cause that the fuse has been broken and remove
the cause.
(2) Prepare a new Fuse (A13B–0172–K020).
(3) Make sure that I.T.2 is turned off the power.
(4) Enable to work from rear side of I.T.2 by taking it out from panel,
etc.
(5) Remove the old fuse, and put a new fuse to the socket exactly.
(6) Mount I.T.2 again.
(7) Turn on the power, then confirm that I.T.2 is turned on.

148
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.5.4 This section describes the location and replacement of the LCD fuse.
Replacing the Fuse for
LCD WARNING
Before replacing a blown fuse, it is necessary to remove the
cause of the blown fuse. For this reason, only the personnel
who have a working knowledge of maintenance and safety
are allowed to carry out this work. When replacing a fuse
with the cabinet open, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.

D   
 

Fuse FS1

LCD Unit (Rear view)

D 
 

(1) If the fuse blows, first find and eliminate the cause. Then, replace the
fuse.
(2) Pull the old fuse up.
(3) Push a new fuse into the fuse holder.

D 
   Ordering code : A02B–0200–K103 *
Rating : 5.0 A

In–house code : A60L–0001–0290#LM50

149
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.6 This chapter describes the method of replacing batteries as follows.


HOW TO REPLACE 2.6.1 Replacing the CNC Battery for Memory Back Up
THE BATTERIES 2.6.2 Replacing the Batteries for Separate Absolute Pulse Coder
2.6.3 Replacing the Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder
(α Series Servo Amplifier Module)
2.6.4 Replacing the Battery for New MMC–IV
2.6.5 Replacing the Battery for Intelligent Terminal

Battery for Memory The CNC has a battery to memorize data of part programs, offset data,
Backup system parameters and so on. When the battery was reaching the low
level, the CNC would display BAT on the screen before losing the
important data in the memory.
When you find the sign BAT , please replace the battery as Subsec. 2.6.1
within a week. If you do not replace the battery, the data in memory could
get lost.

Battery for Absolute When the machine is equipped with absolute encoder. System such as an
Pulse Coder absolute pulse coder or absolute linear scale, there is a battery for them
separately from the battery for memory backup.
When you get an alarm message No. 307 or 308 APC alarm, please
replace the battery within a week following the instructions in 2.6.2 or
2.6.3, or the absolute position could be lost and it would be required to
take a procedure of manual reference point return.

Other batteries The MMC–IV and intelligent terminal use a battery to retain the BIOS
parameters and clock information. When the battery voltage drops to a
certain level, the entire screen blinks. If this occurs, replace the battery
immediately, as described in Section 2.6.4 or 2.6.5.

2.6.1 1. Lithium battery (Order number is *A02B–0177–K106) is required.


  
  2. Turn on the power to the CNC for about 5 minutes.
     3. Turn off the power to the entire machine.
4. Referring to the manual provided by the machine tool builder, open the
cabinet in which the CNC controller is mounted.
5. The battery used for memory back up is located on the front of the main
board.
Remove the battery cover on the main board by holding the upper and
lower part of the battery cover and pulling it towards you. Then take
off the battery.
6. Remove the connector (CP8) on the main board towards you.
7. Connect the connector of new battery to main board.
8. Mount a battery and put the battery cover back on.
9. Close the cabinet.
10.Turn on the power to the machine (CNC) to check that no alarm
appears on the CRT screen.

150
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

Connector on
cable
CP8

BATTERY

Battery
Battery
unit
unit
Connector on
PCB side

Battery

Main board Main board

Battery Replacement

* FANUC’s order number : A98L–0031–0006

WARNING
Turn off the power to the entire machine before opening the
cabinet.
Be careful not to touch the high–voltage circuits
(marked and covered by shock prevention covers)
when opening the cabinet and replacing the battery.
There is a danger of electric shock if the protective cover is
removed from a high–voltage circuit.

CAUTION
Never replace the battery with other than the specified type
(A02B–0177–K106).
Turn off the power to the machine before replacing the
battery. Complete the replacement work within 30 minutes.
The contents of CNC memory may be lost if the power is
turned off, and the battery is removed for 10 minutes or
more.
If the contents of CNC memory are lost because of the
above, a RAM parity system alarm is issued, and the CNC
becomes unusable.

151
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.6.2 1. Prepare 4 commercially available dry cell batteries


Replacing Batteries for 2. Turn on CNC power.
Separate Absolute If the batteries are replaced with the power off ,absolute position of the
machine is lost.
Pulse Coder
3. Loosen the screws of battery case lid and remove the lid.
Consult with the MTB’s manual for where the battery case is installed.
4. Replace the batteries in the case.
Take care to place the batteries facing in the correct direction. (Insert
the batteries as shown in the diagram with 2 facing one way and 2 the
other.)

Thread

Ç
Ç Ç
Lid

5. Having exchanged the batteries put the lid back on.


6. Procedure completes.

2.6.3 In case that the α series servo drive is used, the battery for absolute pulse
Replacing Batteries for coder could be provided on the α series servo amplifier module instead
of the battery case as shown in 1.3. In this case the battery is not an
Absolute Pulse Coder alkaline battery but a lithium battery, A06B–6073–K001. Prepare the
(α Series Servo battery in advance and replace it by the following procedure.
Amplifier Module)
Observe the following precautions for lithium batteries:

WARNING
If an unspecified battery is used, it may explode.
Replace the battery only with the specified battery
(A06B–6037–K001).

Dispose of used lithium batteries as follows:


(1) Small quantities
Discharge the batteries and dispose of them as ordinary
nonflammablegarbage.
(2) Large quantities
Consult FANUC.

152
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

Procedure for replacing batteries for absolute pulse coder

 1 Turn on machine (CNC) power.


Replace the battery under the emergency stop state for safety, to
escape the machine from moving during the replacement work.
If the battery is replaced while the power is off, the memorized
absolute position data will be lost, thus necessitating a reference
position return operation.
2 Remove the battery case on the front panel of α series servo amplifier
module (SVM).
The battery case can be removed by holding the top of the case and
pulling the case towards you.

Battery case Connector


Connector CX5X

CX5X

α series
SVM
Battery compartment

Battery
A06B–6073–K001

3 Remove the connector of the battery.


4 Replace the battery, and connect the connector.
5 Attach the battery case.
6 Turn off machine (CNC) power.

153
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.6.4 A battery is mounted on the new MMC–IV board to remember the BIOS
Replacing the Battery setting. When voltage of the battery is down, alarm message BAT is
for New MMC–IV displayed on the CNC screen. When the message is displayed, please
replace both of the CNC side battery and the new MMC–IV side battery
promptly.
How to replace the new MMC–IV side battery
1. Use the specified battery (A02B–0200–K102).
2. Turn on the CNC more than 5 minutes.
3. Turn off the machine.
4. Remove the new MMC–IV board from the CNC controller
5. Remove the connector of the dead battery on the board, and connect
the connector of the new battery.
6. Remove the dead battery from the board and mount the new battery.
7. Install the new MMC–IV board in the CNC controller.
8. Turn on the CNC and confirm not to display alarm message.

WARNING
D Turn off the machine before opening the door of the cabinet.
D Do not touch the parts of high voltage.

CAUTION
D Do not use except for the specified battery.
D If the battery connector is removed more than 5 minutes, the
BIOS setting of the new MMC–IV board will be lost. In this
case, BIOS setup menu will be displayed on the MMC
screen after turning on the CNC controller.

154
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.6.5
Replacing the Battery The time from disconnecting the cable of old battery to connect-
for Intelligent Terminal ing the cable of new battery should be shorter than 5 minutes.

(1) For the worst, write BIOS parameters down. (Refer to Sec.1.16 and
Sec.1.17.)
(2) Prepare a new battery (A02B–0200–K102).
Use a lithium battery (A98L–0031–0017) for an intelligent terminal
of type 2 and earlier types.
(3) After I.T.2 is turning on for 5 seconds or more, turn off the power
of I.T.2, then enable to work from rear side of I.T.2 by taking it out
from panel, etc.
(4) Pull out battery connector, then remove the battery from the holder.
(5) Lead the cable of new battery as Fig.2.6.5.
(6) Connect the cable, put the new battery in the holder.
(7) Mount Intelligent Terminal Type2 again.
(8) Turn on the power, then confirm that BIOS parameters has not erased
(in case that BIOS parameters has erased, BIOS set–up will start
automatically).

Lithium Battery

Front

Rear View Side View

BAT1

Fig.2.6.5 Connection of Lithium Battery

155
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.7
REPLACING THE
FAN MOTOR
2.7.1 Fan ordering information

Replacing the Fan Ordering code Number of units required


Motor for Control Unit For 2–slot rack A90L–0001–0378 For 1–2slot rack
For 1–slot rack A90L–0001–0385#A For 2–1slot rack

1. Remove the control section printed circuit board underneath the fan to
be replaced.
2. There is a backplane inside the slot. The fan motor cable is connected
to the backplane. Grasp the left and right side of the cable connector
attached to the backplane and remove it.
3. Open the upper lid of the control section rack. Insert a philips head
screwdriver into the hole at the center front of the lid. The latch
holding the cover in place can be released by prying with the
screwdriver in the direction shown in (3) of Fig.2.7.1.
4. Open the lid sufficiently and remove the fan motor. Since the fan itself
is not screwed into the rack, it can be easily removed.
5. Install the new fan motor. Guide the fan motor cable through the hole
and into the rack.
6. Close the lid until the latch locks.
7. Attach the fan motor cable to the connector on the back plane. At this
time,affix the middle portion of the cable to the hooks at the back of
the rack.
8. Insert the removed control section printed circuit board.

(4) (3)

Fan motor
Cable

Connector

Back plane

Fig. 2.7.1 Fan Motor Replacement

156
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.7.2
Replacing the Fan for (1) Make sure that I.T. is turned off the power.
Intelligent Terminal (2) Prepare a new Fan (A90L–0001–0423#105).
(3) Disconnect the Fan connector. The connector is latched. Disconnect
the cable while pressing the latch at the bottom of the connector
down, using a screwdriver or other tools.
(4) Loosen the 2 screws fixing the Fan, and remove the old fan.
(5) Screw the new Fan at 2 points, and connect the fan connector to
CN39B.

157
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.8 Upon reaching the end of its service life, the backlight unit must be
replaced. The unit can be replaced either by the user or by a FANUC
REPLACING THE service engineer.
LCD BACKLIGHT
FOR DISPLAY
D Replacing the backlight A cold cathode tube (CFL) is used as the backlight of the 7.2″ STN.
of the 7.2″ STN Ordering information: A61L–0001–0142#BL
(1) Removing the CFL

CFL

Lamp cover Direction of


extraction Remove the CFL.

1) Reset the three hooks. 1) Pull out the reflective film. 1) Remove the CFL.
2) Remove the CFL cover. 2) If the CFL has been broken,
carefully remove all pieces of glass.

(2) Installing a new CFL


Groove for
extraction

New CFL Frame end

1) Mount the new CFL. At this time, wrap 1) While lifting the frame end, place 1) Reinstall the lamp cover.
the reflective sheet around the CFL. the reflective sheet under the frame. 2) Bend the three hooks.
2) Set the CFL cable in the groove for
extraction.

Remark) When the screen display is not required, the display and
backlight can be turned off by pressing a key.
Doing so will increase the useful life of the backlight.
<Suppressing the screen display>
While holding down the CAN key, press any function key

(for example, the POS key).


<Restoring the screen display>
Press any function key (for example, the POS key).

158
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D Replacing the LCD (1) If I.T.2 has the Touch Panel, disconnect the CN1 on the Touch Panel
backlight for intelligent Controller PCB. And loosen the 6 screws, and remove the cover.
terminal 2 (Remove the battery from the battery holder to workpiece. But do
not disconnect the battery connector.)

CN1

(2) Loosen the screw at 4 points, and disconnect the 2 connectors


(CP1:on the Inverter, CN1:on the main PCB), and remove the LCD
unit.

CP1

CN1

159
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

(3) Loosen one screw and pull out the LCD Backlight as below figure,
and exchange it.

Backplane of LCD

PCB

PCB

(4) Assemble the unit in a reverse order.


(Note that the cables don’t put between the plates etc.)

160
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.9
ADJUSTING THE
FLAT DISPLAY

2.9.1 Fine adjustment of the video signal is supported to enable its use with
Adjusting the Color color liquid crystal displays and plasma displays. This adjustment is
necessary to compensate for errors resulting from the combination of NC
Liquid Crystal Display devices and cables.
and Plasma Display Adjustment of the video signal is necessary if you have replaced the
display unit, cable, or a hardware component of the display circuit in the
NC, either as part of regular field maintenance or the correct a failure.

Locations of switches
and jumper pins

SW2 SW1
TM1
SW1

Color liquid crystal display Plasma display (rear view)


(rear view)

Adjustment
D Eliminating flicker D Analog color liquid crystal display: Jumper pin TM1
Change the jumper pin to another side.
Normally one of these settings will eliminate flicker.
D Plasma display: Switch SW1
1. Change the jumper pin and search for a range such that flicker is
eliminated.
2. If you find that flicker is eliminated by two or more different
settings, select the setting approximating to the midpoint of those
settings.
Example : If flicker is eliminated by all of settings 2 to 6, select 4.

D Adjusting the horizontal D Analog color liquid crystal display : Switch SW1
position D Plasma display : Switch SW2
1. The screen can be shifted horizontally in units of dots.
2. Adjust the horizontal position such that the entire screen is visible.
Only one setting can successfully realize this positioning.

NOTE
Do not attempt to change any controls or settings other than
those described above.
If any controls or settings other than those described above
are changed, the appearance of the display will be
abnormal.

161
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.9.2 The monochrome liquid crystal display is provided with a setting switch
How to Replace the tuner for precisely adjust contrast.
This setting is necessary to accommodate subtle differences among the
Monochrome Liquid NC units, cables, and LCDs to be used.
Crystal Display
D Tuning locations Color Liquid Crystal Display(Rear Part)

VRD1

D Contrast setting (VRD1) VRD1 can be used to adjust the contrast.

NOTE
Do not change those other than the above settings and
controls, or otherwise the screen display may become
abnormal.

162
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.10 It is necessary to regulary clean the heat transformer, because the heat
transformation ability will be reduced by the accumulation of dust. The
MAINTENANCE OF frequency of the cleaning needed differs according to the installation
HEAT PIPE TYPE environment and therefore should be determined by your own judgment
HEAT EXCHANGER accordint to the degree of dirt.

Air filter cleaning and


replacement

Air filter cleaning and replacement method

1 When cleaning and replacing the filter, be sure to cut off the fan’s
electric power source.
2 Detach the filter cover and take out the filter inside.

Detach the cover by pressing, the flanges


which are in the grooves of both sides
towards the inside by minus screwdriver, etc.

3 Protect the filter from silting due to dust by blowing air on both sides.

4 When dirt is conspicuous, press wash with a neutral detergent, rinse


with fresh water, and the washing, allow to dry naturally. When
replacing with the same product.
5 Insert the filter in the cover, align the flange in the groove, and install
by pressing. Confirm that the cover will not come loose even if it is
pulled.

163
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

Cleaning heat exchanger

Cleaning heat exchanger

1 When cleaning, be sure to cut off the fan power source.


2 Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.
Heat exchanger main unit

Power cable for fan


(detach the connector)

External fan unit

Installation screws B (1) Installation screws A (2)


Earth cable (if the installation screw on the fan
side is detached, it can be taken out)

Detach the two installation screws (A) of the external fan unit, and detach the unit
from the main unit by sliding it down. Detach the power source cable to the fan and
the earth cable. Also detach installation screws (B).

D Cleaning fan unit

Method of cleaning fan unit

1 Wipe the dirt, condensation, etc., which has accumulated on the fan
motor and fan installation case with a dry cloth, etc. When the
condensation, etc. has accumulated and the dirt is difficult to remove,
soak a cloth in neutral detergent, lightry sqeeze it and wipe away the
dirt.
However, take care not to allow the detergent to enter the electrical
sections such as the internal rotor of the fan motor.

164
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

D Cleaning heat exchanger


fan

Method of cleaning heat exchanger fan

1 Detach the heat exchanger format the unit and either blow off with air,
wipe off with a dry cloth, or brush the accumulated dirt, condensation,
etc.

When the dirt is especially severe

1 Detach the internal fan unit, the terminal unit, and the cable from the
main unit.
Main unit

Terminal unit and cable

2 Using a neutral detergent, remove the dirt from the main unit fan
section by brushing. At this time, take care not to bend the fin of the
element.
3 After cleaning, dry well.

D Installation

Method of installation after cleaning

After completing cleaning of the fan unit and heat transformer.


1 Install the terminal unit and cable in the original position.
2 Install the internal fan unit in the main body of heat transformer.
3 Mount the main heat exchanger unit on the panel, then install the
external fan unit.
At this time, do not forget to connect the fan power cable and the earth
cable.

165
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.11 The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this
ENVIRONMENTAL manual “cabinet” refers to the following:
REQUIREMENT (1) Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
control unit or peripheral units;
(2) Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC:
(3) Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel ;
(4) Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table.

Room temperature In operation 0°C to 55°C


of unit In storage or transportation –20°C to 60°C
Change in temper- 1.1°C/minute max.
ature
Relative Normal : 75% or less
humidity Temporary (with 1 month) : 95% or less
Vibration In operation : 0.5 G or less
Environment Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be considered if the cabinets
are in a location where the density of dust, coolant, and/
or organic solvent is relatively high.)

When the MMC–IV or intelligent terminal is incorporated into the


system, the environment in which the control unit is installed must satisfy
the following conditions (within the cabinet):
In operation 5°C to 45°C Note 1)
Room temperature In storage –20°C to 60°C
or transportation
Change in
20°C /hour max.
temperature
Relative humidity Normal Relative humidity:10% to 75%,
non–condensing.
Temporary Relative humidity:10% to 90%,
(with 1 month) non–condensing.
Vibration In operation 0.5G or less Note 2)
Not operation 1.0G or less
Environment The control unit shall be housed in a sealed cabinet.

166
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

NOTE
1 Operating ambient temperature
The temperature sensor on the MMC–IV or intelligent
terminal printed circuit board monitors whether the
temperature is within the specified range. (The operator
can check the state using the CNC diagnosis screen.)
1) If the ambient temperature is outside the specified
range at power–on
Only the CNC and PMC are turned on.
Once the temperature moves within the specified
range, the MMC–IV is automatically turned on.
2) If the ambient temperature moves outside the specified
range during operation after normal power–on
An error occurs when the system attempts to access
the hard disk.
2 Vibration
The CNC control unit or built–in hard disk drive may exhibit
vibration at an arbitrary frequency.
Once the CNC control unit has been installed in the
machine, check that no vibration occurs.
Be particularly careful to eliminate any vibration when
using the memory card socket.

Data stored on the hard disk may be damaged or destroyed as


a result of a mis–operation or system failure, even when the
above–listed conditions are satisfied. In particular, turning off
the power while the hard disk is being accessed is extremely
likely to damage stored data. Do not, therefore, turn off the
power while the hard disk is being accessed. Ensure that your
end users are also aware of this precaution.
Important data on the hard disk should be regularly backed up
to another medium.

167
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.12 The following units related to the CNC control unit require input power
of 24 VDC "10% (excluding the 14″ CRT/MDI unit):
POWER SUPPLY
Table 2.12 Power supply

Power supply
Unit Power supply
voltage
21–TB 24 VDC"10% 2.4A (only control unit)
control unit A ("10% includes
21–TB momentary 3.4A (only control unit)
control unit B surges and
ri les.))
ripples
21–MB 3.4A (only control unit)
control unit
Series 210 3.5A (only control unit)
control unit When HSSB is used.
Series 210 5.5A (only control unit)
control unit When MMC–IV is used.
Loader control 0.7A (only 21–TB)
option board
9″ CRT/MDI unit 0.8A
9″ PDP unit 2.0A
7.2″ STN unit 0.8A
9.5″ STN unit 0.8A
8.4″ TFT color unit 0.8A
14″ CRT/MDI unit 170 to 264VAC 0.6A
9.5″ TFT/MDI unit 24 VDC"10% 0.8A
I/O Unit–A ( 10% iincludes
("10% l d Depends on the type and number
momentary of modules. Refer to “I/O
surges and Unit–MODEL A Connection and
ripples.) Maintenance Manual” (B–61813E).

D Intelligent terminal (1) Input power


(a) Requirements
To use the intelligent terminal, prepare a power supply that satisfies
the following requirements.
Input voltage +24 VDC"10%
When no ISA expansion is installed 2 A (maximum)
Input current
When an ISA expansion is installed 3 A (maximum)

NOTE
The use of the FANUC I/O device requires an additional
1 A capacity.

(b) Timing
The power for the intelligent terminal should be switched on and
off within "100 ms of the CNC power being switched on and off.

168
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

(2) Supply power


The power supply capacity of the intelligent terminal is as listed
below. When connecting a peripheral unit, confirm its current
requirements.
Supply voltage Peripheral device Current (maximum)
+12V ISA, 400mA
FDD (CN2)
+5V FDD (CN2), 1000mA
keyboard (CD32, JD33),
mouse (JD33)
ISA 3500mA
–12V ISA 180mA
–5V ISA 74mA

(3) Heat dissipation


25 W (during normal operation)

NOTE
The heat dissipation increases with the addition of a
peripheral device or ISA expansion board.

169
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.13 The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount and
custom LS1 technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
ACTION AGAINST designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
NOISE measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the CNC
are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following:

2.13.1 The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
Separating Signal following table :
Bind the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
A Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A separately
(N t 1) from
(Note f groups B and
d C or cover
Secondary AC power line group A with an electromagnetic shield
grou
AC/DC power lines (containing the (Note 2).
power lines for the servo and spindle Connect spark killers or diodes with
motors) y
the solenoid and relay.
AC/DC solenoid
AC/DC relay
B DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid and
relay
relay.
DC relay (24 VDC) Bind the cables in group B separately
from group A or cover group B with an
DI/DO cable between the CNC and electromagnetic shield.
power magnetics cabinet Separate group B as far from group C
as possible.
possible
DI/DO cable between the CNC and ma- It is more desirable to cover group B
chine with the shield.
C Cable between the CNC and Bind the cables in group C separately
servo amplifier from group A or cover group C with an
l t ti shield.
electromagnetic hi ld
Cable for position and velocity feed-
back Separate group C as far from group B
as possible
possible.
Cable between the CNC and spindle
amplifier Be sure to perform shield processing.

Cable for the position coder


Cable for the manual pulse generator
Cable between the CRT and MDI
RS232C and RS422 interface cables
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with the
shield

NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.

170
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

Cabinet

Spindle Servo Control


amp. amp. unit
Cable of group B, C

Duct
To operator’s
panel,
motor, etc.

Cable of group A Section

Group A Group B, C

Cover

2.13.2 The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machined tool:
Ground 1. Signal ground system (SG)
The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V) of the
electrical signal system to the machine.
2. Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames
and cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables
between the units are connected.
3. System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.

Signal ground system


Frame ground system
Power Servo CNC System ground system
mag- amplifier control
netics unit
unit Operator’s
panel

Machine
tool
Power magnet-
ics cabinet

Distribution board

171
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

Notes on connecting the ground systems


S Connect the signal gournd with the frame ground (FG) at only one
place in the CNC control unit.
S The grounding resistance of the system gorund shall be 100 ohms or
less (class 3 grounding).
S The system ground cable must have enough cross–sectional area to
safely carry the accidental current flow into the system gound when
an accident such as a short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the cross–sectional area of the AC power
cable or more.)
S Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system gound
wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.

2.13.3
Connecting the Signal
Ground (SG) of the
Control Unit
Control unit

Printed circuit board


Terminal for
SG connection

M3 or M4

M3 or M4 terminal for
signal ground (SG) Ground cable: wire with a
sectional area of 2mm2 Ground cable
or more

System ground
Frame ground Ground plate of
(FG) = the cabinet

Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.
The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the
control unit.

172
B–62705EN/03 2. HARDWARE

2.13.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
To reduce the pulse voltage, use a spark killer for an AC device or a diode
for a DC device.

Notes on connecting the ground systems

(1) CR spark killer


Use a spark killer for AC circuit consisting of a resistor and capacitor
in series. This type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (1(A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil :
1) Resistance (R):Equivalent to DC resistance of the coil
2) Capacitance (C): I 2 to I 2 (µF)
10 20

R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer

Spark killer

AC relay

Motor

Spark killer

(2) Diode–type spark killer


Use a diode–type spark killer in a DC circuit. As a guideline, the
breakdown voltage of the diode must be about double the applied
voltage, and the current rating must also be about double.

Diode

DC relay

173
2. HARDWARE B–62705EN/03

2.13.5 The CNC cables that required shielding should be clamped by the method
Cable Clamp and shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and
proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation,
Shield Processing follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. Metal fittings for clamp are
attached to the control unit. The ground plate must be made by the
machine tool builder, and set as follows:

ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÕÇÇ
ÇÇ
Control unit
Machine side

ÇÇ
installation

ÇÇ
board

ÇÇ
ÕÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate

Ô ŸŸ ÇÇ
ÕÕ ÇÇ
Ô Ÿ ÇÇ
ÕÕ
Metal fittings

ÇÇ
for clamp

Shield cover ÇÇ

174
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3 INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

After you change a SRAM module, you must set various data again.
This chapter describes the procedures to input and output the parameters,
the part programs and the tool offset values.

3.1 SETTING PARAMETERS FOR


INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
3.2 INPUTTING/OUTPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
3.3 DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ON THE
ALL IO SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

175
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

3.1
SETTING
PARAMETERS
FOR INPUT/OUTPUT
D Setting procedure of First, enable parameter writing by performing steps 1 to 3, below.
parameters
1. Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.

2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key several times or press soft key [SETING] to display
SETTING (HANDY) screen.
3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and, press 1 and INPUT

keys in this order. Here alarm 100 will be displayed.


4. Press SYSTEM key several times to display the following screen.

PARAMETER (SETTING) O1234N12345


0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001 FCV

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 RMV MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0020 I/O CHANNEL
S 0 T0000

REF **** *** *** 10:15:30


[ F SRH ][ READ ][ PUNCH ][DELETE ][ ]

To make the cursor display in bit unit,


press the cursor key or .

5. Press soft key[(OPRT)] and the following operation menu is


displayed.
1) Soft key [NO. SRH] : Searched by number.
Examination) Parameter number → [NO. SRH].
2) Soft key [ON : 1] : Item with cursor position is set to 1
(bit parameter)
3) Soft key [OFF : 0] : Item with cursor position is set to 0
(bit parameter)
4) Soft key [+INPUT] : Input value is added to the value at cursor
(word type)
5) Soft key [INPUT] : Input value is replaced with the value at
cursor (word type)
6) Soft key [READ] : Parameters are input from reader/puncher
interface.
7) Soft key [PUNCH] : Parameters are output to reader/puncher
interface.

176
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

6. After the parameters have been input, set PARAMETER WRITE on


the SETTING screen to 0. Press RESET to release alram 100.

7. Convenient method

1) To change parameters in bit unit, press cursor key or ,


then the cursor becomes bit length and you can set parameters bit
by bit (Bit parameter only).

2) To set data consecutively, use EOB key.

(Ex.1) 1 2 3 4 EOB 4 5 6 7 EOB 9

9 9 9 INPUT

This key sequence sets data as follows:


0 1234
0 4567

0 9999
0 0

(Ex.2) 1 2 3 4 EOB EOB 9 9 9 9 INPUT

This key sequence sets data as follows:


0 1234
0 0

0 9999
0 0

3) To set the same data sequentially, press = .

(Ex.) 1 2 3 4 EOB = EOB = INPUT

This key sequence sets data as follows:


0 1234
0 1234

0 1234
0 0

4) Bit parameters can be set as follows:

(Ex.) 1 1 EOB = EOB = INPUT

This key sequence sets data as follows:


00000000 00011000
00000000 00011000

00000000 00011000
00000000 00000000

8. After the required parameters are set, set PARAMETER WRITE to


0.

177
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

3.2 The main CPU memorized the following data.


Outputting the data 1/O device while the CNC is rurnning normally
INPUTTING/
(1) CNC paramter
OUTPUTTING
(2) PMC parameter
DATA
(3) Pitch error compensation amount
(4) Custom macro variable values
(5) Tool compensation amount
(6) Part program (machining program, custom macro program)

3.2.1 Be sure that data output cannot be done in an alarm status.


Confirming the Parameters required for output are as follows :
(When changing a parameter, do so in MDI mode or in the emergency stop
Parameters Required for state.)
Data Output #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO

#1 (ISO) 0 : Output with EIA code


1 : Output with ISO code (FANUC cassette)

0020 Selection of I/O channel

0 : Channel 1 (I/O printed circuit board JD5A)


1 : Channel 1 (I/O printed circuit board JD5A)
2 : Channel 2 (I/O printed circuit board JD5B)
3 : Channel 3 (Option 1 board JD5C)
* In the example shown here, an I/O unit is connected to JD5A for data
input and output (I/O channel = 0).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2

#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.


l 1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
#3 (ASI)l 0 : EIA or ISO code is used for input/output data.
1 : ASCII code is used.
#7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when data is output.
1 : Feed is not output when data is output.

178
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

0102 pecification number of input/output device

0 RS–232–C (control codes DC1 to DC4 used)


1 FANUC bubble cassette B1/B2
2 FANUC Floppy cassette adapter F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate. FANUC FA card adapter ,FANUC
Floppy cassette adapter, FSP–H
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR, FSP–G, FSP–H

0103 Baud Rate

1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]

3.2.2 In case of PPR, steps 2 and 3 are not required.


Outputting CNC 1. Select EDIT mode.
Parameters 2. PROG Press PROG key and soft key PRGRM to select a program text.

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and soft key .


And then, put out the head of file by pressing [FSRH] 0 [EXEC].

4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PARAM] to display parameter screen.

5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] ,and soft key .


6. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC],and the parameters are started
to be output.

179
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

3.2.3
Outputting PMC 1. Select MDI mode.
Parameters 2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key then soft key [SETTING] to select a setting screen.

3. Set the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE and input 1 and INPUT .


At this time, alarm 100 will be generated.
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL]
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set the first bit to 1.
X X X X X X 1 X INPUT

Where, mark x is a former value


Thus, data input/output screen has been selected.
7. Select EDIT mode.
8. Press soft key then key .
9. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters on I/O.
Item selection cursor moves to the following item after data of an item
is set.
10.In CHANNEL NO item, input 1 INPUT to select I/O channel 1.
11.In DEVICE item, press soft key [FDCAS] to select the floppy cassette.
12.In KIND DATA item, press soft key [PARAM].
13.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [WRITE].
14.In FILE No item, specify a file name. In this example input as follows:
@ P M C INPUT

15.Press soft key [EXEC]. Then PMC parameters are started to be output.
16.After the PMC parameters have been output, set PARAMETER
WRITE to 0.
17.Press RESET to release alarm 100.

3.2.4
Outputting Pitch Error 1. Select EDIT mode.
Compensation Amount 2. Press SYSTEM key several times, press soft key [PARAM], and
[PITCH] to select the SETTING screen for pitch error amount.
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then pitch error compensation
amount is started to be output.

180
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3.2.5 When custom macro function is equipped, values of variable no. 500 and
Outputting Custom later are output.
Macro Variable Values 1. Press OFFSET
SETTING key.

2. Press key and soft key [MACRO] to select custom macro


variable screen.
3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and then key .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] and [EXEC], then custom macro variable
values are output.

3.2.6
Outputting Tool 1. Select EDIT mode.
Compensation Amount 2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
compensation amount screen.
3. Press [(OPRT)] key and soft key .
4. Press soft key [PUNCH] an [EXEC] key, and the tool compensation
amount is started to be output.

3.2.7
Outputting Part Program 1. Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set to the MDI mode and
set it to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8

#0 (NE8) l 0 : Programs of 8000s are edited.


1 : Programs of 8000s can be protected.
#4 (NE9) l 0 : Programs of 9000s are edited.
1 : Programs of 9000s can be protected.

2. Select EDIT mode.


3. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to display program text.

4. Press [(OPRT)] key and press soft key .


5. Input a program number to be output. To output all programs input as:
O – 9 9 9 9
6. Press [PUNCH] and [EXEC] key, then program output is started.

181
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

3.2.8
Inputting CNC 1. Set to the emergency stop state.
Parameters 2. Confirm that the patameters required to input data is correct.
1) Press OFFSET
SETTING key several times, and press [SETING] to display
SETTING screen.
2) Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
3) Press SYSTEM key to select the parameter screen.
4)
0020 Selectionof I/O channel

l 0 : Channel 1 (I/O printed circuit board JD5A)


1 : Channel 1 (I/O printed circuit board JD5A)
2 : Channel 2 (I/O printed circuit board JD5B)
3 : Channel 3 (Option 1 board JD5C)

5)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2

#0 (SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.


l 1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
#3 (ASI) 0 : EIA or ISO code is used.
1 : ASCII code is used.
#7 (NFD) 0 : Feed is output when punching out.
1 : Feed is not output when punching out.

6)
0102 Specification number of I/O device

0 RS–232–C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.)


1 FANUC Bubble cassette B1/B2
2 FANUCFloppy cassette F1
3 PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card adapter, FANUC
Floppy casette adapter, FSP–H, FANUC Handy File
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR, FSP–G, FSP–H

182
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

7)
0103 Baud rate

1: 50 5: 200 9: 2400
2: 100 6: 300 l10: 4800
3: 110 7: 600 11: 9600
4: 150 8: 1200 12: 19200 [BPS]
3. Press soft key
4. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC]. Then input of parameters are
started.
5. After parameters have been inputted, turn off power and turn it on.
6. Alarm 300 is issued if the system employs an absolute pulse coder.
In such a case, perform reference position return again.

3.2.9 Set the emergency stop state.


    Operation of 12 is not required when PPR is used.
 
  1. Turn off (KEY4=1) the program protect key.
2. Press OFFSET
SETTING key and soft key [SETTING] to select the SETTING
screen.
3. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1.
4. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [PMC].
5. Press soft key [PMCPRM] and soft key [KEEPRL].
6. Set the cursor to K17 and set bit 1 to 1.
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 INPUT .

7. Press key and key.


8. Press soft key [I/O] and set the parameters required for I/O.
Item selection cursor displays the next item after an item is set.
9. In CHANNEL item , press 1 INPUT to select channel 1.
10.In DEVICE item, press [FDCAS] key to select the floppy cassette.
11.In FUNCTION item, press soft key [READ] to input data
12.In FILE NO item, press 2 INPUT to select file no. 2.
13.Press soft key [EXEC] and the PMC parameters are started to be input.
14.After data has been read, turn off power and turn it on.

183
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

3.2.10 1. Release the emergency stop and select EDIT mode.


Inputting Pitch Error 2. Confirm that PARAMETER WRITE=1 on the setting screen.
Compensation Amount 3. Press PROG key and soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.

4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F SRH], and 3 [EXEC] to select


the pitch error compensation file.
5. Press SYSTEM key several times, soft key [PARAM], and
[PITCH] to select the screen for pitch error compensation amount.
6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
7. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then the pitch error
compensation amount is started to be input.
8. After data has been input, press OFFSET
SETTING key twice to display the
SETTING screen and return the PARAMETER WRITE to 0.

3.2.11 If the system is equipped with the custom macro fucntion, input the
Inputting Custom Macro variable values.
For PPR, item 4 is not required.
Variable Values
1. Confirm that EDIT mode is selected.
2. Turn off the program protect key (KEY2=1).
3. Press PROG key then soft key [PRGRM] to display program contents.

4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F SRH], and 4 [EXEC] to select


a file.
5. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key .
6. Press address O , a program number (0001 for example), soft key
[READ] and [EXEC] key, then custom macro variable values are
started to be input.
Input a program number that is not used.
7. Select MEMORY mode on the machine operator’s panel and press
cycle start button.
When the program is executed, macro variables are set.
8. Press OFFSET
SETTING key, key and soft key [MACRO] to select the custom
macro variable screen.
9. Press 5 0 0 and soft key [NO SRH] to display variable
number 500 and confirm the custom macro variables are set correctly.
Of the data displayed, 0 and vacant differ in meaning.
Vacant is an undefined variable. To set vacant, press soft key
[INPUT].
10.Select EDIT mode again.
11.Press PROG key to select the program display screen.
12.Press address O and a program number (0001 for example) ,then press
DELETE to delete the program.

184
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3.2.12 Item 4 is not required for PPR.


Inputting Tool 1. Select the EDIT mode.
Compensation Amount 2. Turn off the program protect (KEY=1).
3. Press PROG key, and press soft key[PRGRM] to display the program
contents screen.
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], , [F SRH], and 5 [EXEC] to select
the tool compensation amount file.
5. Press OFFSET
SETTING key, and soft key [OFFSET] to display the tool
compensation amount screen.
6. Press soft key [(OPRT)] and key.
7. Press [READ] key and [EXEC] key and data input is started.

3.2.13 Confirm the following parameters. If 1 is set, set it to 0.


Inputting Part Programs (Change it in MDI mode).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE RAL

#1 (RAL) When programs are registered:


l 0 : All programs are registered.
1 : Only one program is registered.
#6 (NPE) When programs are registered in part program storage area, M02,M30
and M99 are:
0 : regarded as the end of program.
l 1 : not regarded as the end of porgram.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8

#0 (NE8)
l 0: Programs of 8000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 8000s are protected.
#4 (NE9)
l 0: Programs of 9000s can be edited.
1: Programs of 9000s are protected.
For PPR, item 4 is not required.

1. Confirm that mode is EDIT mode.


2. Turn off the program protect (KEY3=1).
3. Press PROG key and press soft key [PRGRM] to select a part program
file.
4. Press soft key [(OPRT)], [F SRH], and 6 [EXEC] to select
a part program file.
5. Press soft key, [(OPRT)] and key.
6. Press soft key [READ] and [EXEC], then data input is started.

185
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

3.3 To input/output a particular type of data, the corresponding screen is


usually selected. For example, the parameter screen is used for parameter
DATA INPUT/OUTPUT input from or output to an external input/output unit, while the program
ON THE ALL IO screen is used for program input or output. However, programs,
SCREEN parameters, offset data, and macro variables can all be input and output
using a single common screen, that is, the ALL IO screen.

READ/PUNCH (PROGRAM) O1234 N12345

I/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF


DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE ISO
BAUDRATE 4800 INPUT CODE ASCII
STOP BIT 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL INPUT (EIA) NO EOB OUTPUT (ISO) CR
TV CHECK (NOTES) ON BAUDRATE CLK. INNER
CD CHECK (232C) OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY BIT OFF SAT COMMAND HOST
INTERFACE RS422 COM PROTCOL A
END CODE EXT COM CODE ASCII
(0:EIA 1:ISO)>1_
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
PRGRM PARAM OFFSET MACRO (OPRT)

Fig. 3.3 ALL IO screen (when channel 3 is being


used for input/output)

186
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3.3.1 Input/output–related parameters can be set on the ALL IO screen.


Setting Parameters can be set, regardless of the mode.
Input/Output–Related
Parameters

Setting input/output–related parameters

 1 Press function key SYSTEM


.

2 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) several


times.
3 Press soft key [ALL IO] to display the ALL IO screen.

NOTE
1 If program or floppy is selected in EDIT mode, the program
directory or floppy screen is displayed.
2 When the power is first turned on, program is selected by
default.

READ/PUNCH (PROGRAM) O1234 N12345

I/O CHANNEL 3 TV CHECK OFF


DEVICE NUM. 0 PUNCH CODE ISO
BAUDRATE 4800 INPUT CODE ASCII
STOP BIT 2 FEED OUTPUT FEED
NULL INPUT (EIA) NO EOB OUTPUT (ISO) CR
TV CHECK (NOTES) ON BAUDRATE CLK. INNER
CD CHECK (232C) OFF RESET/ALARM ON
PARITY BIT OFF SAT COMMAND HOST
INTERFACE RS422 COM PROTCOL A
END CODE EXT COM CODE ASCII
(0:EIA 1:ISO)>1_
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
PRGRM PARAM OFFSET MACRO (OPRT)

NOTE
Baud rate clock, CD check (232C), reset/alarm report, and
the parity bit for parameter No. 134, as well as the
communication code, end code, communication protocol,
interface, and SAT command for parameter No. 135 are
displayed only when channel 3 is being used for
input/output.

4 Select the soft key corresponding to the desired type of data (program,
parameter, and so forth).
5 Set the parameters corresponding to the type of input/output unit to be
used. (Parameter setting is possible regardless of the mode.)

187
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

3.3.2 A program can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and When entering a program using a cassette or card, the user must specify
the input file containing the program (file search).
Outputting Programs

File search

 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
D A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.

O0001 N00010

PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)


USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429

O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999


O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040

>_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE (OPRT)

4 Enter address N.
5 Enter the number of the file to be found.
D N0
The first floppy file is found.
D One of N1 to N9999
Among the files numbered from 1 to 9999, a specified file is found.
D N–9999
The file immediately after that used most recently is found.
D N–9998
When –9998 is specified, the next file is found. Then, each time
a file input/output operation is performed, N–9999 is automatically
inserted. This means that subsequent files can be sequentially
found automatically.
This state is canceled by specifying N0, N1 to N9999, or N–9999,
or upon a reset.
6 Press soft keys [F SRH] and [EXEC].
CAN EXEC
The specified file is found.

188
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

Inputting a program

 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
D A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.

O0001 N00010

PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)


USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429

O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999


O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040

>_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE (OPRT)

4 To specify a program number to be assigned to an input program,


enter address O, followed by the desired program number.
If no program number is specified, the program number in the file or
on the NC tape is assigned as is.
5 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC].
STOP CAN EXEC
The program is input with the program number specified in step 4
assigned.
To cancel input, press soft key [CAN].
To stop input prior to its completion, press soft key [STOP].

189
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

Outputting programs

 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
D A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.

O0001 N00010

PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)


USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429

O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999


O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040

>_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE (OPRT)

4 Enter address O.
5 Enter a desired program number.
If –9999 is entered, all programs in memory are output.
To output a range of programs, enter O∆∆∆∆, OVVVV . The
programs numbered from ∆∆∆∆ to VVVV are output.
When bit 4 (SOR) of parameter No. 3107 for sorted display is set to 1
on the program library screen, programs are output in order, starting
from those having the smallest program numbers.
6 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].
STOP CAN EXEC
The specified program or programs are output. If steps 4 and 5 are
omitted, the currently selected program is output.
To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].
To stop output prior to its completion, press soft key [STOP].

190
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

Deleting files

 1 Press soft key [PRGRM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode. A program directory is displayed.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
D A program directory is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.

O0001 N00010

PROGRAM (NUM.) MEMORY (CHAR.)


USED : 60 3321
FREE : 2 429

O0010 O0001 O0003 O0002 O0555 O0999


O0062 O0004 O0005 O1111 O0969 O6666
O0021 O1234 O0588 O0020 O0040

>_
EDIT **** *** *** *** 14:46:09
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE (OPRT)

4 Press soft key [DELETE].


5 Enter a file number, from 1 to 9999, to indicate the file to be deleted.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
CAN EXEC
The k–th file, specified in step 5, is deleted.

191
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

3.3.3 Parameters can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and
Outputting Parameters

Inputting parameters

 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.

READ PUNCH

4 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC].


CAN EXEC
The parameters are read, and the “INPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of input, the
“INPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
To cancel input, press soft key [CAN].

Outputting parameters

 1 Press soft key [PARAM] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.

READ PUNCH

4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].


CAN EXEC
The parameters are output, and the “OUTPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the
“OUTPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].

192
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3.3.4 Offset data can be input and output using the ALL IO screen.
Inputting and
Outputting Offset Data

Inputting offset data

 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.

READ PUNCH

4 Press soft key [READ], then [EXEC].


CAN EXEC
The offset data is read, and the “INPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen.
Upon the completion of input, the “INPUT” indicator is cleared from
the screen.
To cancel input, press soft key [CAN].

Outputting offset data

 1 Press soft key [OFFSET] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.

READ PUNCH

4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].


CAN EXEC
The offset data is output, and the “OUTPUT” indicator blinks at the
lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of output, the
“OUTPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].

193
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

3.3.5 Custom macro common variables can be output using the ALL IO screen.
Outputting Custom
Macro Common
Variables

Outputting custom macro common variables

 1 Press soft key [MACRO] on the ALL IO screen, described in Subsec.
3.3.1.
2 Select EDIT mode.
3 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. Soft keys change as shown below.

READ PUNCH

4 Press soft key [PUNCH], then [EXEC].


CAN EXEC
The custom macro common variables are output, and the “OUTPUT”
indicator blinks at the lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the
completion of output, the “OUTPUT” indicator is cleared from the
screen.
To cancel output, press soft key [CAN].

NOTE
To input a macro variable, read the desired custom macro
statement as a program, then execute the program.

194
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

3.3.6 The ALL IO screen supports the display of a directory of floppy files, as
Inputting and well as the input and output of floppy files.
Outputting Floppy
Files

Displaying a file directory

 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
D The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.

READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345

>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE

5 Press soft key [F SRH].


6 Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET].
F SET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. A directory is displayed, with the specified
file uppermost. Subsequent files in the directory can be displayed by
pressing the page key.

195
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345


No. FILE NAME (Meter) VOL
0001 PARAMETER 46.1
0002 ALL.PROGRAM 12.3
0003 O0001 11.9
0004 O0002 11.9
0005 O0003 11.9
0006 O0004
0007 O0005 11.9
0008 O0010 11.9
0009 O0020 11.9
11.9
F SRH
File No.=2
>2_
EDIT * * * * * * * *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH CAN EXEC

A directory in which the first file is uppermost can be displayed


simply by pressing the page key. (Soft key [F SRH] need not be
pressed.)

196
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

Inputting a file

 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.

READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345

>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE

5 Press soft key [READ].


6 Enter the number of a file or program to be input.
D Setting a file number: Enter the number of the desired file, then
F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC

press soft key [F SET].


D Setting a program number: Enter the number of the desired
program, then press soft key [O SET].
7 Press soft key [EXEC].
The specified file or program is read, and the “INPUT” indicator
blinks at the lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of
input, the “INPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.

197
3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA B–62705EN/03

Outputting a file

 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.

READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345

>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE

5 Press soft key [PUNCH].


6 Enter the number of the program to be output, together with a desired
F SET O SET STOP CAN EXEC
output file number.
D Setting a file number: Enter the number of the desired file, then
press soft key [F SET].
D Setting a program number: Enter the number of the desired
program, then press soft key [O SET].
7 Press soft key [EXEC].
The specified program is output, and the “OUTPUT” indicator blinks
at the lower–right corner of the screen. Upon the completion of
output, the “OUTPUT” indicator is cleared from the screen.
If no file number is specified, the program is written at the end of the
currently registered files.

198
B–62705EN/03 3. INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA

Deleting a file

 1 Press the rightmost soft key (continuous menu key) on the ALL
IO screen, described in Subsec. 3.3.1.
2 Press soft key [FLOPPY].
3 Select EDIT mode. The floppy screen is displayed.
4 Press soft key [(OPRT)]. The screen and soft keys change as shown
below.
The floppy screen is displayed only in EDIT mode. In all other
modes, the ALL IO screen is displayed.

READ/PUNCH (FLOPPY) O1234 N12345

>
MDI **** *** *** *** 12:34:56
F SRH READ PUNCH DELETE

5 Press soft key [DELETE].


6 Enter the number of the desired file, then press soft key [F SET].
F SET CAN EXEC
7 Press soft key [EXEC]. The specified file is deleted. After the file
has been deleted, the subsequent files are shifted up.

199
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

4 INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

This chapter describes the signals between the machine operator’s panel,
magnetics cabinet and the PMC, connection of the signals between PMC
and CNC, and confirmation method of on/off state of these signals.
It also describes system configuration of PMC, parameters of PMC,
ladder and how to display time chart of the signals on the screen.
It also describes a method of inputting/outputting PMC parameters to an
external device.

4.1 GENERAL OF INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201


4.2 SPECIFICATION OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.3 PMC SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
4.4 LIST OF SIGNALS BY EACH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . 237

200
(D1) 4.1
PMCDGN (0) Input potential (0V) Contact point (open)
PMCDGN (1) Input potential (24V) Contact point (close)
Machine side DI/DO (Sink type DO)
B–62705EN/03

PMCDGN (0) DV (OFF) Output potential (24V) Load (OFF)


PMCDGN (1) DV (ON) Output potential (0V) Load (ON)
High–speed processing signal (Source type DO)
INTERFACE

*DEC *ESP, SKIP, PMCDGN (0) DV (OFF) Output potential (0V) Load (OFF)
GENERAL OF

PMCDGN (1) DV (ON) Output potential (24V) Load (ON)


PMCDGN PMCDGN *1)
NC PMC–RA Machine side power magnetic circuit
G 0000 to 0255 X 1000 to 1011 DI / DO operator’s panel
RV
ST1 DOOR ST
G X ST1
X0.1 X0.0 G007.2 *2)
ST2
ST2
+24E
Power
X5.7 Sink type DV supply
Load +
STL STL

F0.5 Y0.1 Sink type DO
Power
Source type DV supply

201
+
F Y

PMCDGN PMCDGN *1) Load –


Source type
F 0000 to 0255 Y 1000 to 1008 Operator’s panel

DV

PMC address RV
FANUC decides Internal relay R0.0 to R999.7 MTB decides
RV
addresses Variable timer T0.0 to T079.7 addresses
and signals Counter C0.0 to C079.7 and signals
correspondence Data table D0.0 to D1859.7 Matrix DI
Message display A0.0 to A024.7 *1) If I/O unit is added :
DV
Keep relay K0.0 to K016.7 X 0000 to 0127
Y 0000 to 0127
System reserve R9000 to R9099
area K17.0 to K19.7 *2) DI is prepared to
select pull up or
pull down eternally.

Matrix D0
4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

4.2
SPECIFICATION OF
PMC
4.2.1
Specification Model PMC–RA1 PMC–RA3
Programming method lan- Ladder Ladder
guage
Number of ladder level 2 2
Level–1 Cycle Time 8 ms 8 ms
Basic Instruction Execution 5.0 0.15
Time (µs/step) (µs/step)
Program capacity Approx. 3,000
S Ladder (step) Approx. 3,000 Approx. 5,000
Approx. 5,000 Approx. 8,000
Approx. 12,000
Approx. 16,000
S Symbol(Note)/comment 32 to 128KB 32 to 128KB
S Message 2 to 64KB 2 to 64KB
S C Language No No
Instruction (Basic) 12 kinds 14 kinds
(Function) 49 kinds 66 kinds
Internal relay (R) 1100 byte (System uses R9000 to R9099)
Message request (A) 25 byte (200 Kinds)
Non–volatile
S Var. Timer (T) 80 byte (40 pairs)
S Counter (C) 80 byte (20 pairs)
S Keep relay (K) 20 byte
S Data table (D) 1860 byte
Fixed timer 100 (Specification timer No.)
I/O
S I/O link (DI/DO) 1024 points/1024 points maximum (sharable
with a built–in I/O card)
S Built–in I/O card A (DI/DO) 48 points/48 points maximum for the machine
(sink type) 64 points/32 points maximum for the opera-
tor’s panel
S Built–in I/O card B (DI/DO) 84 points/64 points maximum for the machine
(sink type)
S Built–in I/O card C (DI/DO) 48 points/48 points maximum for the machine
(source type) 64 points/32 points maximum for the opera-
tor’s panel
S Built–in I/O card D (DI/DO) 96 points/72 points maximum for the machine
(source type)
S Built–in I/O card E (DI/DO) 96 points/64 points maximum for the machine
(source type)
Storage media Flash–ROM
Note) There is no object–level compatibility.

NOTE
Max. size of a symbol and a comment are each 64KB.

202
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.2.2
Address Char- Kinds Byte Addresses Remarks
acter
Input signal from X0 to X127 FANUC I/O Link
X the machine to the 142
PMC (MT to PMC) X1000 to X1011 Built–in I/O card *1)
Output signal from Y0 to Y127 FANUC I/O Link
Y the PMC to the ma-
ma 142
chine (PMC to MT) Y1000 to Y1005 Built–in I/O card *1)
Input signal from
F the NC to the PMC 256 F0 to F255
(NC to PMC)
Output signal from
G the PMC to NC 256 G0 to G255
(PMC to NC)
R0 to R999
R Internal relay 1100 Operation results,
R9000 to R9099
reserved system area

A Message request 25 A0 to A24


signal
C Counter 80 C0 to C79
K0 to K16
K Keep relay 20
K7 to K19 Reserved system area
D Data table 1860 D0 to D1859
T Variable timer 80 T0 to T79

*1 Address change is not possible when a built–in I/O card is used.

203
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

4.2.3 The table below lists the addresses for the interface signals between the
Address List CNC and PMC.

I/O card A and C


(21–MB, 210–MB) Bit No.
MT→PMC #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000

X1001

X1002

X1003

X1004

X1005

X1006

X1007

X1008 SKIP ESKIP

X1009

X1010

X1011

X1012 *ESP

X1013 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1

NOTE
1 Signals enclosed in thick lines are DI signals for matrix
configuration.
2 In DI signals except for *ESP, if the function of a DI signal
is not used, it can be used for a general purpose DI signal.

204
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

PMC→MT Bit No.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000

Y1001

Y1002

Y1003

Y1004

Y1005

Y1006

Y1007

Y1008

Y1009

Y1010

Y1011

Y1012

Y1013

NOTE
1 Signals enclosed in thick lines are DI signals for matrix
configuration.
2 The signals with dash cannot be used.

205
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

I/O board B and D Bit No.


(21–MB, 210–MB) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MT→PMC(CNC) X1000

X1001

X1002

X1003

X1004

X1005

X1006

X1007

X1008 SKIP ESKIP

X1009

X1010

X1011

X1012 *ESP

X1013 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1

NOTE
1 Those signals indicated by a solid oblique line cannot be
used.
Those signals indicated by a dotted oblique line cannot be
used with I/O card B, only with I/O card D.
2 In DI signals except for *ESP, if the function of a DI signal
is not used, it can be used for a general purpose DI signal.

206
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

PMC→MT Bit No.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000

Y1001

Y1002

Y1003

Y1004

Y1005

Y1006

Y1007

Y1008

Y1009

Y1010

Y1011

Y1012

Y1013

NOTE
Those signals indicated by a solid oblique line cannot be
used.
Those signals indicated by a dotted oblique line cannot be
used with I/O card B, only with I/O card D.

207
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

PMC→CNC Bit No.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0

G001 ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8

G002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0

G003

G004 MFIN3 MFIN2 FIN

G005 BFIN AFL TFIN SFIN EFIN MFIN

G006 OVC *ABSM SRV

G007 EXLM *FLWU ST

G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT

G009 PN16 PN3 PN4 PN2 PN1

G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

G013

G014 ROV2 ROV1

G015

G016

G017

G018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A

G019 RT MP2 MP1 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS2A

G020

G021

G022

G023

G024

G025

G026

G027 CON

G028 CR2 CR1

G029 *SSTP SOR SAR

208
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

PMC→CNC Bit No.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0

G031

G032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

G033 SIND SSIN SGN R12I R11I R10I R09I

G034 R0812 R0712 R0612 R0512 R0412 R0312 R0212 R0112

G035 SIND2 SSIN2 SGN2 R1212 R1112 R1012 R0912

G036

G037

G038

G039

G040

G041 HS2ID HS2IC HS2IB HS2IA HS1ID HS1IC HS1IB HA1IA

G042 DMMC HS31D HS31C HS31B HS31A

G043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

G044 MLK BDT1

G045

G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK

G047 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01

G048 TLRST TLRST1 TLSKP

G049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0

G050 *TLV9 *TLV8

G051

G052

G053 TMRON

G054 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0

G055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8

G056

G057

G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD MINP

G059

209
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

PMC→CNC Bit No.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G060

G061 RGTAP

G062

G063

G064

G065

G066 EKSET ENBKY IGNVRY

G067

G068

G069

G070 MRDYA ORCMA SFRA SRVA CTH1A CTH2A TLMHA TLMLA

G071 RCHA RSLA SOCNA MCFNA SPSLA *ESPA ARSTA

G072 RCHHGAMFNHGAINCMDA OVRA DEFMDA NRROA ROTAA INDXA

G073 MPOFA MORCMA

G074 MRDYB ORCMB SFRB SRVB CTH1B CTH2B TLMHB TLMLB

G075 RCHB RSLB SOCNB MCFNB SPSLB *ESPB ARSTB

G076 RCHHGBMFNHGBINCMDB OVRB DEFMDB NRROB ROTAB INDXB

G077 MPOFB MORCMB

G078 SHA07 SHA06 SHA05 SHA04 SHA03 SHA02 SHA01 SHA00

G079 SHA11 SHA10 SHA09 SHA08

G080 SHB07 SHB06 SHB05 SHB04 SHB03 SHB02 SHB01 SHB00

G081 SHB11 SHB10 SHB09 SHB08

G082 Reserve for order made macro

G083 Reserve for order made macro

G084

G085

G086

G087

G088

G089

210
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

PMC→CNC Bit No.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G090

G091

G092

G093

G094

G095

G096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0

G097

G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0

G099

G100 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1

G101

G102 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1

G103

G104

G105

G106 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1

G107

G108 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1

G109

G110

G111

G112

G113

G114 *+L4 *+L3 *+L2 *+L1

G115

G116 *–L4 *–L3 *–L2 *–L1

G117

G118

G119

211
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

PMC→CNC Bit No.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120

G121

G122

G123

G124

G125

G126 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1

G127

G128

G129

G130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1

G131

G132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1

G133

G134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1

G135

G136 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1

G137

G138

G139

G140

G141

G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA EFINA

G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A

G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A

G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A

G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EIA4A EIA3A EIA2A EIA1A EIA0A

G147 EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A EID9A EID8A

G148 EID23A EID22A EID21A EID20A EID19A EID18A EID17A EID16A

G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A

212
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

PMC→CNC Bit No.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E

G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E

G152

G153

G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB EFINB

G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B

G156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B

G157 EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B

G158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B

G159 EID15B EID14B EID13B EID12B EID11B EID10B EID9B EID8B

G160 EID23B EID22B EID21B EID20B EID19B EID18B EID17B EID16B

G161 EID31B EID30B EID29B EID28B EID27B EID26B EID25B EID24B

G162

G163

G164

G165

G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC EFINC

G167 EMSBKC EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C

G168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C

G169 EIF15C EIF14C EIF13C EIF12C EIF11C EIF10C EIF9C EIF8C

G170 EID7C EID6C EID5C EID4C EID3C EID2C EID1C EID0C

G171 EID15C EID14C EID13C EID12C EID11C EID10C EID9C EID8C

G172 EID23C EID22C EID21C EID20C EID19C EID18C EID17C EID16C

G173 EID31C EID30C EID29C EID28C EID27C EID26C EID25C EID24C

G174

G175

G176

G177

G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD EFIND

G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D

213
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

PMC→CNC Bit No.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D

G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D

G182 EID7D EID6D EID5D EID4D EID3D EID2D EID1D EID0D

G183 EID15D EID14D EID13D EID12D EID11D EID10D EID9D EID8D

G184 EID23D EID22D EID21D EID20D EID19D EID18D EID17D EID16D

G185 EID31D EID30D EID29D EID28D EID27D EID26D EID25D EID24D

G186

G187

G188

G189

G190

G191

G192 IGVRY4 IGVRY3 IGVRY2 IGVRY1

214
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

D I/O card E
(21–TB, 210–TB)

 → 
Address Bit number
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X1000

X1001

X1002

X1003

X1004 SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE


SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7

X1005

X1006

X1007

X1008 *ESP

X1009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1

X1010

X1011

NOTE
1 The bit positions indicated with shading can be
used only for I/O board (96/64).
2 The signals indicated in the box (heavy solid lines) are for
high–speed receivers as well as for a group with a
switchable common.
3 Address X1004 allows common switching.

215
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

PMC → 
Address Bit number
Y1000 Y000

Y1001 Y001

Y1002 Y002

Y1003 Y003

Y1004 Y004

Y1005 Y005

Y1006 Y006

Y1007 Y007

NOTE
The bit positions indicated with shading can be
used only for I/O board (96/64).

4.2.4
Built–in Debug Function Contents
Function Display of sequence pro- Dynamic display of ladder diagram
gram
Diagnostic function STitle data display
S signal status (symbol can be displayed)
S PMC alarm display
S Signal trace
S Memory contents display
S Signal waveform display (*)
S I/O connection status display (*)
Setting and displaying data S Timer
S Counter
S Keep relay
S Data table
Sequence program edit Ladder diagram editing a ladder edit module is
function required)

* Applicabe CNC is limited

216
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.2.5 (1) R9000 (Operation output register for the ADD, SUB, MULB, DIVB,
System Reserve Area and COMPB functional instructions)
of Internal Relay #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

R9000 V N Z Operation result


register
Zero
Sign is minus
Overflow

(2) R9000 (Error output for the EXIN, WINDR, WINDW, MMCWR,
MMCWW, MMC3R, and MMC3W functional instructions)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

R9000

The instruc-
tion ended in
error.

(3) R9002 to R9005 (Operation output registers for the DIVB functional
instruction)
The data remaining after the DIVB functional instruction is executed
in output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

R9002

R9003
Register for
remainder
R9004 (used by DIVB
instruction)
R9005

(4) R9091 (System timer)


4 signals can be used as system timer.
The specifications of every signal are as following.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

R9091

always OFF
always ON
Cyclic signal of 200
ms (104 ms ON, 96
ms OFF)
Cyclic signal of 1 se-
cond. (504 ms ON,
496 ms OFF)

NOTE
1 Each signal is initially off.
2 R9091.0 and R9091.1 are set cyclically at the beginning of
the first ladder level.
3 Each signal (ON–OFF signal) has an accuracy of "8 ms.

217
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

R9091.5
104ms 96ms

200ms

R9091.6
504ms 496ms

1s

4.2.6
Execution Period of
PMC

Sequence program
1st level
From NC (High–speed se-
(1) quence)
END1
2nd level
(Normal sequence)
(2)–1

Synchronized
buffer
(2)–2

Head of 2nd level


(2)–n

From MT

END2
8msec

Period
(1) (1) (1) (1)
1st level
(2)–1 (2)–2 (2)–n (2)–1
2nd level

218
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.3
PMC SCREEN

4.3.1 1. Press SYSTEM .


Display Method
2. Press soft key [PMC], then PMC screen is displayed and the following
soft keys are displayed:

PMC CONTROL SYSTEM MENU MONIT RUN

SELECT ONE OF FOLLOWING SOFT KEYS

PMCLAD : DYNAMIC LADDER DISPLAY


PMCDGN : DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
PMCPRM : PARAMETER (T/C/K/D)
RUN/STOP : RUN/STOP SEQUENCE PROGRAM When
EDIT : EDIT SEQUENCE PROGRAM built–in
program-
I/O : I/O SEQUENCE PROGRAM
mer is run-
SYSPRM : SYSTEM PARAMETER ning.
MONIT : PMC MONITOR

PMCLAD PMCDGN PMCPRM

System parameter screen


Status display of PMC I/O signal
Dynamic display of sequence program

STOP EDIT I/O SYSPRM MONIT

System parameter screen


Input/output of sequence pro-
gram
Editing sequence program
RUN/STOP of sequence

The no. of menus to be displayed changes depending on presence/


absence of built–in programmer.
PMC–RA1/RA5 PMC–RA1/RA5
(Without memory card for (With memory card for
editing) editing)
RUN/STOP f f
EDIT × f
I/O f f
SYSPRM × f

× : Cannot be displayed nor used.

219
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

4.3.2 Press soft key [PMCLAD], and a sequence program is displayed


PMCLAD Screen dynamically and operation monitoring can be confirmed :

Number of net displayed


Ladder display RUN/STOP status

LADDER NET 0001–0004 MONIT RUN


Comment
LOG1 LOG1
ALWAYS1
LOG1

X008.4 *ESP
EMERGENCY
STOP
END1
PORD POR
POWER ON
RESET

TOP BOTTOM SRCH W–SRCH N–SRCH

Other soft keys


F–SCRH ADRESS
Switched each
time pressed
SYMBOL

D Contents displayed 1. Green (Low brightness) display Contacts :open Relay :off
2. White (High brightness) display Contacts : closed Relay : on
D Search method PAGE

1. Use the cursor keys or the page keys PAGE


to change
display positions.
2. [TOP]:Searches top of ladder.
3. [BOTTOM]:Search bottom of ladder.
4. Address.bit,[SRCH] or Signal name, [SRCH]
5. Address.bit,[W–SRCH] or Signal name ,[W–SRCH]
6. Net no.[N–SRCH]:Ladder is displayed from the specified net.
7. Functional instruction no. [F–SRCH] or Functional instruction
name[F–SRCH]
8. [ADRESS]:Signal is displayed by address and bit no.
9. [SYMBOL]:Signal is displayed by signal name (symbol).
(If symbol is not registered at program preparation time, the address
of the signal is displayed).

220
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

[Remarks]
D The search function searches a signal in the forward direction and
displays the ladder with the searched signal at its head. Because there
may exist plural contacts, repeat the search operation to find plural
locations, repeat the search operation to find plural locations with the
specified signal.
D If a specified signal is not found up to the end of the program (ladder),
execution returns to the head of a program and search continues.
D Dump display on ladder Ladder diagram and signal status dump can displayed together.
diagram The dump is displayed over 2 lines at the last line of ladder diagram by
pressing the [DUMP] soft key.
PAGE

PAGE
keys or [SEARCH] soft key is used for changing of PMC
address.

The [DUMP] soft key has the follwing functions.


(1) [BYTE] : Byte type display (1 BYTE)
“G0000 00 14 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00”
“G0016 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00”
(2) [WORD] : Word type display (2 BYTE)
“G0000 1400 0000 0001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000”
“G0016 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000”
(3) [D.WORD] : Long word type display (4 BYTE)
“G0000 00001400 00000001 00000000 00000000”
“G0016 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000”

D Parameter display on The value of parameter of a functional instruction is displayed in the


ladder diagram functional instruction of a ladder diagram.

The function of the soft key is as follows:


(1) [DPARA] : The value of parameter is displayed in functional
instruction.
(2) [NDPARA] : The value of parameter is not displayed in functional
instruction.
D Stop of ladder diagram The ladder display can be stopped by manual operation or trigger of
display by trigger of signal.
signal The former ladder diagram display renews signal status every moment.
4084 series But by using this function, all the ladder diagram at the specified moment
can be checked.
The stop conditions as a trigger are specified by rising or falling edge
detection of the designated signal.

221
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

[Display of setting trigger]


The setting address, condition and counter are displayed at the title line.
“MODE:ON : X0000. 0 : 0 : 0001 ”

COUNT: Trigger checking number (default 1)


POINT: Trigger checking number (default 0)
0 : the top of the 1st level
1 : after END1 execution
2 : after END2 execution
3 : after END3 execution

ADR: Trigger setting address

ON: Rising edge detection (TRGON)


OFF: Falling edge detection (TRGOFF)

* Setting form adr ;p1 ;p2+[TRGON/TRGOFF]soft key

NOTE
“;”=“EOB” adr (trigger address) ;p1 (trigger point) ;p2 (trigger
checking number (1 to 65535))

* Because parameters are stored in the nonvolatile memory, they are not
lost even if the power is turned off.
When bit 2 of keep relay K18 is set to 1 after parameters for sampling
are specified, the trigger function automatically starts when the power
is turned on.
For this operation, press [TRIGER] soft key to bring the following
menu.
SEARCH ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW

RET

TRGON TRGOFF START

NEXT

DUMP DPARA TRGSRC INIT

The function of the [TRIGER] soft key is explained below:


(1) [TRGON] : The trigger function is stopped when a specified address
signal goes high (is turned ON).
(2) [TRGOFF]: The trigger function is stopped when a specified address
signal goes low (is turned OFF).
(3) [START] : Pressing this key switches between trigger function
execution and trigger function termination. While the
trigger function is being executed, the ”TRG” indication
blinks.

222
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

(4) [TRGSRC]: An instruction at which the trigger function has been


stopped by a specified address signal is searched for and
indicated by blinking.
(5) [INIT] : The trigger setting is initialized.
D Divided display of ladder This function is used for displaying the divided screen. It can display
diagram max. six division.
4084 series For this operation, depress [WINDOW] soft key to bring the following
menu.
SEARCH ADRESS TRIGER WINDOW

RET

DIVIDE CANCEL DELETE SELECT WIDTH

The function of the soft key [WINDOW] is as follows:


(1) [DIVIDE] : The screen will be divided.
The dividing display of ladder diagram can be
displayed for the designated NET number.
(NET number+[DIVIDE])
(2) [CANCEL] : The dividing display of ladder diagram display ends.
(The screen returns to normal display.)
(3) [DELETE] : The screen division subject to operation is ended.
(4) [SELECT] : Change the screen subject to division operation.
The screen in operation is displayed by “purple” title
line, another screen is displayed by “blue” title line.
In monochrome CRT, the screen is displayed by
changing brightness.
(5) [WIDTH] : Change the width of division by using [EXPAND] or
[SHRINK] soft key.
(6) [EXPAND] : The divided screen is expanded.
(7) [SHRINK] : The divided screen is shrank.
D ON–LINE EDIT When bit 1 in the keep relay K17 is 1, this function is available and
PMC–RA3 in 4084 series [ONLEDT] soft key is displayed.

When the ladder program is executing, a part of the ladder program can
be changed.
S Change the type of contact (A contact, B contact)
S Change address of contact and coil.
S Change address parameter of functional instruction.
(This function don’t change the size.)
(Cannot be Addition, deletion and chanegable data size)
When bit 3 in the keep relay K18 is 1, this program is automatically
transferred to backup RAM after on–line edit.
When bit 3 in the keep relay K18 is 0, transfer to backup RAM with COPY
function of I/O screen. If power is off without this operation, edited data
is lost.

223
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

4.3.3 Press soft key [PMCDGN] then PMC’s diagnostic screen is displayed.
PMCDGN Screen

D TITLE screen The title data registered when a ladder program is prepared is displayed.

Page number

PMC TITLE DATA #1 MONIT RUN


PMC PROGRAM NO. :
EDITION NO. :
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : 4063 EDITION : 08
(SERIES : 4065 EDITION : 08)
PMC TYPE CONTROL : RB3 PROGRAM : RB3
MEMORY USED : KB
LADDER : KB
SYMBOL : KB
MESSAGE : KB
SCAN TIME : MSEC
SCAN MAX : 016 MS MIN : 008 MS
TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE

Other soft keys

M.SRCH ANALYS

ÄÄÄ
ÄÄ
ÄÄÄ
1st page PMC PROGRAM NO. : Set when PMC

ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ
EDITION NO. : is
prepared

ÄÄ ÄÄ
ÄÄ
PMC CONTROL PROGRAM
SERIES : EDITION : Series and edition of PMC
control software
MEMORY USED : KB
LADDER
SYMBOL
MESSAGE
SCAN TIME
ÄÄ
:

ÄÄ
:
:
:
KB
KB
KB
MSEC
Memory used and
execution time is
displayed.

2nd page MACHINE TOOL BUILDER NAME :


MACHINE TOOL NAME :
CNC & PMC TYPE NAME :
PROGRAM DRAWING NO. : Set when PMC
is prepared.
3rd page DATE OF DRAWING :
PROGRAM DESIGNED BY :
ROM WRITTEN BY :
REMARKS :

224
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

D STATUS screen On/Off state of input/output signals and internal relay is displayed.

PMC SIGNAL STATUS MONIT RUN


ADDRESS 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0 Signal
G0000 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 name
ED15 ED14 ED13 ED12 ED11 ED10 ED9 ED8 Signal state
G0001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0:Off
1:On
ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
G0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Signal state
G0003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 reverses for
FIN signals with *.
G0004 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0: On
1: Off

SEARCH

[Search Method]
• Page keys
PAGE

PAGE
:Forward and Backward by screen

• Cursor keys :Forward and Backward by diagnostic number


• To search a specified address or signal name, input an address number
or signal name and press [SEARCH].

D Alarm screen Displays an alarm generated in PMC.

PMC ALARM MESSAGE MONIT RUN


Alarm dis-
play
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE
For details of
alarms, refer
to Appendix A
List of Alarms.

ALM Blinked

TITLE STATUS ALARM TRACE

225
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

D TRACE screen Every time a specified signal changes, the signal status is memorized in
the trace memory. This function is useful for identifying intermittent
troubles.
1 Trace parameter screen

PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN


TRACE MODE :
(0:1BYTE/1:2BYTE/2:WORD)
1STTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :
2NDTRACE ADDRESS CONDITION
ADDRESS TYPE : (0:PMC/1:PHY)
ADDRESS :
MASK DATA :

T.DISP EXEC

Changes to a trace memory display screen (Screen on


the next page)
Select each item by cursor keys

a. TRACE MODE: Select the trace mode


0=Records changes of 1–byte signals
1=Records changes of independent 2–byte signals
2=Records changes of consecutive 2–byte signals
b. ADDRESS TYPE:
0=PMC address is used for tracing address.
1=Physical address is used for tracing address.
(Mainly used for C–language program)
c. ADDRESS:Set a tracing address.
d. MASK DATA: The bits to be traced are specified by a hexadecimal
number (2 digits).
For example, to trace the signals at bit 7,6,5 and 0, set E1
(hexadecimal) to MASK DATA.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
E1⇒ 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
However, even if bit 4,3,2 and 1 changes, tracing (memory
registration) cannot be done but signal status is memorized when a
tracing is executed.
[Correspondence of binary and hexadecimal number]
00002 : 016 00012 : 116 00102 : 216 00112 : 316
01002 : 416 01012 : 516 01102 : 616 01112 : 716
10002 : 816 10012 : 916 10102 : A16 10112 : B16
11002 : C16 11012 : D16 11102 : E16 11112 : F16

226
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

2 Trace memory contents display screen

PMC SIGNAL TRACE MONIT RUN


1ST ADDRESS=X008(E1) 2ND ADDRESS=G000(FF) Trace
address and
NO. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 mask data
0000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (in parentheses)
I * * * * * * *

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
0001 * * * * * * * *
0002 I I * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
0003 * I * * * * * * * * * * * * * * Latest status
0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I mark : 1
0005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . * mark : 0
0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TRCPRM STOP

10″LCD/14″CRT is displayed by 1 and 0.

a. Soft key [TRCPRM]: Return to the trace parameter setting screen


(screen of previous page)
b. Soft key [EXEC]: Starts tracing.
Trace memory is cleared and each time a
specified signal changes, its status is recorded.
Trace memory is 256 bytes and if tracing is
executed 128 times by 2–byte tracing, tracing
is executed again from the head of memory.
c. Soft key [STOP]: Ends the tracing.
*The tracing parameters are held even if the power is turned off.
#7 #6
ÀÀÀÀ #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K017

#5 0 : Tracing starts by [EXEC].


ÀÀÀÀ
1 : Tracing starts automatically after power on

227
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

4.3.4
Memory Display
(M.SRCH)
D Display of Screen and 1) Pressing the [M.SRCH] soft key changes the screen to that shown in
Operation Fig. 3.5. The displayed soft keys also change.
2) Enter a physical address in hexadecimal from which the contents of the
memory are to be displayed. Then pressing the [SEARCH] key
displays 256 byte of stored data starting from the specified address.
Example) Enter 100000, then pressing the [SEARCH] keydisplays
the contents of the memory starting from 100000H.
PAGE

3) An address can be changed using the or PAGE


key.
4) Pressing either the [BYTE], [WORD], or [D.WORD] soft key
displays data of the corresponding type.
If an address at which the memory is not used is specified, a system
error occurs.
D Function of store To store data in memory, set bit 4 of keep relay K17 to 1, move the cursor
memory to a position at which the address of the data to be changed in RAM is
displayed, and enter data in units of data type in hexadecimal.
Example) Entering 0F41, then pressing the INPUT key stores
0F41 at the address specified by the cursor

PMC CONTENTS OF MEMORY MONIT RUN

100000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100010 4142 4344 4546 4748 494A 4B4C 4D4E 4F50 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP
100020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020 2020
100030 5152 5354 5556 5758 595A 2020 2020 2020 QRSTUVWXYZ

100040 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100050 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100060 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
100070 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................

100080 4641 4E55 4320 434F 2E2C 5444 0000 0000 FANUC CO.LTD....
100090 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000A0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000B0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................

1000C0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000D0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000E0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................
1000F0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 ................

SEARCH INPUT

228
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

D ANALYS screen Change of signals is displayed as the same display as that on the
(Ladder editing card is oscilloscope.
required) 1 Parameter setting screen (1st page)
PMC–RA3 in 4084 series

PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) MONIT RUN

SAMPLING TIME : 10 (1–10 SEC) (a)

TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007.2 (b)

CONDITION : 0 (c)
(0: START 1: TRIGGER–ON 2: TRIGGER–OFF)

TRIGGER MODE : 0 (d)


(0: AFTER 1: ABOUT 2: BEFORE 3: ONLY)

SCOPE DELETE INIT ADDRESS

Select each item by


cursor key

(a) Set a sampling time.


(b) Specifies an address from which recording of signals is started.
(c) Set a condition under which recording is initiated.
0 : Started by soft key [START]
1 : Started by rise of a trigger signal after you press the soft key
[START]
2 : Started by fall of a trigger signal after you press the soft key
[START]
(d) Set a trigger mode
0 : Record signal status after the trigger condition is satisfied
1 : Record signal status before and after the trigger condition is
satisfied.
2 : Record signal status before the trigger condition is satisfied.
3 : Record signal status when the trigger condition is satisfied.
(Display is same as trace memory).

229
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

2 Parameter setting screen (2nd page)

PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) MONIT RUN

SIGNAL ADDRESS

1 : X0000.0 9 : Y0000.0
2 : X0000.1 10 : R0000.1
3 : X0002.0 11 :
Up to 16
4 : X0005.0 12 : signals
5 : 13 :
6 : 14 :
7 : 15 :
8 : 16 :

SCOPE DELETE INIT ADDRESS

a. Soft key [SCOPE] : Select signal waveform display screen


b. Soft key [DELETE] : Delete data on the cursor position
c. Soft key [INIT] : Initialize parameters of signal waveform display
d. Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] :
Switch addresses and symbols for display

230
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

3 SCOPE screen

PMC SIGNAL ANALYSIS(PARAM) MONIT RUN


SAMPLING TIME : 10 CONDITION : 1
TRIGGER ADDRESS : G0007.2 TRIGGER MODE : 0
+---------+---------+---------+------
X0000.0
X0000.1
X0002.0
X0005.0
+---------+---------+---------+------
0 256(MSEC)

SGNPRM START T.SRCH ADDRESS

The above screen is for a system with graphic display.


“J” and “–” are used for display if graphic function is not equipped.
a. Soft key [SGNPRM] : Returns to parameter screen.
b. Soft key [START] or [STOP] :Start or stop the record.
(If TRIGGER MODE=3, signal is displayed when you press STOP
key.)
c. Soft key [T.SRCH] :Displayed for a specified time.
d. Soft key [ADDRESS] or [SYMBOL] :Switch addresses and
symbols for display
e. Soft key [EXCHG] : Change order of signals displayed.
S Press soft key [EXCHG]
S Move the cursor to a signal to be changed.
S Press soft key [SELECT].
S Move the cursor to the destination.
S Press [TO] and [EXEC], then the signal changes its order.
f. Soft key [SCALE] : Changes time scale for graphic display. Scale
changes from 256 to 512, and to 1024 msec every time you press the
key.
g. Cursor key : Scrolls time axis forward and backward

231
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

4.3.5
 

D Inputting PMC
parameters from the MDI 1 Set to MDI mode or emergency stop state.
2 Set PARAMETER WRITE (on setting screen) to 1 or set the program
protect signal (KEY4) to 1.
PWE KEY4

Timer f –
Counter f f Either one
Keep relay f –
Data table f f Either one

3 Press a soft key and select a required screen.


[TIMER] :Timer screen
[COUNTR] :Counter screen
[KEEPRL] :Keep relay screen
[DATA] :Data table screen
4 Press cursor key and move the cursor to a desired number.

5 Input a numeric key and press INPUT key and data is input.

6 After the data is input, set PARAMETER WRITE or KEY4 on setting


screen to 0.

D TIMER screen This screen is used for setting timer time of the functional instruction
(SUB 3).
Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key)
Timer no. specified by functional instruction
Address specified by ladder

PMC PARAMETER (TIMER) #001 MONIT RUN

NO.ADDRESS DATA NO.ADDRESS DATA


01 T00 480 11 T20 0 Timer
02 T02 960 12 T22 0 delay
time
03 T04 0 13 T24 0 (msec)
04 T06 0 14 T26 0
05 T08 0 15 T28 0
06 T10 0 16 T30 0
07 T12 0 17 T32 0
08 T14 0 18 T34 0
09 T16 0 19 T36 0
10 T18 0 20 T38 0
TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA

Timer set time : Timer no. 1–8 is max. 1572.8 sec and its accuracy is
48ms.
Timer no. 9 is max. 262.1 sec and its accuracy is 8ms.

232
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

D COUNTER screen This screen sets and displays max. value of counter and current value of
the counter instruction (SUB 4).

Page no. (screen is scrolled by page key)


Max. value of counter
(Minimum value is specified by counter ins.)
Current value of counter

PMC PARAMETER (COUNTER)#001 MONIT RUN

NO. ADDRESS PRESET CURRENT


01 C00 100 1
02 C04 50 2 PRESET
03 C08 0 0 and
CURRENT
04 C12 0 0 can be set
05 C16 0 0 up to 9999,
06 C20 0 0 respectively.
07 C24 0 0
08 C28 0 0
09 C32 0 0
10 C36 0 0
TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA

Address specified by ladder


Counter number specified by functional instruction

D KEEP RELAY screen


Address specified by ladder

PMC PARAMETER (KEEP REALAY) #001 MONIT RUN

NO.ADDRESS DATA NO.ADDRESS DATA


01 K00 00000000 11 K10 00000000
02 K01 00000000 12 K11 00000000
03 K02 00000000 13 K12 00000000
04 K03 00000000 14 K13 00000000

ÀÀÀÀ
05 K04 00000000 15 K14 00000000

ÀÀÀÀ
06 K05 00000000 16 K15 00000000
07 K06 00000000 17 K16 00000000
08 K07
09 K08
10 K09
00000000
00000000
00000000
18 K17
19 K18
20 K19
ÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ
00000000
00000000
00000000
TIMER COUNTR KEEPRL DATA

Address specified by ladder


ÀÀ Used by PMC system

233
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

1 Nonvolatile memory control


ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K016
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#6(MWRTF1) : Writing status in nonvolatile memory
#7(MWRTF2) : For checking the writing status in nonvolatile memory
2 PMC system parameter
The following keep relays are used by the system, therefore they
cannot be used in the sequence program.

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K017
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#0(LADMASK) 0 : Dynamic display of ladder is executed.
1 : Dynamic display of ladder is not executed.
#1(PRGRAM) 0 : Built–in programmer is not used.
1 : Built–in programmer is used.
#2(AUTORUN) 0 : A sequence program is executed automatically after the power is
turned on.
1 : A sequence program is executed by sequence program soft key.
#4(MEMINP) 0 : Data input cannot be done in memory contents display function.
1 : Data input can be done in memory contents display function.
#5(TRCSTAT) 0 : Signal tracing starts by soft key [EXEC] in signal trace function.
1 : Signal tracing starts automatically by power on in signal trace
function.
#6(ANASTAT) 0 : Pressing [EXEC] key initiates sampling by signal waveform display
function.
1 : Turning power to on initiates sampling by signal waveform display
function.
#7(DTBLDSP) 0 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is displayed.
1 : The PMC parameter data table control screen is not displayed.

ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
K018

ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
ÀÀÀÀ ÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K019

* The system uses the unused data areas for the PMC management
software. The settings should not be changed. Usually, all bits are set
to 0.

234
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

D DATA TABLE screen 1 Data table setting screen


No. of screen

PMC DATA TBL CONTROL #001 MONIT RUN

GROUP TABLE COUNT = 2 No. of


data table
NO. ADDRESS PARAMETER TYPE NO.OF DATA groups
001 D0000 00000000 0 10
002 D0020 00000011 1 20
003
004 No. of
005 data table
Data length
006
Table
007 parameter
008 Data table
head ad-
dress
G.DATA G.CONT NO.SRH INIT
Group no. of
data table

a. Soft key [G.DATA] : Select data display screen of data table.


(Next screen)
b. NO. OF GROUPS [G.CONT]: Set the no. of groups of data table.
c. Group No. [NO.SRH]: Move the cursor to a specified group.
d. Soft key [INIT]: Initializes the setting of data table.
No. of groups is 1, ADDRESS is D0000, PARAMETER is 0000000,
TYPE is 0, NO. OF DATA is 1860.
This operation is done usually when a sequence program is prepared.
When PMC parameters are set, internal parameters are not affected.

PARAMETER
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2
ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
#1 #0

ÀÀÀÀÀÀ
K019

0 : Binary format
1 : BCD format
0 : Without protection for input
1 : With protection for input

TYPE
0 : 1–byte length 1 : 2–byte length 2 : 4–byte length
PAGE

e. Using the page key / PAGE


, next screen/previous screen can be
selected.
(The screen cannot be switched when the field indicating the number
of screens is blank.)

235
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

2 Data display screen

Group number
Page number

PMC PRM (DATA) 001/001 MONIT RUN


NO. ADDRESS DATA
000 D0000 0
001 D0001 0
002 D0002 0
003 D0003 0
004 D0004 0
005 D0005 0
006 D0006 0
007 D0007 0
008 D0008 0
009 D0009 0

C.DATA G–SRCH SEARCH

a. Soft key [C.DATA] : Returns to the data table setting screen.


(Previous screen)
b. Group No. [G–SRCH] : Head of the specified group is selected.

c. Address [SEARCH] : Searches an address in a group currently


selected.

236
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

4.4
LIST OF SIGNALS BY
EACH MODE
Group SYMBOL Signal names Address
*+L1 to *+L4 Overtravel signal G114
*-L1 to *-L4 Overtravel signal G116
*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2
*DEC1 to *DEC4 Deceleration signal for reference position return X1013
*EAXSL Control axis selection status signal (PMC axis control) F129#7
*ESP X1012#4
Emergency sto
stop signal
*ESP G008#4
*ESPA G071#1
stop signal (serial sspindle)
Emergency sto indle)
*ESPB G075#1
*FLWU Follow–up signal G007#5
* *FV0 to *FV7 Feedrate override signal G012
*FV0E to *FV7E Feedrate override signal (PMC axis control) G151
*FV0O to *FV7O Software operator’s panel signal (*FV0 to *FV7) F078
*HROV0 to *HROV6 1% step rapid traverse override signal G096#0 to #6
*IT Interlock signal G008#0
*IT1 to *IT4 Interlock signal for each axis G130
*JV0 to *JV15 Manual feedrate override signal G010,G011
*JV0O to *JV15O Software operator’s panel signal (*JV0 to *JV15) F079,F080
*SP Feed hold signal G008#5
*SSTP Spindle stop signal G029#6
*TLV0 to *TLV9 Tool life count override signal G049#0 to G050#1
+J1 to +J4 Feed axis and direction selection signal G100
+ +J1O to +J4O Software operator’s panel signal (+J1 to +J4) F081#0,#2,#4,#6
+MIT1 to +MIT4 Interlock signal for each axis and direction G132#0 to #3
-J1 to -J4 Feed axis and direction selection signal G102
– -J1O to -J4O Software operator’s panel signal (–J1 to –J4) F081#1,#3,#5,#7
-MIT1 to -MIT4 Interlock signal for each axis and direction G134#0 to #3
ABTQSV Servo axis abnormal load detected signal F090#0
ABTSP1 First–spindle abnormal load detected signal F090#1
ABTSP2 Second–spindle abnormal load detected signal F090#2
AFL Miscellaneous function lock signal G005#6
A AL Alarm signal F001#0
ALMA F045#0
Alarm signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
ALMB F049#0
ARSTA G071#0
Alarm reset signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
ARSTB G075#0

237
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

Group SYMBOL Signal names Address


B00 to B31 2nd auxiliary function code signal F030 to F033
BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2
BDT1 Optional block skip signal G044#0
B BDTO Software operator’s panel signal (BDT) F075#2
BF 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal F007#7
BFIN 2nd auxiliary function completion signal G005#7
BGEACT Background editing signal F053#4
CFINA Spindle switch completion signal (serial spindle) F046#1
CFINB Spindle switch completion signal (serial spindle) F050#1
CHPA F046#0
Power line switch signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
CHPB F050#0
C
CON Cs contour control change signal G027#7
CTH1A,CTH2A G070#3,#2
Clutch/gear signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
CTH1B,CTH2B G074#3,#2
CUT Cutting feed signal F002#6
DEFMDA G072#3
Differential mode command (serial spindle)
s indle)
DEFMDB G076#3
DEN Distribution end signal F001#3
DM00 F009#7
DM01 F009#6
Decode M signal
DM02 F009#5
D
DM30 F009#4
DMMC Direct operation select signal G042#7
DNCI DNC operation select signal G043#5
DRN Dry run signal G046#7
DRNE Dry run signal (PMC axis control) G150#7
DRNO Software operator’s panel signal (DRN) F075#5
EA0 to EA6 Address signal for external data input G002#0 to #6
EABUFA F131#1
EABUFB F134#1
Buffer full signal (PMC axis control)
EABUFC F137#1
EABUFD F140#1
EACNT1 to EACNT4 Controlling signal (PMC axis control) F182
EADEN1 to EADEN4 Distribution completion signal (PMC axis control) F112
EAX1 to EAX4 Control axis select signal (PMC axis control) G136
E
EBSYA F130#7
EBSYB Axis control command read completion signal
g F133#7
EBSYC (PMC axis control) F136#7
EBSYD F139#7
EBUFA G142#7
EBUFB G154#7
Axis control command read signal (PMC axis control)
EBUFC G166#7
EBUFD G178#7

238
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

Group SYMBOL Signal names Address


EC0A to EC6A G143#0 to #6
EC0B to EC6B G155#0 to #6
Axis control command signal (PMC axis control)
EC0C to EC6C G167#0 to #6
EC0D to EC6D G179#0 to #6
ECKZA F130#1
ECKZB F133#1
Following zero checking signal (PMC axis control)
ECKZC F136#1
ECKZD F139#1
ECLRA G142#6
ECLRB G154#6
Reset signal (PMC axis control)
ECLRC G166#6
ECLRD G178#6
ED0 to ED15 Data signal for external data input G000,G001
EDENA F130#3
EDENB F133#3
Auxiliary function executing signal (PMC axis control)
EDENC F136#3
EDEND F139#3
EF External operation signal F008#0
EFD External operation signal for high–speed interface F007#1
EFIN External operation function completion signal G005#1
EFINA G142#0
EFINB G154#0
Auxiliary function com
completion
letion signal (PMC axis control)
EFINC G166#0
E
EFIND G178#0
EGENA F130#4
EGENB F133#4
Axis moving signal (PMC axis control)
EGENC F136#4
EGEND F139#4
EIALA F130#2
EIALB F133#2
Alarm signal (PMC axis control)
EIALC F136#2
EIALD F139#2
EID0A to EID31A G146 to G149
EID0B to EID31B G158 to G161
Axis control data signal (PMC axis control)
EID0C to EID31C G170 to G173
EID0D to EID31D G182 to G185
EIF0A to EIF15A G144,G145
EIF0B to EIF15B G156,G157
Axis control feedrate signal (PMC axis control)
EIF0C to EIF15C G168,G169
EIF0D to EIF15D G180,G181
EINPA F130#0
EINPB F133#0
In position
In– osition signal (PMC axis control)
EINPC F136#0
EINPD F139#0
EKC0 to EKC7 Key code signal G098
EKENB Key code read completion signal F053#7

239
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

Group SYMBOL Signal names Address


EKSET key code read signal G066#7
EM11A to EM48A F132,F142
EM11B to EM48B F135,F145
Auxiliary function code signal (PMC axis control)
EM11C to EM48C F138,F148
EM11D to EM48D F141,F151
EMBUFA G142#2
EMBUFB G154#2
Buffering disable signal (PMC axis control)
EMBUFC G166#2
EMBUFD G178#2
EMFA F131#0
EMFB F134#0
Auxiliary function strobe signal (PMC axis control)
EMFC F137#0
EMFD F140#0
EMSBKA G143#7
EMSBKB G155#7
Block stop
sto disable signal (PMC axis control)
EMSBKC G167#7
EMSBKD G179#7
ENB Spindle enable signal F001#4
ENBKY External key input mode selection signal G066#1
EOTNA F130#6
EOTNB F133#6
Negative direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control)
Negative–direction
EOTNC F136#6
E EOTND F139#6
EOTPA F130#5
EOTPB F133#5
Positive direction overtravel signal (PMC axis control)
Positive–direction
EOTPC F136#5
EOTPD F139#5
EOV0 Override 0% signal (PMC axis control) F129#5
EREND Read completion signal for external data input F060#0
ERS External reset signal G008#7
ESBKA G142#3
ESBKB G154#3
Block sto
stop signal (PMC axis control)
ESBKC G166#3
ESBKD G178#3
ESEND Search completion signal for external data input F060#1
ESKIP Skip signal (PMC axis control) X#6
ESOFA G142#4
ESOFB G154#4
Servo off signal (PMC axis control)
ESOFC G166#4
ESOFD G178#4
ESTB Read signal for external data input G002#7
ESTPA G142#5
ESTPB G154#5
Axis control tem
temporary
orary sto
stop signal (PMC axis control)
ESTPC G166#5
ESTPD G178#5

240
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

Group SYMBOL Signal names Address


EXLM Stored stroke check select signal G007#6
EXRD External read start signal G058#1
E
EXSTP External read/punch stop signal G058#2
EXWT External punch start signal G058#3
FIN Completion signal G004#3
F
FSCSL Cs contour control change completion signal F044#1
G08MD Lock–ahead control mode signal F066#0
G GR1,GR2 Gear selection signal (input) G028#1,#2
GR1O,GR2O,GR3O Gear selection signal (output ) F034#0 to #2
HROV 1% step rapid traverse override select signal G096#7
HS1A to HS1D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G018#0 to #3
HS1AO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1A) F077#0
HS1BO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1B) F077#1
HS1CO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1C) F077#2
H HS1DO Software operator’s panel signal (HS1D) F077#3
HS1IA to AHS1ID Manual handle interruption axis select signal G041#0 to #3
HS2A to HS2D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G018#4 to #7
HS2IA to HS2ID Manual handle interruption axis select signal G041#4 to #7
HS3A to HS3D Manual handle feed axis selection signal G019#0 to #3
HS3IA to HS3ID Manual handle interruption axis select signal G042#0 to #3
IGNVRY All–axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal G066#0
IGVRY1 to IGVRY4 Each–axis VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal G192
INCH Inch input signal F002#0
INCMDA G072#5
Incremental command (Serial sspindle)
indle)
INCMDB G076#5
I INCSTA F047#1
Incremental type
ty e orientation signal (Serial spindle)
s indle)
INCSTB F051#1
INDXA G072#0
stop position
Change command of orientation sto osition (Serial sspindle)
indle)
INDXB G076#0
INHKY Key input disable signal F053#0
INP1 to INP4 In–position signal F104
KEY1 to KEY4 Memory protect signal G046#3 to #6
K
KEYO Software operator’s panel signal (KEY1 to KEY4) F075#6
LDT1A F045#4
Load detection signal 1 (serial spindle)
s indle)
LDT1B F049#4
L
LDT2A F045#5
Load detection signal 2 (serial spindle)
s indle)
LDT2B F049#5
M00 to M31 Miscellaneous function code signal F010 to F013
M200 to M215 2nd M function code signal F014 to F015
M300 to M315 3rd M function code signal F016 to F017
MA CNC ready signal F001#7
M MABSM Manual absolute check signal F004#2
MAFL Miscellaneous function lock check signal F004#4
MBDT1 Optional block skip check signal F004#0
MCFNA G071#3
Power line switch completion
com letion signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
MCFNB G075#3

241
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

Group SYMBOL Signal names Address


MD1,MD2,MD4 Mode selection signal G043#0 to #2
MD1O Software operator’s panel signal (MD1) F073#0
MD2O Software operator’s panel signal (MD2) F073#1
MD4O Software operator’s panel signal (MD4) F073#2
MDRN Dry run check signal F002#7
MEDT Memory edit select check signal F003#6
MF Auxiliary function strobe signal F007#0
MF2 2nd M function strobe signal F008#4
MF3 3rd M function strobe signal F008#5
MFIN Auxiliary function completion signal G005#0
MFIN2 2nd M function completion signal G004#4
MFIN3 3rd M function completion signal G004#5
MFNHGA Main spindle MCC status signal
g while changing
g g spindles G072#6
MFNHGB (serial spindle) G076#6
MH Manual handle feed select check signal F003#1
MI1 to MI4 Mirror image signal G106
MINC Incremental feed select check signal F003#0
MINP External program input start signal G058#0
MJ JOG feed select check signal F003#2
MLK All–axis machine lock signal G044#1
MLK1 to MLK4 Each–axis machine lock signal G108
MLKO Software operator’s panel signal (MLK) F075#4
MMDI Manual data input select check signal F003#3
M
MMEM Automatic operation select check signal F003#5
MMI1 to MMI4 Mirror image check signal F108
MMLK All–axis machine lock check signal F004#1
MOAR1A Signal
g for completion of spindle orientation with a magnetic
g F046#6
MOAR1B sensor (serial spindle) F050#6
MOAR2A Signal
g for approximate spindle orientation with a magnetic
g F046#7
MOAR2B sensor (serial spindle) F050#7
MORCMA Command for spindle orientation with a magnetic
g sensor G073#7
MORCMB (serial spindle) G077#7
Manual handle feed amount selection signal
MP1,MP2 G019#4,#5
(incremental feed signal)
MP1O Software operator’s panel signal (MP1) F076#0
MP2O Software operator’s panel signal (MP2) F076#1
MPOFA G073#2
Motor power
ower sto
stop signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
MPOFB G077#2
MRDYA G070#7
Machine ready signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
MRDYB G074#7
MREF Manual reference position return selection check signal F004#5
MRMT DNC operation select check signal F003#4
MSBK Single block check signal F004#3
MTCHIN TEACH IN select check signal F003#7
MV1 to MV4 Axis moving signal F102
MVD1 to MVD4 Axis moving direction signal F106

242
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

Group SYMBOL Signal names Address


NRROA Short–distant movement command while changing
g g the G072#2
N
NRROB orientation stop position (serial spindle) G076#2
OP Automatic operation signal F000#7
ORARA F045#7
Orientation completion
com letion signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
ORARB F049#7
ORCMA G070#6
Orientation command signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
ORCMB G074#6
O
OUT0 to OUT7 Orientation command signal (serial spindle) F072
OVC Override cancel signal G006#4
OVCE Override cancellation signal (PMC axis control) G150#5
OVRA G072#4
Analog override command (serial sspindle)
indle)
OVRB G076#4
PC1DTA Signal
g indicating
g the status of the detected one–rotation F047#0
PC1DTB position coder signal (serial spindle) F051#0
POAR2A Signal
g for approximate spindle orientation with a position F046#5
POAR2B coder (serial spindle) F050#5
P PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,P
Workpiece number search signal G009#0 to 4
N16
PRGDPL program screen display mode signal F053#1
PRTSF Target parts count reached signal F062#7
PSW01 to PSW10 Position switch signal F070#0 to F071#1
R01I to R12I G032#0 to G033#3
Spindle
S indle motor sspeed
eed command signal
R01I2 to R12I2 G034#0 to G035#3
R01O to R12O S12–bit code signal F036#0 to F037#3
RCFNA F046#3
Output
Out ut switch com
completion
letion signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
RCFNB F050#3
RCHA G071#7
Power line status check signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
RCHB G075#7
RCHHGA High–output
g MCC status signal
g while changing
g g output G072#7
RCHHGB (serial spindle) G076#7
RCHPA F046#2
Output
Out ut switch signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
RCHPB F050#2
R RGSPM F065#1
Spindle
S indle rotation direction signal
RGSPP F065#0
RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061#0
RGTSP1,RGTSP2 Rigid tapping spindle selection signal G061#4,#5
ROTAA Rotation direction command while changing
g g the orientation G072#1
ROTAB stop position (serial spindle) G076#1
ROV1,ROV2 Rapid traverse override signal G014#0,#1
ROV1E,ROV2E Rapid traverse override signal (PMC axis control) G150#0,#1
ROV1O Software operator’s panel signal (ROV1) F076#4
ROV2O Software operator’s panel signal (ROV2) F076#5
RPALM Read/punch alarm signal F053#3
RPBSY Read/punch busy signal F053#2

243
4. INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC B–62705EN/03

Group SYMBOL Signal names Address


RPDO Rapid traversing signal F002#1
RRW Reset&rewind signal G008#6
RSLA G071#6
Output
Out ut switch request signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
RSLB G075#6
RST Reset signal F001#1
R
RT Manual rapid traverse selection signal G019#7
RTAP Rigid tapping in–progress signal F076#3
RTE Manual rapid traverse selection signal (PMC axis control) G150#6
RTO Software operator’s panel signal (RT) F077#6
RWD Rewinding signal F000#0
S00 to S31 Spindle speed code signal F022 to F025
SA Servo ready signal F000#6
SAR Spindle speed arrival signal G029#4
SARA F045#3
Speed
S eed arrival signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SARB F049#3
SBK Single block signal G046#1
SBKO Software operator’s panel signal (SBK) F075#3
SDTA F045#2
Speed
S eed detection signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SDTB F049#2
SF Spindle speed strobe signal F007#2
SFIN Spindle function completion signal G005#2
SFRA G070#5
CW command signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SFRB G074#5
SGN G033#5
Spindle
S indle motor command polarity
olarity select signal
SGN2 G035#5
SHA00 to SHA11 G078#0 to G079#3
Spindle
S indle orientation external sto
stop position
osition command signal
SHB00 to SHB11 G080#0 to G081#3
S SIND G033#7
Spindle
S indle motor speed
s eed command select signal
SIND2 G035#7
SKIP Skip signal X#7
SOCNA G071#4
Soft start/stop
start/sto cancel signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SOCNB G075#4
SOR Spindle orientation signal G029#5
SOV0 to SOV7 Spindle speed override signal G030
SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000#4
SPO Software operator’s panel signal (*SP) F075#7
SPSLA G071#2
Spindle
S indle select signal (serial spindle)
s indle)
SPSLB G075#2
SPSTP Spindle stop complete signal G028#6
SRN Program restart signal G006#0
SRNMV Program restart under way signal F002#4
SRVA G070#4
CCW command signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
SRVB G074#4
SSIN G033#6
Spindle
S indle motor command polarity
olarity select signal
SSIN2 G035#6

244
B–62705EN/03 4.INTERFACE BETWEEN NC AND PMC

Group SYMBOL Signal names Address


SSTA F045#1
Speed
S eed zero signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
SSTB F049#1
S ST Cycle start lamp signal G007#2
STL Cycle start signal F000#5
SVF1 to SVF Servo off signal G126
T00 to T31 Tool function code signal F026 to F029
TAP Tapping signal F001#5
TF Tool function strobe signal F007#3
TFIN Tool function completion signal G005#3
TL01 to TL64 Tool group number select signal G047#0 to #6
TLCH Tool change signal F064#0
TLCHI Individual tool change signal F064#2
TLMA F045#6
Torque limit signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
TLMB F049#6
T
TLMHA G070#1
Torque limit command HIGH signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
TLMHB G074#1
TLMLA G070#0
Torque limit command LOW signal (serial sspindle)
indle)
TLMLB G074#0
TLNW New tool select signal F064#1
TLRST Tool change reset signal G048#7
TLRSTI Individual tool change reset signal G048#6
TLSKP Tool skip signal G048#5
TMRON General–purpose integrating meter start signal G053#0
UI000 to UI015 Input signal for custom macro G054,G055
UINT Interrupt signal for custom macro G053#3
U
UO000 to UO015 F054,F055
Output
Out ut signal for custom macro
UO100 to UO131 F056 to F059
ZP1 to ZP Reference position return end signal F094
ZP21 to ZP2 2nd reference position return end signal F096
Z ZRF1 to ZRF Reference position establishment signal F120
ZRN Manual reference position return selection signal G043#7
ZRNO Software operator’s panel signal (ZRN) F073#4

245
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03

5 DIGITAL SERVO

This chapter describes servo tuning screen required for maintenance of


digital servo and adjustment of reference position.

5.1 INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS . . . . . . 247


5.2 SERVO TUNING SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.3 ADJUSTING REFERENCE POSITION
(DOG METHOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING . . . . 255

246
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO

5.1 This section describes how to set initial servo parameters, which is used
for field adjustment of machine tool.
INITIAL SETTING
1. Turn on power at the emergency stop condition.
SERVO PARAMETERS
2. Set the parameter to display the servo tuning screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS

#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.


1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.

3. Turn off the power once then turn it on again.


4. Display the servo parameter setting screen by the following
operation: SYSTEM key [SV.PARA].
5. Input data required for initial setting using the cursor and page key.

SERVO SETTING
X AXIS Y AXIS
(1) INITIAL SET BIT 00000000 00000000 PRM 2000
(2) MOTOR ID NO. 47 47 PRM 2020
(3) AMR 00000000 00000000 PRM 2001
(4) CMR 2 2 PRM 1820
(5) FEED GEAR N 1 1 PRM 2084
(6) (N/M) M 125 125 PRM 2085
(7) DIRECTION SET 111 111 PRM 2022
(8) VELOCITY PULSE NO. 8192 8192 PRM 2023
(9) POSITION PULSE NO. 12500 12500 PRM 2024
(10) REF.COUNTER 8000 8000 PRM 1821

(1) Initial set bit


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 PRMCAL DGPRM PLC01

#0 (PLC01) 0 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are used as they are:
1 : Values of parameter 2023 and 2024 are multiplied by 10.
#1 (DGPRM)l 0 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is done.
1 : Initial setting of digital servo parameter is not done.
#3 (PRMCAL) 1 : Turns to 1 when the initial setting is done.
The following parameters are set automatically in
accordance with the no. of pulses of pulse coder:
PRM 2043(PK1V), PRM 2044(PK2V), PRM 2047(POA1),
PRM 2053(PPMAX),PRM 2054(PDDP),
PRM 2056(EMFCMP),
PRM 2057(PVPA), PRM 2059(EMFBAS),
PRM 2074(AALPH),PRM 2076(WKAC)

247
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03

(2) Motor number


See Manuals for servo amplifier a series.

(3) Arbitrary AMR function (for 5–0S to 3–0S)


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 2001 AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 For each axis

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Motor model
1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 5–0S
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4–0S, 3–0S
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 other than above

NOTE
Set “00000000” for serial pulse coder C.

(4) CMR
PRM 1820 Command multiply ratio

1) When CMR is 1/2 to 1/27 Set value= 1 +100


CMR
2) When CMR is 0.5 to 48 Set value=2×CMR

(5) Turn off the power then back on.


(6) Feed gear N/M
PRM 2084 n for flexible feed gear

PRM 2085 m for flexible feed gear

1) For serial pulse coder A or B, and serial a pulse coder.

n Number of feedback pulses per revolution of motor


=
m 1000000

NOTE
For serial pulse coder B, use a value not exceeding 250,000
as the number of feedback pulses per revolution.

<<Examples of calculation>>
1/1000 mm 1/10000 mm
One revolution 8mm n=1/m=125 n=2/m=25
of motor 10mm n=1/m=100 n=1/m=10
12mm n=3/m=250 n=3/m=25

248
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO

(7) Direction of travel


PRM 2022 Rotational direction of motor

111 : Normal (clockwise) –111 : Reverse (counterclockwise)

(8) Number of velocity pulses and position pulses


1) For serial pulse coder A or B, or serial a pulse coder
Increment system : 1/1000mm Increment system : 1/10000mm
No
Paramter No.
Closed loop Semi–closed loop Closed loop Semi–closed loop
High resolution setting 2000 xxxx xxx 0 xxxx xxx 1
Separate detector 1815 0010 0010 0010 0000 0010 0010 0010 0000
No. of velocity feedback pulses 2023 8192 819
No. of position feedback pulses 2024 NS 12500 NS/10 1250

NOTE
1 NS is the number of position feedback pulses per one
revolution of the motor (multiplied by four)
2 The 5–0S to 3–0S motors have different numbers of poles.
Set parameter 2001.
3 Even if the system employs a closed loop, bit 3 of parameter
2002 is 1 and bit 4 is 0.

(9) Reference counter


PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity for each axis (0 to 99999999)

6. Turn off the power then back on.

249
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03

5.2
SERVO TUNING
SCREEN

5.2.1 Set a parameter to display the servo tuning screen.


Parameter Setting #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SVS

#0 (SVS) 0 : Servo tuning screen is not displayed.


1 : Servo tuning screen is displayed.

5.2.2 1. Press SYSTEM key and soft key [SV. PARA] in this order.
 
  
   2. Press soft key [SV.TUN] to select the servo tuning screen.

SERVO TUNING 01234 N12345


(PAMAMETER) (MONITOR)
(1) FUN.BIT 00000000 ALARM 1 00000000 (9)
(2) LOOP GAIN 3000 ALARM 2 00000000 (10)
(3) TURNING SET. 0 ALARM 3 10000000 (11)
(4) SET PERIOD 50 ALARM 4 00000000 (12)
(5) INT.GAIN 113 ALARM 5 00000000 (13)
(6) PROP.GAIN –1015 LOOP GAIN 2999 (14)
(7) FILER 0 POS ERROR 556 (15)
(8) VELOC.GAIN 125 CURRENT% 10 (16)
SPEED RPM 100 (17)

SV SET SV TUN OPE

(1) Function bit : PRM 2003


(2) Loop gain : PRM 1825
(3) Tuning start : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)
(4) Set period : (Used by automatic servo tuning function)
(5) Integral gain : PRM 2043
(6) Proportional gain : PRM 2044
(7) Filter : PRM 2067
(PRM 2021)+256
(8) Velocity gain Set value= ×100
256

(9) Alarm 1 : DGN 200 (Details of alarm 400 and 414)


(10) Alarm 2 : DGN 201 (Details of disconnection alarm, overload)
(11) Alarm 3 : DGN 202 (Details of alarm 319)
(12) Alarm 4 : DGN 203 (Details of alarm 319)
(13) Alarm 5 : DGN 204 (Details of alarm 414)
(14) Loop gain : Actual loop gain
(15) Position error : Actual position error(DGN 300)
(16) Current(%) : Indicate current with % to the rated value.
(17) Speed RPM : Number of motor actual rotation

250
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm1 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

DGN (200) :
#0 (OFA) : Overflow alarm
#1 (FBA) : Disconnection alarm
#2 (DCA) : Discharge alarm
#3 (HVA) : Excessive voltage alarm
#4 (HCA) : Abnormal current alarm
#5 (OVC) : Overcurrent alarm
#6 (LV) : Insufficient voltage alarm
#7 (OVL) : Overload alarm
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm2 ALD EXP

DGN (201) ⇓
Over- 0 — — — Amplifier overheat
load
alarm 1 — — — Motor overheat

Discon- 1 — — 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnection


nection (Hardware)
alarm
1 — — 1 Separate type pulse coder disconnec-
tion (Hardware)
0 — — 0 Pulse coder disconnection (software)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm3 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH

DGN (202) :
#0 (SPH) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is faulty.
Counting the feedback signal is in error.
#1 (CKA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Internal block has stopped.
#2 (BZA) : Battery voltage becomes 0.
Replace batteries and set the reference position.
#3 (RCA) : Serial pulse coder is faulty.
Counting is in error.
If the RCA bit is set to 1 when both the FBA bit (bit 1 of alarm 1) and
ALD bit of alarm 2 are set to 1 and the EXP bit of alarm 2 (internal
hardware disconnection) is set to 1, a count miss alarm (CMAL)
occurs in the α pulse coder.
#4 (PHA) : Serial pulse coder or feedback cable is abnormal.
Counting the feedback signal is in error.
#5 (BLA) : Battery voltage is in low (warning).
#6 (CSA) : Hardware of serial pulse coder is abnormal.

251
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm4 DTE CRC STB PRM

DGN (203) :
#4 (PRM) : Parameter detected by the Digital servo is invalid.
#5 (STB) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
Transmitted data is in error.
#6 (CRC) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
Transmitted data is in error.
#7 (DTE) : Communication error of serial pulse coder.
There is no response.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Alarm5 OFS MCC LDM PMS

DGN (204) :
#3 (PMS) : No. of feedback pulses are in error because pulse coder α series or
feedback cable is faulty.
#4 (LDM) : LED of pulse coder α series is abnormal.
#5 (MCC) : Contacts of electro–magnetic contactor of servo amplifier is blown
#6 (OFS) : A/D conversion of current value of digital servo is abnormal.

252
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO

5.3
ADJUSTING
REFERENCE
POSITION
(DOG METHOD)

5.3.1
General

Speed

Rapid traverse
(PRM1420α)
FL rate
(PRM1425 α )

Time

Rapid traverse acc./dec. time constant (PRM1620 α )

*DECα

PCZ

Grid

Grid shift amount


Reference counter capacity
(PRM1850)
(PRM1821)

10mm/rev

10000P +
Error Position Speed M
CMR f gain
Command counter loop

4 (Serial)
Reference
GRID counter FFG PC

10000P/rev
Counter capacity
(Flexible feed gear)
10000P

D Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ

#1(DLZ)l 0 : Reference position return method is normal (dog).


1 : Dogless reference position setting is used.
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity [P]

No. of feedback pulses or its division by an integer is set.

253
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03

PRM 1850 Grid shift amount per axis [P]

When the resolution is 0.0001mm, set the value in the unit ten times
the detection unit.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1815 APC APZ OPT

#1(OPT) 0 : Position detection is performed by the pulse coder built in the motor.
1 : Separate type pulse coder or linear scale is used.
#4(APZ) Zero position of absolute pulse coder is :
0 : Not established
1 : Established
(Turns to 1 after establishment)
To manually change the value of the APZ bit from 0 to 1 without first
returning to the reference position
when using serial pulse coder α , follow this procedure: Back up the
data with the battery and give the motor one or more turns.
Turn the power off then on again, then change the APZ bit setting
from 0 to 1.
#5(APC) 0 : Position detector is other than absolute pulse coder.
1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.

D Separate Type Pulse


Coder or Linear Scale is
Used
PRM 1821 Reference counter capacity per axis [P]

Normally, the number of feedback pulses per motor revolution is set to


the reference counter capacity.
When plural reference marks are on a linear scale, a quotient of the
distance between the reference marks divided by an interfer may be used
as a reference counter capacity:

Example)

(1µ m)
300mm ⇒ reference counter 30000
20000
15000
10000 etc

254
B–62705EN/03 5. DIGITAL SERVO

5.4 When there are no dog nor limit switch for reference position return, this
function enables the tool to return the reference position that is set by
DOGLESS MTB.
REFERENCE When the absolute position detector is used, the reference position once
POSITION SETTING set remains also during power off. When the absolute detector is replaced
or absolute position is lost, perform this setting.

5.4.1
General

Speed

Reference position return


FL rate (PRM 1425)

Time

JOG

ZRN

+Jα

GRID ..........................

ZP α

5.4.2
Operation 1 Move the tool near the reference position using a manual operation.
2 Select the reference position return mode or switch.
3 Press a button for an axis–and–direction–select–signal + or –, and the
machine moves to the next grid, then stops.
(This position is set as the reference position).
After the reference position has been set, select the reference position
return mode(ZRN signal is 1) and turn on an axis–and–direction–
select signal, then the tool returns to the reference position.

255
5. DIGITAL SERVO B–62705EN/03

5.4.3
Associated Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1002 DLZ

#1(DLZ) 0 : Dog is used for reference position return


l 1 : Dogless reference position setting

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRM 1006 ZMI

#5(ZMI) 0 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is +.


1 : Reference position return and backlash initial direction is –.
After ZRN signal becomes 1, manual feed direction is always the
direction set by this parameter irrespective of an axis selection signal.

256
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

This chapter outlines the serial interface and analog interface spindle
amplifiers and explains related parameters.

6.1 AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . 258


6.1.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.1.2 Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
6.1.3 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters . . . . . . . 267
6.2 AC SPINDLE (ANALOG INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . 268
6.2.1 Outline of Spindle Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

The following drawing number is indicated on the upper part of the


spindle unit of the serial interface spindle amplifier:

257
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03

6.1
AC SPINDLE
(SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.1.1
Outline of Spindle
Control
S instruction M instruction
NC PMC
M03,M04,M05,M19

FIN

*SSTP(Spindle stop)

Motor speed SOVx( Spindle override)

SF,GR10,GR20,GR30
(For machining center)
GR1,GR2 (For lathe)

S SOR( Orientation)
(PRM 3735 to 3752)
0

1 R01O to R12O
Orientation speed
(PRM 3705#1, 3732, R01I to R12I
3706#5) 0 1
SIND
Output polarity
(PRM 3706#7,6) SGN(0=+,1=–)
0 1
SSIN

*ESP,MRDY,
SFR,SRV,ORCM
etc.
SST, SDT, SAR, LDT1,
LDT2
ORAR, ALM etc.
Interface
function

Optical cable
Serial spindle
amplifier Interface
function
Spindle
Operator’s motor
panel PC
Load meter
LM

Speed meter
SM Spindle

258
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.1.1.1
Method A of Gear Output Motor speed

Change for Machining


Max
Center 4095
Gear 2 PRM 3736
Gear 3
Gear 1

PRM 3735
0
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 S code

6.1.1.2
Method B of Gear Output Motor speed
Change for Machining 4095 Max
Center(PRM 3705#2=1) PRM 3736

Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3

0 PRM 3735
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743

6.1.1.3
For Lathe Output Motor speed

4095 Max
Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3

Gear 4

0 S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744

259
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03

6.1.2
Spindle Setting and
Tuning Screen

6.1.2.1
Display method (1) Confirm the parameters

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3111 SPS

Bit1 (SPS) 0 : The spindle tuning screen is not displayed.


l 1 : The spindle tuning screen is displayed.
(2) Press the SYSTEM
key to select the screen for setting parameters and other
data.
(3) Press the continuous menu key .
(4) Press the soft key [SP.PRM]. Then, the spindle setting and tuning
screen appears.
(5) The following screens are provided. These screens can be selected
using soft keys.
1) [SP.SET] : Spindle setting screen
2) [SP.TUN] : Spindle tuning screen
3) [SP.MON] : Spindle monitor screen

6.1.2.2
Spindle setting screen SPINDLE SETTING
(1)GEAR SELECT : 1
(2)SPINDLE : S11

(PARAMETER)
(3)GEAR RATIO 50
(4)MAX SPINDLE SPEED 3000
(5)MAX MOTOR SPEED 6000
(6)MAX C AXIS SPEED 100

D Gear selection The gear select status on the machine side is displayed.
Indication CTH1 CTH2
1 0 0
2 0 1
3 1 0
4 1 1

D Spindle Select a spindle for which data is to be set.


S11: Main spindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S12: Subspindle amplifier for the 1st spindle
S21: Main spindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle
S22: Subspindle amplifier for the 2nd spindle

260
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

D Parameters
S11:1st Main S12:1st Sub S21:2nd Main S22:2nd Sub
Gear ratio(HIGH) 4056 4056
4216 4216
Gear ratio(MIDIUM HIGH) 4057 4057
Gear ratio(MIDIUM LOW) 4058 4058
4217 4217
Gear ratio(LOW) 4059 4059
Max. spindle speed
(gear1) 3741 3741

Max. spindle speed


(gear2) 3742 3742

Max. spindle speed


(gear3) 3743 3743

Max. spindle speed


(gear4) 3744 3744

Max. motor speed 4020 4196 4020 4196


Max. C axis speed 4021 None 4021 None

6.1.2.3
Spindle tuning screen SPINDLE TUNING

OPERATION : SPEED CONTROL


GEAR SELECT : 1
SPINDLE : S11
(PARAMETER) (MONITOR)
PROP.GAIN 20 MOTOR SPEED 100
INT.GAIN 50 SPINDLE SPEED 150
LOOP GAIN 3000 POS ERR S1 100
MOTOR VOLT 30 POS ERR S2 103
TIME CONST 100 SYN.ERR 3
REF. SHIFT 2046

D Operation mode 1 : Normal operation


2 : Orientation
3 : Synchronization control
4 : Rigid tapping
5 : Cs contour control
6 : Spindle positioning control

261
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03

D Displayed parameters The displayed parameters vary depending on the operation mode.
Spindle positioning Normal Synchronization Cs contour
control operation Orientation control Rigid tapping control
Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain Proportional gain
Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain Integral gain
Loop gain Motor voltage Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain Loop gain
Motor voltage Regenerative power Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage Motor voltage
ZRN gain (%) ORAR gain (%) Acceleration/deceleration ZRN gain ZRN gain (%)
Shift reference position Shift spindle stop position constant (%) Shift reference position Shift reference position
Shift reference position Shift reference position

Note) For the parameter numbers corresponding to the displayed


parameter items, see Section 6.4.5.

D Displayed monitoring The displayed monitoring items vary depending on the operation mode.
items
Spindle positioning Normal Synchronization Cs contour
control operation Orientation control Rigid tapping control
Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed Motor speed
Feedrate Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed
Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1 Position deviation S1
Position deviation S2 Position deviation Z
Synchronous deviation Synchronous deviation

Note 1)
|Spindle data|
Motor speed [rpm] + Max. Motor speed.(* 1)
16383
(*1) Parameter 4020: Main spindle Parameter 4196: Subspindle

Note 2) The spindle speed in Cs contour control mode is in degrees/min.

262
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.1.2.4
Spindle monitor screen SPINDLE MONITOR SCREEN
ALARM : AL–27(POSITION CODER DIS.)
OPERATION : Cs AXIS OONTROL
SPINDLE SPEED : 100 DEG/MIN
MOTOR SPEED : 150 RPM
0 50 100 150 200
LOAD METER (%)
JJJJJ
CONTROL INPUT : ORCM MRDY *ESP
CONTROL OUTPUT : SST SDT ORAR

D Spindle alarm 1: Motor overheated


2: Speed deviation excessive
3: Fuse blow of DC link
4: Fuse blow of AC inputline
5: Fuse blow of DC voltage
7: Excessive speed
9: Heat sink overheat
10: Low voltage of AC input
11: Excess voltage in DC link
12: Excess current in DC link
13: CPU internal data memory error
18: ROM SUM check error
19: U phase current offset excessive
20: V phase current offset excessive
24: Serial data transmission abnormal
25: Serial data transmission stop
26: Cs axis speed detecting signal failure
27: Position coder signal disconnection
28: Cs pos.detect signal disconnection
29: Short time overload
30: Input circuit excess current
31: Speed detecting signal disconnection
32: SLC LSI internal RAM abnormal
33: DC link charging insufficient
34: Parameter abnormal setting
35: Gear ratio data excessive
36: Error counter overflow
37: Speed detecting unit error setting
38: Magnetic sensor signal abnormal
39: Alarm of one revolution signal for Cs axis control is detected
40: Alarm of one revolution signal for Cs axis control is not detected
41: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal
42: Undetection of the position coder one revolution signal
46: Erroneous detection of the position coder one revolution signal on
threading
47: Abnormal position coder signal
48: Erroneous detection of position coder one revolution signal

263
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03

D Operation Following 6 modes are available:


a. Normal operation
b. Orientation
c. Synchronous operation
d. Rigid tapping
e. Cs contour cotrol
f. Spindle positioning control
D Load meter The load meter displays spindle load in a unit of 10%.
1) Load meter[%] + Load meter data Max.output value
3276
of load meter (*)

(*) PRM 4127: Main


PRM 4274: Sub.

D Control input signal Max.10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:

TLML : Torque limit command (low) SPSL : Spindle selection signal


TLMH : Torque limit command (high) MCFN : Power line switching
CTH1 : Gear signal 1 SOCN : Soft start/stop cancel
CTH2 : Gear signal 2 RSL : Output switching request
SRV : Spindle reverse rotation RCH : Power line state confirm
SFR : Spindle forward rotation INDX : Orientation stop pos.
ORCM : Spindle orientation change
MEDY : Machine ready ROTA : Rotation direction of
ARST : Alarm reset signal ORCM
*ESP : Emergency stop NRRO : Shor–cut of ORCM
INTG : Speed integral control
signal
DEFM : Referencial mode
command

D Control output signals Max. 10 signals those are ON are displayed from the following signals:

ALM : Alarm signal TML5 : Torque limitation


SST : Speed zero signal ORAR : Orientation end signal
SDT : Speed detecting signal CHP : Power line switched signal
SAR : Speed arrival signal CFIN : Spindle switch complete
LDT1 : Load detecting signal 1 RCHP : Output switch signal
LDT2 : Load detecting signal 2 RCFN : Output switch complete
signal

264
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.1.2.5
Correspondence
between operation mode
and parameters on
spindle tuning screen

D Normal operation mode


S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4040 4206 4040 4206
Proportional gain (LOW) 4041 4207 4041 4207
Integral gain(HIGH) 4048 4048
4212 4212
Integral gain(LOW) 4049 4049
Motor voltage 4083 4236 4083 4236
Regenerative power 4080 4231 4080 4231

D Orientation mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4042 4208 4042 4208
Proportional gain (LOW) 4043 4209 4043 4209
Integral gain(HIGH) 4050 4050
4213 4213
Integral gain(LOW) 4051 4051
Loop gain (HIGH) 4060 4060
4218 4218
Loop gain (MID, HIGH) 4061 4061
Loop gain (MID, LOW) 4062 4062
4219 4219
Loop gain (LOW) 4063 4063
Motor voltage 4084 4237 4084 4237
Gain change upon completion 4064 4220 4064 4220
of orientation
Stop position shift 4077 4228 4077 4228
PC–type orientation stop posi- 4031 4204 4031 4204
tion

D Synchronization control
mode S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210
Proportional gain(LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
Integral gain(HIGH) 4052 4052
4214 4214
Integral gain(LOW) 4053 4053
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065 4221 4065 4221
Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) 4066 4066
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222
Position loop gain(LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
Acc./Dec. time constant 4032 4032
Shift amount 4034 4034

265
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03

D Rigid tapping mode Numerals are parameter numbers :


S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210
Proportional gain(LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
Integral gain(HIGH) 4052 4052
4214 4214
Integral gain(LOW) 4053 4053
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065 4221 4065 4221
Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) 4066 4066
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4067 4222 4067 4222
Position loop gain(LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Grid shift amount 4073 4223 4073 4223

D Spindle contouring Numerals are parameter numbers :


control mode
S11: S12: S21: S22:
(Cs axis control)
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4046 4046
Proportional gain (LOW) 4047 4047
Integral gain(HIGH) 4054 4054
Integral gain(LOW) 4055 4055
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4069 4069
Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) 4070 4070
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4071 4071
Position loop gain(LOW) 4072 4072
Motor voltage 4086 4086
ZRN gain % 4092 4092
Reference position shift 4135 4135

D Spindle positioning
control mode S11: S12: S21: S22:
1st Main 1st Sub 2nd Main 2nd Sub
Proportional gain(HIGH) 4044 4210 4044 4210
Proportional gain (LOW) 4045 4211 4045 4211
Integral gain(HIGH) 4052 4052
4214 4214
Integral gain(LOW) 4053 4053
Position loop gain(HIGH) 4065 4065
4221 4221
Position loop gain(MID,HIGH) 4066 4066
Position loop gain(MID,LOW) 4067 4067
4222 4222
Position loop gain(LOW) 4068 4068
Motor voltage 4085 4238 4085 4238
ZRN gain % 4091 4239 4091 4239
Reference position shift 4073 4223 4073 4223

266
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.1.3 The standard parameters related to each motor model can be set
Automatic Setting of automatically.
Standard Parameters D The specifications for controlling a motor depend on the specifications
defined by the machine tool builder. The parameters defined by the
machine tool builder are set as the standard values (initial values) by
this automatic setting function.
Therefore, when performing automatic operation, always set
parameters properly according to the parameter list (parameters
4000 and later).
1. Turn on the power in the emergency stop state.
2. Set bit 7 of parameter 4019 to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4019 LDSP

Bit 7 (LDSP) The parameters for the serial interface spindle are:
0 : Not set automatically.
l 1 : Set automatically.

3. Set a motor model code.


4133 Motor model code

Code Motor mode Amplifier


100 a 0.5 (3000/8000min–1) SPM–2.2
101 a1 (3000/8000min–1) SPM–2.2
102 a 1.5 (1500/8000min–1) SPM–5.5
103 a 2 (1500/8000min–1) SPM–5.5
104 a 2/1500 (3000/1500min–1) SPM–5.5
105 a 3 (1500/8000min–1) SPM–5.5
106 a6 (1500/8000min–1) SPM–11
107 a 8 (1500/6000min–1) SPM–11
108 a 12 (1500/6000min–1) SPM–15
109 a 15 (1500/6000min–1) SPM–22
110 a 18 (1500/6000min–1) SPM–22
111 a 22 (1500/6000min–1) SPM–26
112 a P8 (750/6000min–1) SPM–11
113 a P12 (750/6000min–1) SPM–11
114 a P15 (750/6000min–1) SPM–15
115 a P18 (750/6000min–1) SPM–15
116 a P22 (750/6000min–1) SPM–22
117 a P30 (575/4500min–1) SPM–22

4. Turn off the power then back on. Then, the parameters are read.

267
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03

6.2
AC SPINDLE
(ANALOG
INTERFACE)

6.2.1
Outline of Spindle
Control

6.2.1.1
Block diagram
S command M command

PMC
NC M03 to M05, M06, M19
CW/CCW command,
Spindle speed orientation, etc.
conversion
FIN Miscellaneous function end
Motor speed *SSTP
Gear 1 Gear 2 Spindle stop
GR1O, GR2O, GR3O
Gear selection (16M/18M)
GR1, GR2
Gear information (16T/18T)
S

Maximum spindle speed and other


parameters
PRM 3714 to 3743, 3735, 3736,
3751 and 3752 (M series)
PRM 3741 to 3744 (T series)
*ESP, MRDY SAR, LDT
SFR, SRV SST, ORAR
ORCM, TLM SDT, ALM
Position coder interface D/A converter

PRM 3730 (gain)


PRM 3731 (offset)

DV
SVC

RV

Spindle amplifier I/O card or I/O unit

Operator’s panel
Spindle
PC motor Load meter
LM

Speed meter
Spindle SM

268
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.2.1.2
Calculation of S analog
voltage and related
parameters

[M series]
1 Gear change method A (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 0)

SVC Motor speed

Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3


(4095) 10V Max
PRM 3736

PRM 3735
0V
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (RPM)

2 Gear change method B (bit 2 of parameter 3705 = 1)

SVC Motor speed


Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3
(4095) 10V Max
PRM 3736

PRM 3752

PRM 3751

PRM 3735
0V
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 (RPM)

[T series]
Constant surface speed control

SVC Motor speed

Max Gear 1 Gear 2 Gear 3 Gear 4


(4095) 10V

0V
S code
0 PRM 3741 PRM 3742 PRM 3743 PRM 3744 (RPM)

269
6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE) B–62705EN/03

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706 TCW CWM

TCW CWM Sign of output voltage


0 0 Analog voltage (+) with both M03 and M04
0 1 Analog voltage (–) with both M03 and M04
1 0 (+) with M03, (–) with M04
1 1 (–) with M03, (+) with M04

[M series]
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3705 SGB

SGB Spindle speed set when gear change is performed is:


0 : Maximum speed for each gear.
1 : Set by respective parameters. (Parameters 542, 543, 585, 586)

3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

3742 Max. spindle speed of gear 2 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

3743 Max. spindle speed of gear 3 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

3736 Upper limit of the output to the spindle motor

3735 Lower limit of the output to the spindle motor

Spindle speed (upper limitńlower limit)


Setting + 4095
value Max. spindle speed

[T series]
3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

3742 Max. spindle speed of gear 2 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

3743 Max. spindle speed of gear 3 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

3744 Max. spindle speed of gear 4 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

270
B–62705EN/03 6. AC SPINDLE (SERIAL INTERFACE)

6.2.1.3
Tuning S analog voltage (1) For M series, change the upper and lower limits as follows:
S When gear change method A is used: Parameter 3736 = 4095,
(D/A converter) parameter 3735 = 0
S When gear change method B is used: Parameter 3751 = 4095,
parameter 3735 = 0
. For T series, these changes are not required.
(2) Tuning the D/A converter offset
Specify zero as the spindle speed. Then, by using a digital multimeter,
adjust the following parameter so that the voltage at the test pin DA2
on the spindle amplifier printed circuit board is 0 mV.
1 For M series
S0; (Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)

2 For T series (in case of G–code system A)


G97 S0; (Specify the command by MDI in the same manner as for M series.)

3731 Spindle speed (D/A converter) offset compensation value

(3) Tuning the D/A converter gain


Specify the maximum spindle speed of gear 1. Then, by using a digital
multimeter, adjust the following parameter so that the voltage at the
test pin DA2 on the spindle amplifier printed circuit board is 10.0 V.
1 For M series
Sxxxx ; (xxxx is the value set in parameter 3741.)
(Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)

3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

2 For T series (in case of G–code system A)


G97 Sxxxx ; (xxxx is the value set in parameter 3741.)
(Specify the command by MDI operation, then press the cycle start button.)

3741 Max. spindle speed of gear 1 (1 to 9999) [rpm]

. Usually a voltage is output from the D/A converter by only


executing an S command. However, the clockwise rotation
command (M03) may be required on some machines.
(4) If the output voltage is not correct, perform the following calculation,
and change the value of parameter 3730 to adjust the gain of the D/A
converter:
Setting + 10V (Current value of PRM 3730)
value Measured voltage

(5) Execute an S command again and confirm that the output voltage is
correct.
.Restore the original parameter values.

271
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7 TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter describes troubleshooting procedure.

7.1 CORRECTIVE ACTION FOR FAILURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273


7.2 NO MANUAL OPERATION NOR AUTOMATIC
OPERATION CAN BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
7.3 JOG OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
7.4 HANDLE OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION CANNOT BE DONE . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
7.6 CYCLE START LED SIGNAL HAS TURNED OFF . . . . . . . . . . . 291
7.7 NO DISPLAY APPEARS AT POWER–UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
7.8 ALARM 85 TO 87
(READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
7.9 ALARM 90
(REFERENCE POSITION RETURN IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . 300
7.10 ALARM 300
(REQUEST FOR REFERENCE POSITION RETURN) . . . . . . . . . 302
7.11 ALARM 301 TO 305
(ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER IS FAULTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
7.12 ALARM 306 TO 308
(ABSOLUTE PULSE CODER BATTERY IS LOW) . . . . . . . . . . . 304
7.13 ALARM 350
(SERIALA PULSE CODER IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
7.14 ALARM 351 (SERIALA PULSE CODER
COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
7.15 ALARM 400 (OVERLOAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
7.16 ALARM 401 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
7.17 ALARM 404 AND 405 (*DRDY SIGNAL TURNED ON) . . . . . . 310
7.18 ALARM 410
(EXCESSIVE POSITION ERROR AMOUNT DURING STOP) . . 312
7.19 ALRAM 411
(EXECESSIVE POSITION ERROR DURING MOVE) . . . . . . . . . 313
7.20 ALARM 414 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . 315
7.21 ALRAM 416 (DISCONNECTION ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
7.22 ALARM 417 (DIGITAL SERVO SYSTEM IS ABNORMAL) . . . 317
7.23 ALARM 704
(SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION ALARM) . . . 318
7.24 ALARM 749
(SERIAL SPINDLE COMMUNICATION ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . 319
7.25 ALARM 750
(SPINDLE SERIAL LINK CANNOT BE STARTED) . . . . . . . . . . 320
7.26 ALARM 751,761 (SPINDLE ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
7.27 ALARM 700 (OVERHEAT AT CONTROL SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
7.28 ALARM 900 (ROM PARITY ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
7.29 ALARM 910 TO 913 (RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
7.30 ALARM 920 TO 921 (WATCH DOG OR RAM PARITY) . . . . . . . 326
7.31 ALARM 924 (SERVO MODULE MOUNTING ERROR) . . . . . . . 328
7.32 ALARM 930 (CPU ERROR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
7.33 ALARM 950 (PMC SYSTEM ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
7.34 ALARM 970 (NMI ALARM IN PMC CONTROL MODULE) . . . 331
7.35 ALARM 971 (NMI ALARM IN SLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
7.36 ALARM 972 (NMI ALARM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
7.37 ALARM 973 (NMI ALARM BY UNKNOWN CAUSE) . . . . . . . . 334

272
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.1 When a failure occurs, it is important to correctly grasp what kind of


failure occured and take appropriate action, to promptly recover the
CORRECTIVE machine.
ACTION FOR Check for the failure according to the following procedure :
FAILURES
When? With what What failure?
operation?

Grasp the kind of failure



Appropriate action

Recovery

7.1.1
Investigating the (1) When and how many times (frequency of occurrences)
(2) With what operation
Conditions under (3) What failure occurred
which Failure Occurred
1 When did the failure occur?
D Date and time?
D Occurred during operation? (how long was the operation?)
D Occurred when the power was turned on?
D Was there any lightening surge, power failure, or other disturbances
to the power supply?
How many times has it occurred
D Only once?
D Occurred many times ? (How many times per hour, per day, or per
month?)
2 With what operation did it occur ?
D What was the NC mode when the failure occurred?
D Jog mode/memory operation mode /MDI mode /reference position
return mode
If during program operation,
1) Where in the program ?
2) Which program No. and sequence No. ?
3) What program ?
4) Occurred during axial movement ?
5) Occurred during the execution of an M/S/T code ?
6) Failure specific to the program ?
D Does the same operation cause the same failure ?
(Check the repeatability of the failure.)
D Occurred during data input/output ?
<Feed axes and spindles>
D For a failure related to feed axis servo
1) Occurred at both low feedrate and high feedrate ?
2) Ocurred only for a certain axis ?
D For a failure related to spindles
When did the failure occur ? (during power–on, acceleration,
deceleration, or constant rotation)

273
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

3 What failure occurred ?


D Which alarm was displayed on the alarm display screen on the
CRT?
(Check the axis along which an alarm has occurred for alarms 300
to 599.)
D For alarm 350 : Examine diagnostic 202
For alarm 351 : Examine diagnostic 203
For alarm 414 : What does diagnostic display 200,201,204
indicate ?
D For alarm 751 or 761 : Which spindle alarm is indicated ?
(indicated by AL–XX (XX is a number))
D Is the screen correct ?
D If machining dimensions are incorrect
1) How large is the error ?
2) Is the position display on the CRT correct ?
3) Are the offsets correct ?
4 Other information
D Is there noise origin around machine?
If the failure has not occurred frequently, the cause may be external
noise to the power supply or inductive noise on machinery cables.
Operate other machines connected to the same power line and see
if noise come from the relays or compressors.
D Is it taken any countermeasure for noise in machine side?
See Sec. 2.13 “Action against Noise”
D Check the following for the input power supply voltage :
1) Is there variation in the voltage ?
2) Are the voltages different depending on the phase ?
3) Is the standard voltage supplied ?
D How high is the ambient temperature of the control unit?
(0_C to 45_C during operation without PC function, 5_C to 40_C
operation with PC function)
Refer to manual about noise.
D Has excessive vibration been applied to the control unit?
(0.5 G or less during operation)
5 When you contact our service center, specify the following items :
1) Name of the NC unit
2) Name of the machine tool builder and type of machine
3) Software series/version of the NC
4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and motor
(for a failure related to the servo)
5) Specifications of the spindle amplifier and spindle motor
(for a failure related to a spindle)
D See the drawing issued by the machine tool builder for the
locations of the NC unit and servo/spindle amplifiers.
D We use the following specification codes :
Servo /spindle amplifier : A06B–VVVV–HVVV
Servo/spindle motor : A06B–VVVV–BVVV
(V represents a number)

274
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.2
NO MANUAL OPERA-
TION NOR AUTOMAT-
IC OPERATION CAN
BE EXECUTED

Points (1) Execute the following procedure when no manual nor automatic
operation is done
(2) Check whether position display shows correct position
(3) Check CNC status display
(4) Check CNC internal status using diagnostic function

Causes and
Countermeasures
1. Position display (1) Check CNC status display (Refer to Section 1.9 CNC STATUS
(relative, absolute, DISPLAY for detail.)
machine coordinate) (a) Emergency stop status (Emergency stop signal is turned on)
does not change
If status display shows EMG the emergency stop signal is input.
Check the following signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1008 *ESP (T series)

X1012 *ESP (M series)

G0008 *ESP

ESP=0 indicates that emergency stop signal is input.


(b) It is a reset status
When RESET is displayed, any of a reset is functioned. Check the
following signal using the PMC’s diagnostic funciton
(PMCDGN).
1) An input signal from the PMC functions
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS RRW

When RRW is 1, reset & rewing signal is input.


When ERS is 1, external reset signal is input.
2) RESET key on the MDI keyboard functions
When the signals in 1) are 0, RESET key may be functioning.

Check the contact of RESET key using a tester.


When it is abnormal, change the keyboard.
(c) Confirm the status of modes
Operation mode status is displayed on the lower part of CRT as
follows :
If nothing is displayed, mode select signal is not input. Check mode
select signal using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
For details, refer to section 1.9 STATUS DISPLAY.

275
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

(Example of display)
JOG : Manual operation (JOG) mode
HND : Manual handle (MPG) mode
MDI : Manual data input (MDI) mode
MEM : Automatic operation (Memory) mode
EDIT: EDIT (Memory edit) mode
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1
Manual handle (MPG) mode 1 0 0
Manual data input (MDI) mode 0 0 0
Automatic operation (Memory) mode 0 0 1
EDIT (Memory edit) mode 0 1 1

(2) Check diagnostic data 000 to 025 of the CNC Check an item for which
1 is displayed
No. Message Display
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0
001 MOTION :0
002 DWELL :0
a.003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
b.005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1 (Example)
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0
c.013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d.014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0
Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its
detail is shown below.
a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)

DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 In–position width


1) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)

2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and
411.

276
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

b. Interlock or start lock There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
signal is input is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX ITL

#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)


#2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
#3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal"MITn is effective. To 3)
Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) of the PMC.
1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT

*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.


2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 +IT1

*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.


3) Interlock signal per axis and direction ("MITn) is input.
S M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1

G0134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1

S T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1

"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input.


* For the T series,"MITn is valid only for manual operation.

c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0% #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes


1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.
*JV15 . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override
1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%

: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%

: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%

d. NC is in a reset state In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using
the procedure of 1 above.

277
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

2. When machine (1) Machine lock signal (MLK) is input.


coordinate value does
not update on position #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
display G0044 MLK

G0108 MLK4 MLK3 MLK2 MLK1

MLK : All axes machine lock


MLKn : Each axis machine lock
When the signal is 1, the corresponding machine lock signal is input.

278
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.3
JOG OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE

Points (1) Check whether position display is operating.


(2) Check CNC status display.
(3) Check internal status using Diagnostic funciton.
Causes and Remedies
1. Position display (1) Check mode selection status (JOG mode is not selected).
(relative, absolute, When status display shows JOG, it is normal.
machine cooordinate) When status display does not show JOG, mode select signal is not
does not change selected correctly. Confirm the mode select signal using PMC’s
diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manual operation (JOG) mode 1 0 1

(2) Feed axis and direction select signal is not input Check the signal using
PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0100 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1

G0102 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1

Example)
When +X button is pressed on the operator’s panel, signal+J1 turns
to 1.
This signal is effected at its rise. If axis selection signal is input before
JOG mode is selected, axis movement does not occur. Turn the signal
to off, then on.
(3) Check CNC’s diagnostic function 000 to 015. Check the items for
which 1 is displayed at right side.
No. Message Display
000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL :0
001 MOTION :0
002 DWELL :0
a. 003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
b. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK : 1(Example)
006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0
c. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
d. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0
Items with a to d relate with manual and automatic operation and its
detail is shown below.

279
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

a. In–position check is It shows that positioning is not yet completed. Check the contents of the
being done following diagnostic number. (It is 1 in the following condition)
DGN 0300 Position Error >PARAM 1826 In–position width
1) Check the parameters according to the parameter list.
1825 Servo loop gain per axis (Normal : 3000)

2) Servo system may be abnormal. Refer to servo alarm 400, 410, and
411.
b. Interlock or start lock There are a plural interlock signals. Check at first which interlock signal
signal is input is used by the machine tool builder at the parameters shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PARAM 3003 DIT ITX ITL

#0 ITL=0 shows interlock signal *IT is effective. To 1)


#2 ITX=0 shows interlock signal *ITn is effective. To 2)
#3 DIT=0 shows interlock signal"MITn is effective. To 3)
Check state of effective interlock signals using the diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) of the PMC.

1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT

*IT=0 shows that interlock signal is input.


2) Axis interlock signal (*ITn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 +IT1

*ITn=0 shows interlock signal is input.


3) Interlock signal per axis and direction ("MITn) is input
D M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1

G0134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1

D T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1

"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input.


* For the T series,"MITn is valid only for manual operation.

280
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

c. Jog feedrate override is Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN)
0% #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0

G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

When the override is 0% all bits of the above address becomes


1111 . . . . 1111 or 0000 . . . . . 0000.

*JV15 . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override


1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%

: :
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%

: :
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%

d. NC is in a reset state In this case, RESET is also displayed on the status display. Check it using
the procedure of 1 above.

(4) Jog feed rate setting (Parameter) is not correct.


1423 Jog feedrate per axis

(5) Manual feed per revolution is selected ( T series)


This funciton feeds an axis synchronized with spindle rotation and
whether this function is used or not is selected by the following
parameter:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JRV

#4 (JRV) 0 : Jog feed is of feed per minute


1 : Jog feed is of feed per revolution
(a) When parameter JRV is set to 1, feed rate of the axis is calculated
by synchronizing with rotation of the spindle. Therefore, rotate the
spindle.
(b) If the axis does not move even when the spindle is rotated, check
the detector of the spindle (position coder) and the cable between
the position coder and the CNC if it is short–circuited or
ungrounded.

281
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.4
HANDLE OPERATION
(MPG) CANNOT BE
DONE
Points (1) Check another manual operation (JOG) is accepted.
(2) Check CNC status display.

Causes and
Countermeasure

1 JOG operation is not Consult with item 7.2 and 7.3.


acceptable, either

2 When only handle (1) Check CNC status display at lower left corner of the CRT.
operation (MPG) cannot (Refer to 1.9 CNC STATUS DISPLAY for details)
be done When the status display shows HND, mode selection is correct.
If it is not HND, mode select signal is not input correctly. Check the
mode select signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1
↓ ↓ ↓
Manuale handle mode 1 0 0

(2) Manual handle feed axis select signal is not input.


Check the signals using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0018 HS2D HS2C HS2B HS2A HS1D HS1C HS1B HS1A

G0019 HS3D HS3C HS3B HS3A

When axis select switch for manual handle feed is selected on the
machine operator’s panel, if the signals are input as follows, it is
normal.
Selected axis HSnD HSnC HSnB HSnA
no selection 0 0 0 0
1st axis 0 0 0 1
2nd axis 0 0 1 0
3rd axis 0 0 1 1
4th axis 0 1 0 0

NOTE
1 In the above table, n is the number of the manual pulse
generator (MPG) and up to 3 MPGs can be used.
2 A feed axis is selected by 4–bit code of A to D.

282
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

(3) Manual handle feed multiplication is not correct


Check the following signals using PMC’s PCDGN. Also confirm the
following parameters based on the parameter list.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0019 MP2 MP1

↓ ↓
MP2 MP1 Multiplication
0 0 1
1 0 10
0 1 m
1 1 n

7113 Magnification of handle feed m(1 to 127)

7114 Magnification of handle feed n(1 to 1000)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7102 HNGx

#0(HNGx) Direction of MPG and travel of machine


0 : same direction
1 : reverse direction
7110 No. of MPGs used (1 to 3)

(4) Checking manual pulse generator


(a) Incorrect of cable
Check disconnection of cable or short circuit.
(b) Manual pulse generator is faulty
When you rotate the MPG, the following signal is output.
Measure the signal with synchroscope at screw terminal on back of
MPG. If no signal is output, measure +5V voltage.

Back of MPG

Screw terminal HA: A phase signal


HB: B phase signal

+5V 0V HA HB

Rotation in plus Rotation in minus




+5V
HA on off on off
0V
+5V
HB on off on off
0V

1:1
1/4 phase difference 1/4 phase difference

Check on and off ratio and phase difference of HA and HB.

283
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.5
AUTOMATIC
OPERATION
CANNOT BE DONE
Points (1) Check manual operation is possible.
(2) Check the status of cycle start LED on machine operator’s manual.
(3) Check status of CNC.

Causes and Remedies When manual operation is either impossible, perform countermeasure,
based on the previous item ”Jog operation cannot be done”.
Confirm that a correct mode is selected according to the mode select status
of CNC status display. Also, by confirming the automatic operation
status it is possible to identify cycle operation, feed hold and cycle stop
state.

1. When cycle operation is “****” is displayed at status display on CRT.


not started (Cycle start (1) Mode select signal is not correct.
LED does not light)
When the mode select signal is input correctly, following status
display is done.
MDI :Manual data input mode (MDI)
MEM :Memory operation mode
RMT :Remote operation mode
If status display does not show a correct status, check the mode signal
with following diagnosis function of PMC side (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1

DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1 Mode select


– 0 0 0 Manual data input mode
0 0 0 1 Memory operation mode
1 0 0 1 Remote operation mode

(2) Cycle start signal is not input


This signal turns 1 when cycle start button is pressed and turns 0 when
it is released. The cycle start actuates when it changes from 1 to 0.
Check the state of the signal using PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 ST

#2 (ST) : Cycle start signal


(3) Feed hold signal is input
Under normal state, the feed hold signal is 1 when the feed hold button
is not pressed.
Check the state of this signal using the PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN) .
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP

#5 (*SP) : Feed hold signal

284
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

2. When an automatic CNC’s status display shows “STRT” on the CRT.


operation is in progress (1) Check the contents of diagnostic nos. 000 to 015.
(Cycle start LED is lit)
No. Message Display
a. 000 WAITING FOR FIN SIGNAL : 1(Example)
b. 001 MOTION :0
c. 002 DWELL :0
d. 003 IN–POSITION CHECK :0
e. 004 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
f. 005 INTERLOCK / START LOCK :0
g. 006 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL CHECK :0
010 PUNCHING :0
011 READING :0
012 WAITING FOR (UN) CLAMP :0
h. 013 JOG FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 0% :0
i. 014 WAITING FOR RESET, ESP, RRW OFF :0
015 EXTERNAL PROGRAM NUMBER SEARCH : 0
Items with a to i relate with an automatic operation and their details
are as follows :
a. An auxiliary function is An auxiliary function (M/S/T/B) specified in a program is not ended.
being executed (waiting Check according to the following procedure.
for FIN signal) At first, confirm the kind of interface of an auxiliary function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3001 HSIF

#7(HSIF) 0 : M/S/T/B is of normal interface.


1 : M/S/T/B is of high–speed interface.
1) Normal interface
When the auxiliary function finish signal turns from 1 to 0, the
auxiliary function is supposed to be ended and the next block is read
for operation. Confirm the status of this signal using PMC’s
diagnostic function(PMCDGN).

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0004 FIN

#3 (FIN) : Auxiliary function finish signal


2) High–speed interface
The auxiliary function is supposed to be ended when the signals are
in the following state. Confirm it using PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).

285
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

<M series>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0005 BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN

#0(MFIN) : M function finish signal


#2(SFIN) : S function finish signal
#3(TFIN) : T function finish signal
#4(BFIN) : 2nd auxiliary function finish signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0007 BF TF SF MF

#0(MF) : M function strobe signal


#2(SF) : S function strobe signal
#3(TF) : T function strobe signal
#7(BF) : 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal
<T series>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0005 BFIN TFIN SFIN MFIN

#0(MFIN) : M function completion signal


#2(SFIN) : S function completion signal
#3(TFIN) : T function completion signal
#4(BFIN) : Second auxiliary function completion signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0007 BF TF SF MF

#0(MF) : M function strobe signal


#2(SF) : S function strobe signal
#3(TF) : T function strobe signal
#4(BF) : Second auxiliary function strobe signal
<M/T series>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0004 MFIN3 MFIN2

#4(MFIN2) : Second M function completion signal


#5(MFIN3) : Third M function completion signal

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0008 MF3 MF2

#4(MF2) : Second M function strobe signal


#5(MF3) : Third M function strobe signal
* The second and third M functions are enabled only when bit 7 (M3B)
of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1.
Signal End state
Finish signal 0 1
Strobe signal 0 1

286
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

b. Travel command is being CNC is reading an axis command (X,Y,Z,...) in a program and giving the
executed command to the axis.
c. A dwell command is CNC is reading a dwell command (G04) in a program and is executing
being executed the dwell command.
d. In–position check Positioning (G00) to a specified position of a specified axis is not
(confirming positioning) completed.
is being done Whether positioning is completed or not is checked as the servo position
error amount. Check it CNC’s diagnostic function as follows:
DGN no.300 Position Error > PARAM 1826 In–position width
Position error amount almost becomes 0, when positioning of an axis
completes and when the amount becomes within the in–posiiton width,
it is assumed that positioning completes and the next block is exected.
If position error amount does not become within the in–position width,
refer to servo alarm 400, 4n0 and 4n1.
e. Feedrate override is at Actual feedrate is overridden by the override signals to a programmed
0% feedrate. Check the override signals using the PMC’s diagnostic function
(PMCDGN).
<Normal override signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0

*FVn :Feedrate override


<State of override signal>
*FV7@@@@@@@*FV0
11 1 1 1 1 1 1 0%
11 1 1 1 1 1 0 1%
: :
10 0 1 1 0 1 1 100%
: :
00 0 0 0 0 0 1 254%
00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0%

f. Interlock signal or start <T series>


lock signal is input
Start lock signal is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0007 STLK

#1 (STLK) With this signal being 1, start lock signal is input.


<Common to T series and M series>
There are a plural number of interlock functions. Parameters are set by
machine tool builders for which interlock function is used.
Therefore, confirm the following parameters at first:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT ITX ITL

#0 (ITL) 0 : Interlock signal(*IT) is valid.


#2 (ITX) 0 : Interlock signal (*ITn) is valid.
#3 (DIT) 0 : Interlock signal ("MITn) is valid.
Confirm which interlock signal is activated by the PMC’s diagnostic
function (PMCDGN) .

287
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

1) Interlock signal (*IT) is input


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *IT

#0 (*IT) : When this bit is 0, interlock signal is input.


2) Interlock signal per each axis (*ITn) is input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0130 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1

*ITn When the bit is 0, the corresponding axis’s interlock signal is input.
3) Interlock signal per axis and direction(+/– MITn) is input
D M series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0132 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1

G0134 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1

D T series
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X0004 –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1

"MITn=1 shows interlock signal per axis and direction is input.


* For the T series,"MITn is valid only for manual operation.
4) Controlled axis detach function is running. A detached axis is
specified for travelling.
*This function is valid when CNC parameter No.1005#7=1. For
whether this function is running or not, confirm the following signal
using PMC’s diagnostic function (PMCDGN). Check the axis
concerned.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0110 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1

When signal MDTCHn is “1” ,the axis detach function is in valid.


The control axis detach function becomes valid by the following
signal issued from the PMC or a CNC side parameter. Check as in the
following procedure :
1) The control axis detach signal (DTCHn) is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0124 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1

If it is 1, the corresponding axis is detached.


2) The following parameter enables the control axis detach function to
the corresponding axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 RMVx

#7(RMVx)0 : Controlled axis is connected


1 : Controlled axis is detached

288
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

g. CNC is waiting for Actual spindle speed does not arrive at a speed specified in a program.
spindle speed arrival Confirm the signal state using the PMC’s diagnostic function
signal to be input (PMCDGN).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0029 SAR

#4(SAR) : When this signal is 0, spindle speed does not arrive at the specified speed.
This function is valid when PARAM 3708#0=1.

h. Manual feedrate override Normally manual feedrate override function is used for jog feed.
is 0% (dry run) But when DRN(dry run) signal turns on during an auomatic
operation,override values set with these signals become valid to the
following speed set by a parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 DRN

#7(DRN) : Dry run signal is input with this signal being 1.

1410 Dry run rate

The rate when the following override value is 100%.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 +JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
↓ ↓ ↓
G0011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 +JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8

When override value is 0%, all bits of the above address is


[1111 . . . . 1111] or [0000 . . . . 0000].

*JV15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JV0 Override


1111 1111 1111 1111 0.00%
1111 1111 1111 1110 0.01%
:
1101 1000 1110 1111 100.00%
:
0000 0000 0000 0001 655.34%
0000 0000 0000 0000 0.00%

i. NC is in a reset state In this case, the CNC’s status display shows RESET. Refer to item 1.
(2) Only rapid traverse in positioning (G00) does not function Confirm
the following parameter and signals from the PMC.
(a) Setting value of rapid traverse rate
1420 Rapid traverse rate per axis

289
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

(b) Rapid traverse override signals


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0014 ROV2 ROV1

G0096 HROV *HROV6 *HROV5 *HROV4 *HROV3 *HROV2 *HROV1 *HROV0

(HROV–0) (HROV=1)

ROV1 ROV2 Override *HROV6 *HROV0 Override


0 0 100% 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0%
1 1 50% 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1%
0 1 25% : :
1 1 Fo 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 100%

1421 Rapid traverse override F0 rate

(3) Only feed (other than G00) does not function


(a) Maximum feedrate set by parameter is incorrect.
1422 Maximum feedrate

Feedrate is clamped at this upper feedrate.


(b) Feedrate is specified by feed per revolution (mm/rev)
1) Position coder does not rotate
Check the connection between spindle and position coder
The following failure is considered:
D Timing belt is broken
D Key is removed
D Coupling is loose
D Connector of signal cable is loosened
2) Position coder is faulty
(c) Thread cutting does not operate
1) Position coder does not rotate
Check the connection between spindle and position coder
The following failure is considered:
D Timing belt is broken
D Key is removed
D Coupling is loose
D Connector of signal cable is loosened
2) Position coder is faulty
Position coder is connected to the spindle amplifier when serial
interface spindle is used or connected to the CNC when analog
interface spindle is used.
<T series>
Whether A/B phase signals from the position coder are read
correctly, can be judged also by the spindle speed display on the
CRT screen (position screen). (However, it is not displayed
when PARAM 3105#2=0).

290
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.6
CYCLE START LED
SIGNAL HAS
TURNED OFF

Points (1) After cycle operation is started, then stopped, check as follows:
(2) Confirm cycle start LED on machine operator’s panel.
(3) Confirm CNC’s diagnostic function.

Causes and Remedies The reason why cycle start LED signal (STL) has turned off are displayed
on CNC’s diagnostic numbers 020 to 025 as follows:

020 CUT SPEED UP/DOWN 1 0 0 0 1 0 0


021 RESET BUTTON ON 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
022 RESET AND REWIND ON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
023 EMERGENCY STOP ON 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
024 RESET ON 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
025 STOP MOTION OR DWELL 1 1 1 1 1 1 0

a. Emergency stop signal


b. External reset signal
c. Reset button on MDI
d. Reset & rewind signal
e. Servo alarm
f. Feed hold by switching mode
g. Single block stop

Details of signals a to g are as follows:


Confirm the signals concerned using diagnostic function (PMCDGN).

a. Emergency stop is input 1) When I/O card is used :


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1008 *ESP (T series)

X1012 *ESP (M series)

G0008 *ESP

*ESP=0 : Emergency stop signal is input :

b. External reset signal is


input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 ERS

#7(ERS) : When the bit is 1, external reset signal is input.


This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M02 when an M02
is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M02 is executed, this signal is input.

c. Reset button on the MDI An automatic operation is put into a reset status when RESET key on the
is pressed MDI panel is pressed.

291
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

d. Reset & rewind signal is


input #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 RRW

#6(RRW) : When this signal is 1, the reset & rewind signal is input.
This signal is usually used for a confirmation signal of M30 when an M30
is specified in a program as the end of a program.
Therefore, when M30 is executed, this signal is input.
e. Servo alarm has When any servo alarm has generated, cycle operation is put into the reset
generated state and operation stop.

f. Cycle operation is in a The cycle operation becomes feed hold state in the following cases:
feed hold state 1) Modes are switched from an automatic operation mode to a manual
operation mode.
2) Feed hold signal is input.
<Mode select signal>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0043 MD4 MD2 MD1

↓ ↓ ↓

memory edit(EDIT) 0 1 1
Automatic Automatic operation 0 0 1
operation (AUTO)
Manual data input (MDI) 0 0 0
Jog feed (JOG) 1 0 0
Manual Handle/step 1 0 1
operation
o eration
TEACH IN HANDLE 1 1 1
TEACH IN JOG 1 1 0

<Feed hold signal>


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0008 *SP

#5(*SP) : When this signal is 0, the feed hold signal is input.

g. It become single block


stop during automatic #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
operation G0046 SBK

#1(SBK) When this signal is 1, the single block signal is input.

292
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.7
NO DISPLAY
APPEARS AT
POWER–UP

Points Check whether it is a trouble of display or a trouble of the system.

Judgement of the point Check whether the STATUS LED on the main board shows the following
state.

1 2 3 4
STATUS f    (f : on,  : off)

If the status shows the above state, the system is normal.


Therefore, display system may be faulty.
If the status shows other state, a hardware other than the display system
may be troublesome.

Causes and remedies


1. When the display system (1) Confirmation item
is in troulde 1 Is power supplied to the display?
2 Is a video signal connected? Isn’t it disconnected? or braked?
(2) Causes and remedies
1 Power to the display is faulty. (Exchange power supply unit).
2 Cable connection is faulty. (Correct the connection).
3 CRT control circuit on the I/O board is faulty.
(Exchange the I/O board)
4 Display is faulty.
2. When system is in
trouble
1 2 3 4
STATUS f    (f : on,  : off)

When STATUS LED on the main board is other than above, check LEDs
on the main CPU board, identify the trouble and make an appropriate
action. See Subsec. 2.2.1 for LED display.

293
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.8
ALARM 85 TO 87 (START)
(READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE ALARM)
YES
Alarm 85?

NO S Check baud rate


and other I/O
parameters
YES S I/O device is
Alarm 86?
faulty

NO
Is I/O NO
parameter
correct?

YES Set correct parameters

OFF
Is power of I/O ?

ON
Turn on I/O device

Is cable NO
connection right?

YES
Connect the cable

S I/O device is faulty


S I/O interface
module is faulty
Alarm 87

S I/O device is faulty


S I/O interface module
is faulty

Causes (a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.


Check the following setting data and parameters.
(b) External I/O device or host computer is faulty.
(c) I/O board is faulty.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.

Countermeasures (a) Parameters on reader/puncher interface are not correct.


Check the following setting data and parameters:
<Setting>
PUNCH CODE=0 OR 1 (0: EIA,1:ISO)
Select ISO or EIA according to the type of I/O device.
If punch code does not match, alarm 86 will generate.

294
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

<Parameter>
Value of parame-
ter 0020 0 1 2 3
Function
Feed 0101#7 0111#7 0121#7 0131#7
Data input code 0101#3 0111#3 0121#3 0131#3
Stop bit 0101#0 0111#0 0121#0 0131#0
Type of I/O device 102 112 122 132
Baud rate 103 113 123 133
C
Communica-
u ca 0135#3 – – – 0 1
tion method RS–232C RS–422
I/O printed circuit board Option 1 board
Connector
JD5A JD5B JD5C JD6A

NOTE
1 Numbers in the table indicate parameters and bit numbers.
Example) 101#7:bit7 of parameter 101.
2 For data communications by RS–422, refer to parameters
134 and 135.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2
0111
0121
0131

#0(SB2) 0 : No. of stop bits is 1.


1 : No. of stop bits is 2.
#3(ASI) 0 : Data input code is EIA or ISO (automatic recognition)
1 : Data input code is ASCII.
#7(NFD) 0 : Feed is output before and after data in data output (FANUC PPR)
1 : Feed is not output (standard).
0102 Type of I/O device
0112
0122 Value TYPE OF I/O DEVICE
0132 0 RS–232–C (control codes DC1 to DC4 are used)
1 FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2 (bubble cassette)
2 FANUC CASSETTE F1 (Old type FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAP-
TOR)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate,
FANUC FA CARD ADAPTOR
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR,
FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL H,
FANUC Handy File
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR, FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL G,
FANUC SYSTEM P–MODEL H

295
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

0103 Baud rete


0113
0123 Value Baud rate 10 4800
0133 7 600 11 9600
8 1200 12 19200
9 2400

When bit#3 of parameter no. 0135=1 (RS–422 interface), the following


setting is also available.
Value Baud rate
13 38400
14 76800
15 86400

Check the following parameters also, when parameter no.0020 is 3.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0134 CLK NCD SYN PRY

#1(PRY) 0 : No parity bit


1 : With parity bit
#2(SYN) 0 : In protocol B, NC reset/alarm is not informed to the host.
1 : In protocol B, NC reset/alarm is informed to the host by SYN and
NAK code.
#4(NCD) 0 : CD (signal quality detection) of RS–232C interface is checked.
1 : CD (signal quality detection) of RS–232C interface is not checked.
#5(CLK) 0 : Internal clock is used for baud rate clock of RS–422 interface.
1 : External clock is used for baud rate clock of RS–422 interface.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0135 RMS R42 PRA ETX ASC

#0(ASC) 0 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ISO code.
1 : All the communication codes except for NC data is ASCII code.
#1(ETX) 0 : End code of protocol A or extended protocol A is CR of ASCII/ISO.
1 : End code of protocol A or extended protocol A is ETX of ASCII/ISO.
#2(PRA) 0 : Communication protocol is protocol A
1 : Communication protocol is protocol B
#3(R42) 0 : Interface is of RS–232C.
1 : Interface is of RS–422.
#7(RMS) In protocol A, status of remote / tape operation of SAT command is
0 : Always transmitted by 0.
1 : Transmitted by the contents of remote / tape switching request issued
by SET command from the CNC.

296
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

(b) External I/O device or Host computer is in trouble


(i) Check whether the setting on communication of external I/O
device or host computer is the same as that of the CNC. (baud
rate, stop bits,etc.) If they are not the same, change the setting.
(ii) When spare I/O device presents, check whether it is possible to
realize communication using the spare I/O device.
(c) I/O printed circuit board or option 1 board is faulty
(i) When parameter no.0020 is 0 or 1 or 2 (JD5A, JD5B of I/O
printed circuit board) Because I/O printed circuit board may be
faulty, replace it.
(ii) When parameter no. 0020 is 3 (JD5C, JD6A of option 1 board)
Because option 1 board may be faulty, replace it.
(d) Cable between NC and I/O device is faulty.
Check the cable for disconnection or wrong connection.
<Connection>

I/O printed circuit


board R232C(JD5A)
Punch panel

R232C(JD5B)
Tape reader

Option 1 board
R232C(JD5C)
Host computer

R232C(JD6A)
Host computer

297
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

< Cable connection>

RS232C (JD5A)
Punch panel
RS232C (JD5B)

RD (01) (03) RD
0V (02)
DR (03) (06) DR
0V (04)
CS (05) (05) CS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (02) SD
0V (12)
ER (13) (20) ER
0V (14)
RS (15) (04) RS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G G Connector :DBM–25S
Connector : Half–pitch 20–pins

RS232C (JD5C) Host computer

RD (01) (02) SD
0V (02)
DR (03) (20) ER
0V (04)
CS (05) (04) RS
0V (06)
CD (07) (08) CD
0V (08)
(09)
+24V (10)
SD (11) (03) RD
0V (12)
ER (13) (06) DR
0V (14)
RS (15) (05) CS
0V (16) (07) SG
(17)
(18)
+24V (19) (25) +24V
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G Connector D–SUB 25 pins
Connector : Half–pitch 20–pins

298
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

NOTE
1 When CS is not used, connect it to RS.
2 For protocol A or extended protocol A: When DR is not used,
connect it to ER. Always connect CD to ER.

RS422(JD6A) Host computer

RD (01) (04) RD
*RD (02) (22) *RD
RT (03) (17) TT
*RT (04) (35) *TT
CS (05) (07) RS
*CS (06) (25) *RS
DM (07) (12) TR
Note) *DM (09) (30) *TR
0V (08) (19) SG
(+24V) (10)
SD (11) (06) RD
*SD (12) (24) *RD
TT (13) (08) RT
*TT (14) (26) *RT
RS (15) (09) CS
*RS (16) (27) *CS
TR (17) (11) DM
*TR (18) (29) *DM
(+24V) (19)
(20) (01) FG
Shield
G
Connector : Half–pitch 20 pins (PCR) Connector : D–SUB 25 pins

NOTE
Always use a twisted pair cable.

299
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.9
ALARM 90
(REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN
IS ABNORMAL)

Contents Reference position return was executed when the following condition is
not satisfied:
The CNC received one rotation signal at least one time when the axis is
moving to the reference position at a speed higher than a speed equivalent
to 128 pulses of position error amount(DGN300).

Countermeasures
(START)

Position error
Check whether position gain is greater than 128 pulses amount : 300
(DGN 300) before or during reference position return.

YES
128 or more (1) Next page

NO

Raise the speed


Check feed rate command:
PRM 1420 F : Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
PRM 1424 Manual rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
PRM 1825 G : Servo loop gain (0.01sec–1)
F5000/3
Position error=
Gdetection unit[µm/PLUSE]
Detection unit : Move amount to a command pulse (usually 1µm)
In metric machine, if the no. of digits below decimal point is 4 on the position
display screen, detection unit is 0.1 µm.

Check rapid traverse override signals :


ROV1 G014.0 ROV1 ROV2 Override
ROV2 G014.1
PRM 1421 Fo rate 0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 Fo rate

Check reference position return deceleration signal


*DEC1 to DEC4 : X1013.0 to X1013.3 (M series),
X1009.0 to X1009.3 (T series)
When reference position return is started from deceleration signal 0, feed rate
becomes FL rate.
PRM 1425 FL rate

300
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

(1)

Check whether the motor ratated more than one rota-


tion (one rotation signal is issued ) at faster than 128
pulses of position error amount.

NO Return start position is too close


Rotated ?
S Chagne the return start position.
YES S Move the machine at faster that 128
pulses for more than one rotation to
wards RP.

Check that voltage of pulse coder is higher than 4.75 V.


To measure pulse coder voltage, remove the motor cover and measure on
pulse coder PCB at across + and – or +5V and 0V terminals.

NO
More than 4.75V

YES

Hardware failure Pulse coder power voltage is low

S Pulse coder is faulty


Change pulse coder or motor

NOTE
After the pulse coder or motor is exchanged, reference
position or machine’s standard point may be different from
former one. Please set it correctly.

D Reference A speed more than 128 pulses is required because if speed is lower that
this, one–rotation signal does not function stably, causing improper
position detection.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a speed corresponding to a
positional deviation of 1280 pulses or more is required.
Parameter No. 1836 can be set to 128 or less, as the minimum positional
deviation with which reference position return is possible. (If the
parameter is set to 0, 128 is assumed as the minimum positional deviation.
If bit 0 of parameter No. 2000 is set to 1, a value equal to ten times the
set value is used for checking.)

301
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.10 Absolute position data in the serial pulse coder was lost.
(This alarm will be generated when serial pulse coder is exchanged or
ALARM 300 position feedback signal cable of the serial pulse coder is disconnected).
(REQUEST FOR
REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN)

Remedies Machine position must be memorized using the following method:

D When reference position (1) Execute manual reference position return only for an axis for which
return function is this alarm was generated.When manual reference position return
present cannot be executed because of an another alarm, set parameter 1815#5
to 0 and release the alarm and perform manual operation.
(2) Press RESET key at the end of reference position return to release the
alarm.
D When reference position Execute dogless reference position setting to memorize the reference
return function is not position.
present

D When serial pulse coder Since the reference position is different from the former one, change the
is changed grid shift value (PRM 1850) to correct the position.

Related parameters

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APC x APZx

#4(APZx) Reference position of absolute pulse coder is :


0 : not established
1 : established
#5(APCx) 0 : Position detector is incremental pulse coder.
1 : Position detector is absolute pulse coder.

System configuration

Main board Servo amplifer module


PC Servo motor
Battery 6V
SERVOn
(JSnA) (JSnB)
Feed back signal (JFn) Feedback cable

TB2 Power cable


PWM signal

*Above figure is for built–in absolute pulse coder.

302
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.11 The absolute pulse coder cable, or a module (servo control module, servo
interface module, or servo module) on the main board may be faulty.
ALARM 301 TO 305
(ABSOLUTE PULSE
CODER IS FAULTY)

Countermeasures 1 Agitate the cable connected to the SERVO 1 to 4 or the cable connected
to the ENC 1 to 4 of servomodule. If an alarm is issued, replace the
cable.
2 Replace the module or main board.
When the A16B–2201–0721 is being used as the main board, replace
the servo interface module corresponding to the axis for which an
alarm was issued. When the A16B–2202–0900 and A16B–3200–0020
are being used as the main board, the first/second axis servo interface
circuit is mounted on the main board, and the third/fourth axis servo
interface circuit is mounted on the servo module. Therefore, replace
either the main board or servo module according to the axis for which
an alarm was issued.
See Subsec.2.2.1 for details of the module specifications and
mounting locations.

303
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.12 This alarm is generated when absolute pulse coder battery becomes low.
ALARM 306 TO 308
(ABSOLUTE PULSE
CODER BATTERY IS
LOW)
Remedies 1 Battery for built–in absolute pulse coderReplace the battery
connected to connector CX5X (or CX5Y) of the servo amplifier
module. (Battery specification: A06B–6073–K001)
2 Battery for separate absolute pulse coder
Exchange the battery connected to the connector JF25 on the main
board.

NOTE
1 Change the batteries while power of NC is supplied.
2 Do not change the battery (memory backup battery) for the
control unit.

304
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.13 An error is generated in the control section of the serialα pulse


coder.
ALARM 350 (SERIAL
α PULSE CODER IS
ABNORMAL)

Points 1 Alarm No. 351 has also generated⇒Refer to alarm 351.


2 Only alarm No. 350 has generated⇒Refer to the following Confirm
the details by diagnostic number 0202 and 0204.
D When diagnostic number
0202 shows 1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0202 CMAL SPH

#3(CMAL) Speed count abnormal alarm has generated.


#0(SPH) Soft phase data abnormal alarm has generated.
1 Check the contens using the above diagnostic function if the alarm
generates repeatedly. If diagnostic data is the same, serial α pulse
coder may be faulty.⇒Refer to Note
2 When diagnostic result does not the same, or other abnormality is
detected, an external noise may be generated.
D When diagnostic number
0204 shows 1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0204 LDAL PMAL

#4(LDAL) LED of serial α pulse coder is abnormal


#3(PMAL) Pulses are not issued correctly by abnormality of serial α pulse coder or
feedback cable.
(1) #4(LDAL) : LED in the serial pulse coder is abnormal.
Serialα pulse coder is faulty⇒Refer to Note
(2) #3(PMAL) : Pulses are not issued correctly by abnormality of
feedback cable.
1 Fault of serialα pulse coder ⇒Refer to Note
2 Feedback cable.
(Failure of the cables connecting the pulse coder and servo
amplifier module and those connecting the servo amplifier module
and main board)

NOTE
Reference position and machine’s standard position are
different from the ones before, adjust and set them correctly.

305
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.14 An error is generated in communication with serial α pulse coder.


ALARM 351 (SERIAL
α PULSE CODER
COMMUNICATION IS
ABNORMAL)

Points Check the details by the diagnostic function of the CNC.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0202 DTE CRC STB

#7(DTE) Data error has generated.


#6(CRC) Serial communication error has generated.
#5(STB) Stop bit error has generated.

Causes 1) #7(DTE):Response from serial α pulse coder is absent.


1 Signal cable is disconnected
2 Serial α pulse coder is faulty. å See Note 1.
3 +5V to the serial α pulse coder is lowered.
2) #6(CRC),#5(STB):Serial communication is in faulty
1 Signal cable (between the pulse coder and servo amplifier module
and between the servo amplifier module and main board) is faulty.
2 Serial α pulse coder is faulty å See Note 1.
3 Failure of the servo interface module, servo control module, or
servo module on the main board. å See Note 2.
4 Main board is faulty å See Note 3.

NOTE
1 After the serial pulse coder is changed, reference position
or machine’s standard point is different from the one before
replacement. Therefore reset and adjust it again.
2 Replace the module corresponding to the axis for which an
alarm was issued. The configuration and mounting
locations of the modules vary with the specification of the
main board. For details, see Subsec. 2.2.1.
3 All the data stored in memory is lost when the main board
is changed. Set NC data again, referring to Chapter 3
“INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”.

306
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.15 Amplifier or overheat of motor is detected.


ALARM 400
(OVERLOAD) 400 SERVO ALM :X OVERLOAD
⇐ Example of CRT display.
Axis name is also displayed.

Points Confirm the detail by the diagnostic function of CNC.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 OVL

#7(OVL) 1 OVERLOAD ALARM is displayed.


Check details of alarms by DGN 201.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0201 ALD

1 Overheat of servo motor
0 Overheat of Power supply module

Overheat of servo motor


(START)

NO
Is it hot ?

YES

Overheat of motor
Defective thermostat

(Next page) 1

NOTE
After the motor is changed, reference position or machine’s
reference point is different from the one before replace
ment. Set it again.

307
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

D Overheat of power
supply module
(START)

Check LED status


of power supply
module

NO
[3] ?

YES NO(Not light)


[-] ?

YES Check input power volt-


NO age of power supply
Is amplifier hot
? module

YES NO
Normal ?

YES
S Check whether the ambient
Power supply
temperature has increased.
module is faulty
S Check whether the cutting
conditions are too severe.
S Check whether excessive
load is being imposed on the
machine. Check magnetic circuit
S Check that the motor insula-
tion is normal.

308
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.16 Ready signal (*DRDY) of servo amplifier is not turned on or turned off
during operation.
ALARM 401
(*DRDY SIGNAL
TURNED OFF) (START)

*When alarm 414 is also generated, LED


shows a number. Consult with alarm 414.
Check LED status
of servo amplifier
module

NO(Not lit)
[-] ?

YES Check input power sup-


ply of servo amplifier
module

Check DC Link voltage YES


Servo amp. mod- Normal ?
ule is faulty
NO

NO
100VAC is
normal ?

YES Check power


supply module

S Cable disconnection between servo amp.


module and main board.
S Module failure on main board:
1 Servo control module failure
2 Servo amplifier module failure
3 Servo module failure
S Main CPU board is faulty

NOTE
1 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules
mounted on the main board vary with the specification of the
main board. For details, see Subsec. 2.2.1.
2 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to Chapter 3
“INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”.

309
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.17
ALARM 404 AND 405
(*DRDY SIGNAL
TURNED ON)

D Alarm 404 *DRDY signal is turned on before MCON signal is turned on. Or *DRDY
is not turned off after MCON signal is turned off.
D Causes 1 Servo amplifier module is faulty.
2 Between servo amplifier module and main board is faulty.
3 A module on the main board is faulty:
S Servo interface module failure
S Servo control module failure
S Servo module failure
4 Main board is faulty.

NOTE
1 The configuration and mounting locations of the mounted
modules vary with the specification of the main board. For
details, see Subsec. 2.2.1.
2 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost. Set the NC data again, referring to Chapter
3 “INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”.

Power on sequence (NCàServo amplifier)

=*Power supply unit failure


Power ON
=*Input fuse disconnection

Servo enable =*SVF1 to 4 (Servo off signal)

Position, velocity
=*System alarm (ALM900 to 973)
control ready (*MCON)
=*Servo alarm (ALM400 to 417)
=*Emergency stop (*ESP)

Servo amp. ready =* Servo amp. alarm (1 to 9,b)


(*DRDY) =*Emergency stop signall (*ESP)
=*100VAC Lack of 3–phase input voltage

S Main board Servo amplifier (module)

JSnA JSnB
–10 –10
DV RV RLY MCC
*MCOM

–20 –20
RV DV
*DRDY

310
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

D Alarm 405 (Reference


positin return is
abnormal)

D Causes Main board is faulty.

NOTE
When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost. Set the NC data again, referring to Chapter
3 “INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”.

311
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.18 Position error amount at stop (DGN 300) exceeds a value set by parameter
No. 1829.
ALARM 410
(EXCESSIVE (START)
POSITION ERROR
AMOUNT DURING YES
Is it vertical axis?
STOP)
NO
Check parameters 1825 and 1829 if they are cor- Check servo off signal of
rect (see parameter list attached) each axis. The servo off
function is valid when DGN
G126 bits 0 to 7 is 1.
Servo off funciton is used to
escape overload of an axis
when the axis is mechani-
cally clamped.
NO
Correct ?

YES
Set correct
Note) parameters.
Perform initial setting
of servo parameters YES
“1” ?

NO
Check PMC
NO
Recovered ?

YES
Turn off NC power
Be carefull vertical and remove power
Set digital servo pa- axis does not drop. line of motor then
rameters according turn on power
to parameter list

Check the motor power


Note) Save current CNC pa- interphase voltage at ter-
Measure in DC range
rameters in a floppy disk or minal block TB2 of the
such before performing ini- power supply module.
tial setting for safety.
( No power ) ON
Power
supplied?

YES
S Servo amp. module is faulty.
S Module failure on main board:
1 Servo interface module failure
2 Servo control module failure Motor power line
3 Servo module failure is broken
S Main board or option 2 board is faulty.

NOTE
1 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules
vary with the specification of the main board. For details,
see Subsec. 2.2.1.
2 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to Chapter 3
“INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”.

312
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.19 Position error amount during movement (DGN 300) execeeds a value set
by parameter 1828.
ALARM 411
(EXECESSIVE (START)
POSITION ERROR
DURING MOVE) With a move command,
does this alarm occur af-
ter machine moves ?

YES (Move)
Moves and
1
alarmed?

NO (No move)

Turn off NC power,


remove power line
and turn on power Be careful that vertical axis
does not drop by its weight.

Check the motor


power interphase
voltage at terminal Measure by DC voltage
block TB1 of the ser-
vo amplifier module.

NO (Not output)
Power output ?

YES Confirm each–axis


servo off signal
G126.0 to 3=1
Mechanical load is
excessive
Disconnection of
power line YES
“1” ?

NO
Check PMC su-
quence, release ser- Signal line between main
vo off and check op- CPU board and servo am-
eration again plifier module is discon-
nected

YES
Normal ?

NO

Servo amplifier mod- Cable is faulty


ule is faulty

313
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

Move the machine


at constant low
speed and check
DGN 300.

YES
Value fluctuate ?

NO
S Check whether the cut-
ting conditions are too
Compare the value Note 1)
severe.
obtained by the fol-
lowing formula and S Check whether exces-
DGN 300 sive load is being im-
posed on the machine.
S Check that the motor in-
sulation is normal.

NO
Correct ?

YES S Servo amplifier module failure


S Module failure on main board:
1 Servo interface module failure
2 Servo control module failure
Compare value of 3 Servo module failure
PRM1828 and the S Main board failure
list Note2)

NO
Correct ?

YES

Servo amplifier mod- Correct parameters


ule is faulty

NOTE Feed rate (mmńmin) 1


1 Position error= 60 PRM1825 Detection unit
2 Parameter 1828yPosition error at rapid traverse 1.2
3 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules
vary with the specification of the main board. For details,
see Subsec. 2.2.1.
When the main board is replaced, all the data in memory is
lost. Reset NC data, referring to Chapter 3 “INPUT AND
OUTPUT OF DATA”.

314
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.20
ALARM 414
(DIGITAL SERVO 414 SERVO ALARM:X–AXIS
EXAMPLE OF DISPLAY
AXIS NAME DETECTED
SYSTEM IS DETECTION IS DISPLAYED
SYSTEM ERROR
ABNORMAL)

Points Check details by CNC’s diagnostic fucntion and LED display on the servo
amplifier module and power supply module.
1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

DGN 0201 ALD EXP

DGN 0204 RAM OFS MCC FSA

See Subsec. 1.8.2 for details of each bit.

2 LED display on the servo amplifier module and power supply module
(Front panel)

STATUS

The LED display indicates that the user should


refer to the “FANUC Control Motor α series
Maintenance Manual (B–65165E).”

7 segments

315
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.21 Position detection signal line is disconnected or short–circuited.


ALARM 416
(DISCONNECTION
ALARM)
Point Check the details using the CNC’s diagnostic fucntion.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0200 FBA

DGN 0201 ALD EXP


↓ ↓
FBA only is set to 1. The pulse coder is discon-
nected (software)(Note).
FBA and ALD are set to 1. The built–in serial pulse coder is
disconnected.
FBA, ALD, and EXP are set to 1. The separate position detector
is disconnected (SCALEn).

NOTE
This alarm is related with full–closed system.

Causes 1 Signal cable is disconnected or short–circuitted.


2 Serial pulse coder or position detector is faulty. Refer to Note 1.
3 A module on the main board is faulty:
S Servo interface module failure
S Servo control module failure
S Servo module failure
See Note 2.
4 Main board is faulty. Refer to Note 3.

NOTE
1 After the pulse coder is replaced, reference position or
machine’s standard position is different from former one.
Adjust and set it correctly.
2 The configuration and mounting locations of the modules
vary with the specification of the main board. For details,
see Subsec. 2.2.1.
3 When the main board is replaced, all the data stroed in
memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring to chapter 3
“INPUT AND OUTPUT OF DATA”.

Linearscale
Servo amp.
module
PC

(JFn)
(SERVOn) (JSnB)

(SCALEn)
n is an axis number

316
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.22 Digital servo parameters are abnormal.


(Digital servo parameters are set incorrectly.)
ALARM 417
(DIGITAL SERVO
SYSTEM IS
ABNORMAL)

D Causes
1 Confirm the setting value of the following parameters:
PRM 2020 : Motor format number
PRM 2022 : Motor rotation direction
PRM 2023 : Number of pulses of velocity feedbacks
PRM 2024 : Number of pulses of position feedback
PRM 1023 : Servo axis number
PRM 2084 : Flexible feed gear ratio
PRM 2085 : Flexible feed gear ratio
Confirm the details with diagnosis function of CNC side.
2 Change the setting of this parameter to 0.
PRM 2047 : Observer parameter
3 Perform initial setting of digital servo parameters.
Refer to setcion 5.1 “INITIAL SETTING SERVO PARAMETERS” .
This data indicates the cause of servo alarm No. 417, detected by the NC.
If the alarm is detected by the servo, the PRM bit (bit 4 of DGN No. 0203)
is set to 1.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0280 AXS DIR PLS PLC MOT

#0(MOT) : The motor type specified in parameter No. 2020 falls outside the
predetermined range.
#2(PLC) : The number of velocity feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
parameter No. 2023, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#3(PLS) : The number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution, specified in
parameter No. 2024, is zero or less. The value is invalid.
#4(DIR) : The wrong direction of rotation for the motor is specified in parameter No.
2022 (the value is other than 111 or –111).
#6(AXS) : In parameter No. 1023 (servo axis number), a value that falls outside the
range of 1 to the number of controlled axes is specified. (For example, 4 is
specified instead of 3.) Alternatively, the values specified in the
parameter are not consecutive.

317
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.23 Spindle speed changes abnormally due to load.


ALARM 704
(SPINDLE SPEED
FLUCTUATION
DETECTION ALARM)

Remedies

Check whether spindle speed is constant by view


of the speed meter on CRT.

YES
Constant ?

NO

Is a heavy cutting being per-


formed ? Confirm spindle load
on CRT.

Confirm the following


parameter :
YES
Heavy cutting? PRM 4911
PRM 4912
Reduce cutting condition PRM 4913
NO PRM 4914

Doesn’t the cutting tool worn ?

YES
Worn ?

Replace tool
NO

Spindle servo unit is faulty


Spindle motor is faulty

Remedies PRM 4911 : A ratio of spindle speed at which actual spindle speed is
regarded as arrived at a command spindle speed.

PRM 4912 : Spindle speed fluctuation ratio up to which the spindle


speed fluctuation detection alarm is not issued.

PRM 4913 : Spindle speed fluctuation that is not regarded as the spindle
speed fluctuation alarm.

PRM 4914 : Time when a spindle speed changed to when spindle speed
fluctuation detection is started.

318
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.24 A communication error has ocuured in serial spindle.


ALARM 749
(SERIAL SPINDLE
COMMUNICATION
ERROR)

Causes and Remedies Improper connection between the main board and the serial spindle. The
following reason is considered.
S System control module or memory & spindle module is faulty
S A cable between the main board and spindle amplifier module
disconneted or short–circuited.
S Spindle amplifier module is faulty

NOTE
1 Replacing whether system control module or memory &
spindle module is decided by the specification of main
board. Subsec. 2.2.1.
2 When the system control module is replaced, replace it as
soon as possible (within 30 minutes) .
When the system control module is kept removed, memory
contents of CNC is lost.
3 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the ladder
program stored in memory is lost. See PMC data and set
ladder program again.
4 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the NC
data stored in memory is lost.
See input/output item of data and set NC data again.
5 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, with using
the macro executer, the macro data is also lost. Set macro
data again after replacing.

319
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.25 When the spindle amplifier does not become normal state immediately
after power is turned on in the serial spindle system, this alarm is
ALARM 750 informed.
(SPINDLE SERIAL
LINK CANNOT BE
STARTED)

Points This alarm does not occur once the system becomes ready including the
spindle system .
This alarm occurs during power on sequence before the system becomes
ready.
After the system becomes ready, serial spindle alarm is issued by alarm
749.

Causes
(1) Optical cable is in poor contact or spindle amplifier power is off.
(2) When display of spindle amplifier shows SU–01 or an alarm other than
AL–24 is displayed, power to the NC is turned on.
In this case, this alarm usually occurs when the NC’s power is turned
off while the serial spindle is operating. Turn off the power of serial
spindle once, then turn it on and starts the system.
(3) When the 2nd spindle is at the state of (1) or (2).
When the 2nd spindle is used, parameter is set as follows :
Bit 4 of parameter no.3701 is 1: No. of serial spindles connected is 2.

Details of Alarms Confirm the details of troubles on diagnostic 409.


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DGN 0409 SPE S2E S1E SHE

#0(SHE) 0 : Serial communication module on the CNC side is normal.


1 : Serial communication module was detected to be abnormal on the
CNC side.
#1(S1E) 0 : The serial communication module of the CNC side is normal.
1 : The serial communication module of the CNC side is abnormal.
#2(S2E) 0 : At the start of spindle serial control, the spindle is normal.
1 : At the start of spindle serial control, the spindle is abnormal.
#3(SPE) 0 : In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters satisfies the
starting conditions for spindle amplifier.
1 : In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do not satisfy
the starting conditions for spindle amplifier.

320
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

Remedies Reform the following countermeasures based on the above


configurations:
(1) #0(SHE)1: The serial communication module is detected to be
abnormal. Replace the system control module or memory
and spindle module.
To replace the system control module or memory and
spindle module, see the description of the main printed
circuit board.
(2) #1(SIE)1: When an abnormality is found in the 1st spindle at the start
of serial spindle control, exchange the unit if the following
check items are not concerned.

Check the parameters and connections at the 1st spindle to see whether
the 1st spindle is mechanically and electrically connected.

If the above settings and connections are right, the system control
module memory and spindle module, or the spindle amplifier itself
may be defective.
(3) #2(S2E)1: At the start of spindle serial control, when an abnormality
is found in the 2nd spindle side.

Check the 2nd spindle parameters and connections to see whether the
spindle is mechanically and electronically connected to the spindle.

If the above settings and connections are right, the system control
module memory and spindle module, or the spindle amplifier itself
may be defective.
(4) #3(SPE)1: In spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters does
not satisfy the starting conditions for spindle amplifier.

Confirm the settings of parameters 4000s.
Especially checks the parameters those are changed from the standard
parameters.

NOTE
1 The contents of CNC memory are lost if the system control
module remains removed for a long time. When replacing
the system control module, therefore, complete the
replacement work promptly (within 30 minutes).
2 When the memory and spindle module is replaced, the
ladder programs stored in memory are lost. Reenter the
ladder programs as explained in the section describing
PMC data I/O.
3 When the memory and spindle module is replaced, the NC
data stored in memory may be lost. Reenter the NC data
as explained in the section describing data I/O.
4 If a macro executor is being used, macro data is also lost
when the memory and spindle module is replaced.
Therefore, reenter the macro data after the module is
replaced.

321
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.26 With serial spindle system, an alarm on the spindle unit is informed to the
CNC.
ALARM 751,761 The alarm contents is displayed by AL–xx on the display of spindle amp.
(SPINDLE ALARM) The CNC holds an alarm number display (AL–xx).

D Causes and Remedies Refer to the “FANUC AC SPINDLE SERVO UNIT (Serial Interface)
Maintenance Manual (B–65045E)” for details. Repair the spindle system
as described in the manual.

322
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.27 Because an ambient temperature of the control unit becomes high, a


thermostat mounted on the main board functions and informs an alarm.
ALARM 700
(OVERHEAT AT
CONTROL SIDE)

Remedies
(START)

Check fan on the top of the control unit is oper-


ating when power is on.

NO
Operating

YES

Check temperature around the control unit is Fun motor is faulty


high (more than 45_C)
Replace fan motor

High YES
temperature ?

NO

Thermostat on the main board is Lower temperature around


faulty. the control unit

Replace the main board. (Note)

NOTE
When the main board is replaced, all data stored in memory
is lost. So, set the NC data again as explained in the section
describing data I/O.

323
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.28 ROM parity error occurred.


ALARM 900
(ROM PARITY ERROR)
Causes and Remedies
1. Main board specification: (1) When this alarm occurs before the start of operation.
A16B–2201–0721 ⇒ F–ROM module mounted on the main board is defective.
(2) When this alarm occurs during operation.
⇒ RAM module mounted on the main board is faulty.

SYSTM ALARM D201–04

900 ROM PARITY

CNC ROM : FC0

Names of softwares those are in


MACRO ROM trouble are displayed.
SERVO ROM

2. Main board specification: F–ROM module on the main board or main board is defective.
A16B–2202–0900
SYSTM ALARM DDA1–01

900 ROM PARITY

CNC FLASH ROM BASIC ← F–ROM files those are in trouble


OPTION A1 are displayed.

MACRO FLASH ROM


SERVO FLASH ROM

3. Main board specificaton: Defect in system ROM on the main board, or on the main board itself.
A16B–3200–0030
SYSTEM ALARM DE01–01

900 ROM PARITY

F01
Indicates the
number of the
defective
ROM.

NOTE
1 Confirm the series and versions of control software those
are displayed on upper right of the screen.
2 When F–ROM module is exchanged, exchange it with one
that contains the software equal to or later than the previous
software.
3 When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost.
See data input/output item and reset NC data.
4 See Subsec.2.2.1 for specifications and locations of
modules.

324
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.29 Parity error of RAM module.


ALARM 910 TO 913
(RAM PARITY)

Causes and Remedies (1) RAM module is faulty or data in RAM module is faulty
When this alarm occurs immediately after power is turned on, once
turn off power, then perform memory all clear (see 1.12 list of
operation) .

(2) If parity error is not released by clearing all memory, RAM module
may be faulty. Change RAM module on main board.
* Set all the data again, referring to the data input/ output item.
1 Main board specification : A16B–2201–0721
Replace RAM module on the main board.
See “Data input/output” then set all data again.
2 Main board specification : A16B–2202–0900
Replace the main board when the specifications of memory and
spindle module are A20B–2901–0764, A20B–2901–0765.
Replace the main board or memory and spindle module when the
specifications of memory and spindle module are
A20B–2901–0762, A20B–2901–0763.
3 Main board specification : A16B–3200–0200
When the A20B–2901–0764 or A20B–2901–0765 memory and
spindle module is installed, replace the main board.
When the A20B–2901–0760 or A20B– 2901–0761 memory and
spindle module is installed, replace the main board or memory &
spindle module.

NOTE
1 See Subsec. 2.2.1 for the specifications of module and the
locations.
2 When the main board is replaced, the data stored in
memory is lost.
See data input/output item and reset NC data.
3 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the ladder
program stored in memory is lost. See Input/output item of
PMC data and set ladder program again.
4 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the NC
data stored in memory is lost. See Input/output item of data
and set NC data again.
5 When the memory & spindle module is replaced with using
the macro executer, the macro data is also lost. Set macro
data again after replacing.

(3) Low voltage of memory back up battery


Battery alarm occurs if voltage is 26V or less (3. 0V rating) . When the
memory back up battery voltage is lowered, BAT is displayed at lower
part of the screen. When battery alarm is lit, replace with new lithium
battries as soon as possible.
Refer to Subsec. 2.6.1.

325
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.30 920: Watch dog alarm or RAM parity in servo control circuit
has occurred in the 1st or 2nd axis
ALARM 920 AND 921 921: Above alarm has occurred in the 3rd or 4th axis
(WATCH DOG OR
RAM PARITY)
points
D Watch dog timer alarm The timer used to monitor the operation of CPU is called the watch dog
timer. The CPU resets timer time every time a constant time has passed.
When an error occurs in CPU or peripheral device, timer is not reset but
the alarm is informed.

D RAM parity error RAM parity error was detected in the servo control module.

Causes and Remedies


1. Main board specification: (1) Servo control module is faulty
A16B–2201–0721 The servo control module includes servo RAM, watch dog timer
circuit, etc. Defectiveness of hardware, abnormality or malfunctioning
of detection circuit or the like is considered.
⇒ Change the servo control module.

(2) Servo interface module is faulty


⇒ Change servo interface module.

(3) Main board is faulty


CPU or a circuit is defective or malfunctioning on the main board.
⇒ Change the main board.

NOTE
When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost. Refer to data input/ output item and set NC
data again.

2. Main board specification: (1) Main board is faulty


A16B–2202–0900 and The main board includes RAM for servo of 1st/2nd axis, watch dog
A16B–3200–0020 timer circuit, etc.
Defectiveness of hardware, abnormality on malfunctioning of
defection circuit or the like is considered.
⇒ Change the main board.

NOTE
When the main board is replaced, all the data stored in
memory is lost. Refer to data input/ output item and set NC
data again.

326
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) Servo interface module is faulty


The servo module includes RAM for servo of 3rd /4th axis, watch dog
timer circuit, etc.
Defectivenss of hardware, abnormality or malfunctioning of detection
circuit or the like is considered.
⇒ Change the servo module.

NOTE
See Subsec. 2.2.1 for the each specifications and locations
of modules.

(3) Malfunction by noise


The watch dog timer circuit or CPU may malfunction due to noise
intruded in the control unit.
⇒ A noise to the power supply or an inductive noise to a signal line
may be considered. Check operation of the other machine that is
connected to the same power line, relays and compressers which
may cause noise, then perform measures to supress noises. (See
Sec. 2.13).

327
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.31 The digital servo module is not mounted.


ALARM 924
NOTE
(SERVO MODULE This alarm may not occur during normal operaion.
MOUNTING ERROR) This alarm may be generated when a PCB is changed for
maintenance.

D Causes and remedies (1) Check whether servo control module or servo interface module is
mounted or not, whether it is mounted correctly or not, and whether
it is mounted securely.

(2) If cause 1 is not identified, the control module, servo interface module, servo
module or main board may be faulty.
Replace each module, referring to the alarm 920 and 921 in the previous
sections.

328
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.32 930: CPU error (abnormal interrupt) has generated.


ALARM 930
(CPU ERROR)

Causes and Remedies


D Mother board or CPU An interrupt which will not occur during usual operation has generated.
card Peripheral circuit of the CPU may be abnormal. Change the mother CPU
board or CPU card. If operation is performed normally by power off and
on, noise may be a cause. Refer to Sec. 2.13.

329
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.33 An error occurred when RAM test is being executed.


ALARM 950
(PMC SYSTEM
ALARM)

Causes and Remedies The following causes are considered :


S PMC control module is faulty.
S PMC user program is faulty (F– ROM module or memory & spindle
module is faulty. Replacing whether F–ROM module or memory &
spindle module is decided by the specification of main board) .
S RAM module is faulty.
S Main board is faulty.

NOTE
1 when the main board or the RAM module is replaced, all the
data stored in memory is lost. Set NC data again, referring
to the Data input/output item.
2 when replacing F–ROM module, replace it with one that has
software equal to or more than current software version.
3 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the ladder
program stored in memory is lost. See input/output item of
PMC data and set ladder program again.
4 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, the NC
data stored in memory is lost.
See input/output item of data and set NC data again.
5 When the memory & spindle module is replaced, with using
the macro executer, the macro data is also lost. Set macro
data again after replacing.
6 When the main board is replaced, the NC data stored in
memory is lost.
See input/output item of data and set NC data again.
7 See Subsec. 2.2.1 for the specifications and locations of
module.

330
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.34 RAM parity error or NMI has occurred in the PMC control module.
ALARM 970
(NMI ALARM IN PMC
CONTROL MODULE)

Causes and Remedies Following cause is considered.


S PMC control module is faulty.
S PMC user program error (F–ROM module or memory and spindle
module failure)
For information relating to module replacement, see the description of
alarm 950.

331
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.35 A communication error is detected between the CNC and FANUC I/O
unit at SLC in the PMC control module.
ALARM 971
(NMI ALARM IN SLC)
Causes and Remedies Following cause is considered.
S PMC control module is faulty.
Refer to “alarm 950” for changing of PMC control module.
S FANUC I/O unit is faulty.
S +24V power to the FANUC I/O unit is faulty.
Remove connector CP32 of the interface module (AF01A,AF01B)
and measure voltage across 1st and 2nd pins using tester.
(Normally+24VDC+–10%)

Interface module
AF01A/AF01B
1 +24V
CP32 2 GND

3 Unused

Disconnection or broken of cable.

332
B–62705EN/03 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.36 NMI has generated in a board other than the main printed circuit board.
ALARM 972
(NMI ALARM)

Causes and Remedies 1) Any of option boards shown below may be faulty.
S Option 1 board
S Loader control board

SYSTEM ALARM DDF1–02

972 NMI OCUURRED IN OTHER MODULE

SLOT 02
Indicates the slot No.
915 SRAM PARITY : (2N+1) <SUB where an NMI occurred,
and the relevant mes-
sage.

NOTE
When you change Loader control board, you must input
data (parameters, programs, etc.) on sub side.

333
7. TROUBLESHOOTING B–62705EN/03

7.37 An unknown NMI has generated.


ALARM 973
(NMI ALARM BY
UNKNOWN CAUSE)
Causes and Remedies 1) Power supply printed circuit board or main board is faulty

NOTE
When the main CPU board is replaced, all the data in
memory is lost. Set the NC data (parameter, offset and
program etc) again.

2) Option boards may be faulty.


S Option 1 board

NOTE
When you change the Loader control boards board, you
must input data (parameters, programs,etc.) on the sub
side.

334
APPENDIX
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

A  

A.1 LIST OF ALARM CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338


A.2 LIST OF ALARMS (PMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
A.3 LIST OF ALARMS (SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . 361

337
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

A.1
LIST OF ALARM
CODES
(1) Program errors /Alarms on program and operation (P/S alarm)
Number Message Contents
000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER A parameter which requires the power off was input, turn off power.
001 TH PARITY ALARM TH alarm (A character with incorrect parity was input).
Correct the tape.
002 TV PARITY ALARM TV alarm (The number of characters in a block is odd). This alarm will
be generated only when the TV check is effective.
003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the maximum allowable number of digits was input.
(Refer to the item of max. programmable dimensions.)
004 ADDRESS NOT FOUND A numeral or the sign “–” was input without an address at the beginning
of a block. Modify the program .
005 NO DATA AFTER ADDRESS The address was not followed by the appropriate data but was followed
by another address or EOB code. Modify the program.
006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE SIGN Sign “–” input error (Sign “–” was input after an address with which it can-
not be used. Or two or more “–” signs were input.)
Modify the program.
007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT Decimal point “ . ” input error (A decimal point was input after an address
with which it can not be used. Or two decimal points were input.)
Modify the program.
009 ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT Unusable character was input in significant area.
Modify the program.
010 IMPROPER G–CODE An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not pro-
vided is specified. Modify the program.
011 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED Feedrate was not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate was in-
adequate. Modify the program.
CAN NOT COMMAND G95 A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading / syn-
(M series) chronous feed.
014 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND In variable lead threading, the lead incremental and decremental out-
(T series) putted by address K exceed the maximum command value or a com-
mand such that the lead becomes a negative value is given.
Modify the program.
TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED An attempt was made to move the machine along the axes, but the num-
(M series) ber of the axes exceeded the specified number of axes controlled simul-
taneously. Modify the program.
TOO MANY AXES COMMANDED An attempt has been made to move the tool along more than the maxi-
015 (T series) mum number of simultaneously controlled axes. Alternatively, no axis
movement command or an axis movement command for two or more
axes has been specified in the block containing the command for skip
using the torque limit signal (G31 P99/98). The command must be ac-
companied with an axis movement command for a single axis, in the
same block.
020 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS In circular interpolation (G02 or G03), difference of the distance between
the start point and the center of an arc and that between the end point
and the center of the arc exceeded the value specified in parameter No.
3410.
021 ILLEGAL PLANE AXIS An axis not included in the selected plane (by using G17, G18, G19) was
COMMANDED commanded in circular interpolation. Modify the program.
022 NO CIRCLE RADIUS The command for circular interpolation lacks arc radius R or coordinate
I, J, or K of the distance between the start point to the center of the arc.
023 ILLEGAL RADIUS COMMAND In circular interpolation by radius designation, negative value was com-
(T series) manded for address R. Modify the program.
025 CANNOT COMMAND F0 IN F0 (fast feed) was instructed by F1 –digit column feed in circular inter-
G02/G03 (M series) polation. Modify the program.

338
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Number Message Contents


027 NO AXES COMMANDED IN No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset type
G43/G44 (M series) C.
Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length offset
type C. Modify the program.
028 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT In the plane selection command, two or more axes in the same direction
are commanded.
Modify the program.
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by H code is too large.
(M series) Modify the program.
029
ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE The offset values specified by T code is too large.
(T series) Modify the program.
ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number specified by D/H code for tool length offset or cutter
(M series) compensation is too large. Modify the program.
030
ILLEGAL OFFSET NUMBER The offset number in T function specified for tool offset is tool large.
(T series) Modify the program.
031 ILLEGAL P COMMAND IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10, the offset number following address
P was excessive or it was not specified.
Modify the program.
032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset amount by sys-
tem variables, the offset amount was excessive.
NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be determined for cutter compensation.
(M series) Modify the program.
033
NO SOLUTION AT CRC A point of intersection cannot be determined for tool nose radius com-
(T series) pensation. Modify the program.
NO CIRC ALLOWED IN ST–UP The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03
/EXT BLK (M series) mode in cutter compensation C. Modify the program.
034
NO CIRC ALLOWED IN ST–UP The start up or cancel was going to be performed in the G02 or G03
/EXT BLK (T series) mode in tool nose radius compensation. Modify the program.
CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Skip cutting (G31) was specified in tool nose radius compensation
035
(T series) mode. Modify the program.
036 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 Skip cutting (G31) was specified in cutter compensation mode.
(M series) Modify the program.
CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN CRC G40 is commanded on the plane other than offset plane in cutter com-
(M seires) pensation B. The plane selected by using G17, G18 or G19 is changed
037 in cutter compensation C mode. Modify the program.
CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN NRC The offset plane is switched in tool nose radius compensation.
(T seires) Modify the program.
INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C because the arc start
BLOCK (M seires) point or end point coincides with the arc center.
Modify the program.
038
INTERFERENCE IN CIRCULAR Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation because the arc
BLOCK (T series) start point or end point coincides with the arc center.
Modify the program.
039 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN NRC Chamfering or corner R was specified with a start–up, a cancel, or
(T series) switching between G41 and G42 in tool nose radius compensation. The
program may cause overcutting to occur in chamfering or corner R.
Modify the program.
040 INTERFERENCE IN G90/G94 Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation in canned cycle
BLOCK (T series) G90 or G94. Modify the program.
INTERFERENCE IN CRC Overcutting will occur in cutter compensation C. Two or more blocks are
(M seires) consecutively specified in which functions such as the auxiliary function
and dwell functions are performed without movement in the cutter com-
041 pensation mode. Modify the program.
INTERFERENCE IN NRC Overcutting will occur in tool nose radius compensation.
(T seires) Modify the program.

339
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

Number Message Contents


042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in cutter compensation. Modify
(M series) the program.
044 G27–G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode.
CYC (M series) Modify the program.
046 ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN Other than P2, P3 and P4 are commanded for 2nd, 3rd and 4th refer-
COMMAND ence position return command.
050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Optional chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting
BLK (M series) block.
Modify the program.
CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting block.
BLK(T series) Modify the program.
051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block
(M series) next to the optional chamfering or corner R block.
Modify the program.
MISSING MOVE AFTER CHF/CNR Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the block
(T series) next to the chamfering or corner R block.
Modify the program.
CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01,G02 or
CHF/CNR (M series) G03.
052 Modify the program.
CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01.
CHF/CNR (T series) Modify the program.
TOO MANY ADDRESS For systems without the arbitary angle chamfering or corner R cutting,
COMMANDS (M series) a comma was specified. For systems with this feature, a comma was fol-
lowed by something other than R or C Correct the program.
053
TOO MANY ADDRESS In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I, K and R
COMMANDS (T seires) are specified. Otherwise, the character after a comma “,” is not C or R
in direct drawing dimensions programming. Modify the program.
NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the corner R was
054
CHF/CNR (T series) specified includes a taper command. Modify the program.
MISSING MOVE VALUE IN In the arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R block, the move distance
CHF/CNR (M series) is less than chamfer or corner R amount.
055
MISSING MOVE VALUE IN In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less than chamfer
CHF/CNR (T series) or corner R amount.
056 NO END POINT & ANGLE IN Neither the end point nor angle is specified in the command for the block
CHF/CNR (T series) next to that for which only the angle is specified (A). In the chamfering
comman, I(K) is commanded for the X(Z) axis.
057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension drawing
(T series) programming.
END POINT NOT FOUND In a arbitrary angle chamfering or corner R cutting block, a specified axis
(M series) is not in the selected plane. Correct the program.
058
END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing programming.
(T series)
059 PROGRAM NUMBER NOT FOUND In an external program number search, a specified program number
was not found. Otherwise, a program specified for searching is being
edited in background processing. Check the program number and ex-
ternal signal. Or discontinue the background eiting.
060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND Commanded sequence number was not found in the sequence number
search. Check the sequence number.
061 ADDRESS P/Q NOT FOUND IN Address P or Q is not specified in G70, G71, G72, or G73 command.
G70–G73 (T series) Modify the program.

340
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Number Message Contents


062 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G71–G76 1. The depth of cut in G71 or G72 is zero or negative value.
(T series) 2. The repetitive count in G73 is zero or negative value.
3. the negative value is specified to ∆i or ∆k is zero in G74 or G75.
4. A value other than zero is specified to address U or W though ∆i or
∆k is zero in G74 or G75.
5. A negative value is specified to ∆d, thoughthe relief direction in G74
or G75 is determined.
6. Zero or a negative value is specified to the height of thread or depth
of cut of first time in G76.
7. The specified minimum depth of cut in G76 is greater than the height
of thread.
8. An unusable angle of tool tip is specified in G76.
Modify the program.
063 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT FOUND The sequence number specified by address P in G70, G71, G72, or G73
(T series) command cannot be searched. Modify the program.
064 SHAPE PROGRAM NOT A target shape which cannot be made by monotonic machining was
MONOTONOUSLY (T series) specified in a repetitive canned cycle (G71 or G72).
065 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN G71–G73 1. G00 or G01 is not commanded at the block with the sequence num-
(T series) ber which is specified by address P in G71, G72, or G73 command.
2. Address Z(W) or X(U) was commanded in the block with a sequence
number which is specified by address P in G71 or G72, respectively.
Modify the program.
066 IMPROPER G–CODE IN G71–G73 An unallowable G code was commanded beween two blocks specified
(T series) by address P in G71, G72, or G73. Modify the program.
067 CAN NOT ERROR IN MDI MODE G70, G71, G72, or G73 command with address P and Q.
(T series) Modify the program.
069 FORMAT ERROR IN G70–G73 The final move command in the blocks specified by P and Q of G70,
(T series) G71, G72, and G73 ended with chamfering or corner R.
Modify the program.
070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN The memory area is insufficient.
MEMORY Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
071 DATA NOT FOUND The address to be searched was not found. Or the program with speci-
fied program number was not found in program number search.
Check the data.
072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 63 (basic), 125 (option),
200 (option), 400 (option) or 1000 (option). Delete unnecessary pro-
grams and execute program registeration again.
073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary programs and
execute program registeration again.
074 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER The program number is other than 1 to 9999.
Modify the program number.
075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number was pro-
tected.
076 ADDRESS P NOT DEFINED Address P (program number) was not commanded in the block which
includes an M98, G65, or G66 command. Modify the program.
077 SUB PROGRAM NESTING ERROR The subprogram was called in five folds. Modify the program.
078 NUMBER NOT FOUND A program number or a sequence number which was specified by ad-
dress P in the block which includes an M98, M99, M65 or G66 was not
found. The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement was not
found. Otherwise, a called program is being edited in background pro-
cessing. Correct the program, or discontinue the background editing.
079 PROGRAM VERIFY ERROR In memory or program collation,a program in memory does not agree
with that read from an external I/O device. Check both the programs in
memory and those from the external device.

341
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

Number Message Contents


G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT In the automatic tool length measurement function (G37), the measure-
ASSERTED ment position reach signal (XAE, YAE, or ZAE) is not turned on within
(M series) an area specified in parameter 6254 6255 (value ε).
This is due to a setting or operator error.
080
G37 ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT In the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37), the measure-
ASSERTED ment position reach signal (XAE or ZAE) is not turned on within an area
(T series) specified in parameter 6254 (value ε).
This is due to a setting or operator error.
OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN Tool length automatic measurement (G37) was specified without a H
G37 code. (Automatic tool length measurement function) Modify the pro-
081 (M series) gram.
OFFSET NUMBER NOT FOUND IN Automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) was specified without a T
G37 (T series) code. (Automatic tool compensation function) Modify the program.
H–CODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 H code and automatic tool compensation (G37) were specified in the
(M series) same block. (Automatic tool length measurement function) Modify the
program.
082
T–CODE NOT ALLOWED IN G37 T code and automatic tool compensation (G36, G37) were specified in
(T series) the same block. (Automatic tool compensation function)
Modify the program.
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 In automatic tool length measurement, an invalid axis was specified or
(M series) the command is incremental. Modify the program.
083
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IN G37 In automatic tool compensation (G36, G37), an invalid axis was speci-
(T series) fied or the command is incremental. Modify the program.
085 COMMUNICATION ERROR When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
an overrun, parity or framing error was generated. The number of bits
of input data or setting of baud rate or specification No. of I/O unit is in-
correct.
086 DR SIGNAL OFF When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
the ready signal (DR) of reader / puncher was turned off.
Power supply of I/O unit is off or cable is not connected or a P.C.B. is de-
fective.
087 BUFFER OVERFLOW When entering data in the memory by using Reader / Puncher interface,
though the read terminate command is specified, input is not interrupted
after 10 characters read. I/O unit or P.C.B. is defective.
090 REFERENCE RETURN The reference position return cannot be performed normally because
INCOMPLETE the reference position return start point is too close to the reference posi-
tion or the speed is too slow. Separate the start point far enough from
the reference position, or specify a sufficiently fast speed for reference
position return. Check the program contents.
091 REFERENCE RETURN Manual reference position return cannot be performed when automatic
INCOMPLETE operation is halted.
092 AXES NOT ON THE REFERENCE The commanded axis by G27 (Reference position return check) did not
POINT return to the reference position.
094 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the au-
(COORD CHG) tomatic operation was interrupted, the coordinate system setting opera-
tion was performed.)
Perform the correct operation according to th operator’s manual.
095 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the
(EXT OFS CHG) automatic operation was interrupted, the external workpiece offset
amount changed.)
Perform the correct operation according to th operator’s manual.
096 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted. (After the au-
(WRK OFS CHG) tomatic operation was interrupted, the workpiece offset amount
changed.)
Perform the correct operation according to the operator’s manual.
097 P TYPE NOT ALLOWED P type cannot be directed when the program is restarted. (After power
(AUTO EXEC) ON, after emergency stop or P / S 94 to 97 reset, no automatic operation
is performed.) Perform automatic operation.

342
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Number Message Contents


098 G28 FOUND IN SEQUENCE A command of the program restart was specified without the reference
RETURN position return operation after power ON or emergency stop, and G28
was found during search.
Perform the reference position return.
099 MDI EXEC NOT ALLOWED After completion of search in program restart, a move command is given
AFT. SEARCH with MDI. Move axis before a move command or don’t interrupt MDI op-
eration.
100 PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE On the PARAMETER(SETTING) screen, PWE(parameter writing en-
abled) is set to 1. Set it to 0, then reset the system.
101 PLEASE CLEAR MEMORY The power turned off while rewriting the memory by program edit opera-
tion. If this alarm has occurred, press <RESET> while pressing
<PROG>, and only the program being edited will be deleted.
Register the deleted program.
110 DATA OVERFLOW The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the al-
lowable range. Modify the program.
111 CALCULATED DATA OVERFLOW The result of calculation turns out to be invalid, an alarm No.111 is is-
sued.
–1047 to –10–29, 0, 10–29 to 1047
Modify the program.
112 DIVIDED BY ZERO Division by zero was specified. (including tan 90°)
Modify the program.
113 IMPROPER COMMAND A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded.
Modify the program.
114 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO There is an error in other formats than <Formula>.
Modify the program.
115 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NUMBER A value not defined as a variable number is designated in the custom
macro.
Modify the program.
116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution
is inhibited. Modify the program.
118 PARENTHESIS NESTING ERROR The nesting of bracket exceeds the upper limit (quintuple).
Modify the program.
119 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT The SQRT argument is negative. Or BCD argument is negative, and
other values than 0 to 9 are present on each line of BIN argument.
Modify the program.
122 FOUR FOLD MACRO The macro modal call is specified four fold.
MODAL–CALL Modify the program.
123 CAN NOT USE MACRO COMMAND Macro control command is used during DNC operation.
IN DNC Modify the program.
124 MISSING END STATEMENT DO–END does not correspond to 1 : 1. Modify the program.
125 FORMAT ERROR IN MACRO <Formula> format is erroneous. Modify the program.
126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER In DOn, 1x n x3 is not established. Modify the program.
127 NC, MACRO STATEMENT IN SAME NC and custom macro commands coexist.
BLOCK Modify the program.
128 ILLEGAL MACRO SEQUENCE The sequence number specified in the branch command was not 0 to
NUMBER 9999. Or, it cannot be searched. Modify the program.
129 ILLEGAL ARGUMENT ADDRESS An address which is not allowed in <Argument Designation > is used.
Modify the program.
130 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION An axis control command was given by PMC to an axis controlled by
CNC. Or an axis control command was given by CNC to an axis con-
trolled by PMC. Modify the program.
131 TOO MANY EXTERNAL ALARM Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message.
MESSAGES Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the cause.
132 ALARM NUMBER NOT FOUND No alarm No. concerned exists in external alarm message clear.
Check the PMC ladder diagram.

343
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

Number Message Contents


133 ILLEGAL DATA IN EXT. ALARM Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or external
MSG operator message. Check the PMC ladder diagram.
ILLEGAL ANGLE COMMAND The index table indexing positioning angle was instructed in other than
(M series) an integral multiple of the value of the minimum angle.
135 Modify the program.
SPINDLE ORIENTATION PLEASE Without any spindle orientation , an attept was made for spindle index-
(T series) ing. Perform spindle orientation.
ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND In index table indexing.Another control axis was instructed together with
(M series) the B axis.
136 Modify the program.
C/H–CODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as
BLK. (T series) spindle indexing addresses C, H. Modify the program.
137 M–CODE & MOVE CMD IN SAME A move command of other axes was specified to the same block as
BLK. M–code related to spindle indexing. Modify the program.
139 CAN NOT CHANGE PMC An axis is selected in commanding by PMC axis control.
CONTROL AXIS Modify the program.
141 CAN NOT COMMAND G51 IN CRC G51 (Scaling ON) is commanded in the tool offset mode.
(M series) Modify the program.
142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE Scaling magnification is commanded in other than 1 to 999999.
(M series) Correct the scaling magnification setting (G51 Pp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
or parameter 5411 or 5421).
143 SCALED MOTION DATA The scaling results, move distance, coordinate value and circular radius
OVERFLOW exceed the maximum command value. Correct the program or scaling
(M series) mangification.
144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or cutter compensation C plane
(M series) must be the same. Modify the program.
145 ILLEGAL CONDITIONS IN POLAR The conditions are incorrect when the polar coordinate interpolation
COORDINATE INTERPOLATION starts or it is canceled.
1) In modes other than G40, G12.1/G13.1 was specified.
2) An error is found in the plane selection. Parameters No. 5460 and
No. 5461 are incorrectly specified.
Modify the value of program or parameter.
146 IMPROPER G CODE G codes which cannot be specified in the polar coordinate interpolation
mode was specified. See section II to 4.4 and modify the program.
148 ILLEGAL SETTING DATA Automatic corner override deceleration rate is out of the settable range
(M series) of judgement angle. Modify the parameters (No.1710 to No.1714)
149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 A code other than Q1,Q2,P1 or P2 was specified as the life count type
(M series) in the extended tool life management.
150 ILLEGAL TOOL GROUP NUMBER Tool Group No. exceeds the maximum allowable value.
Modify the program.
151 TOOL GROUP NUMBER NOT The tool group commanded in the machining program is not set.
FOUND Modify the value of program or parameter.
152 NO SPACE FOR TOOL ENTRY The number of tools within one group exceeds the maximum value re-
gisterable. Modify the number of tools.
153 T–CODE NOT FOUND In tool life data registration, a T code was not specified where one should
be. Correct the program.
154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP When the group is not commanded, H99 or D99 was commanded.
(M series) Correct the program.
155 ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 In the machining program, M06 and T code in the same block do not cor-
(M series) respond to the group in use. Correct the program.
ILLEGAL T–CODE IN M06 Group No.∆∆ which is specified with T∆∆ 88 of the machining program
(T series) do not included in the tool group in use. Correct the program.
156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool
group is set. Correct the program.
157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maximum allowable
value. (See parameter No. 6800 bit 0 and 1) Modify the program.

344
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Number Message Contents


158 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA The tool life to be set is too excessive. Modify the setting value.
159 TOOL DATA SETTING During executing a life data setting program, power was turned off.
INCOMPLETE Set again.
175 ILLEGAL G107 COMMAND Conditions when performing circular interpolation start or cancel not cor-
rect. To change the mode to the cylindrical interpolation mode, specify the
command in a format of “G07.1 rotation to axis name radius of cylinder.”
IMPROPER G–CODE IN G107 Any of the following G codes which cannot be specified in the cylindrical
(T series) interpolation mode was specified.
1) G codes for positioning: G28, G76, G81 to G89, including the
176 codes specifying the rapid traverse cycle
2) G codes for setting a coordinate system: G50, G52
3) G code for selecting coordinate system: G53 G54 to G59
Modify the program.
177 CHECK SUM ERROR Check sum error
(G05 MODE) Modify the program.
178 G05 COMMANDED IN G41/G42 G05 was commanded in the G41/G42 mode.
MODE Correct the program.
179 PARAM. (NO. 7510) SETTING The number of controlled axes set by the parameter 7510 exceeds the
ERROR maximum number. Modify the parameter setting value.
180 COMMUNICATION ERROR Remote buffer connection alarm has generated. Confirm the number of
(REMOTE BUF) cables, parameters and I/O device.
190 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECT In the constant surface speed control, the axis specification is wrong.
(M series) (See parameter No. 3770.) The specified axis command (P) contains an
illegal value.
Correct the program.
194 SPINDLE COMMAND IN A contour control mode, spindle positioning (Cs–axis control) mode, or
SYNCHRO–MODE rigid tapping mode was specified during the serial spindle synchronous
control mode. Correct the program so that the serial spindle synchro-
nous control mode is released in advance.
195 MODE CHANGE ERROR Switching command to contouring mode, Cs axis control or rigid tap
mode or switching to spindle command mode is not correctly com-
pleted.
(This occurs when the response to switch to the spindle control unit side
with regard to the switching command from the NC is incorrect.
This alarm is not for the purposes of warning against mistakes in opera-
tion, but because continuing operation in this condition can be danger-
ous it is a P/S alarm.)
197 C–AXIS COMMANDED IN SPINDLE The program specified a movement along the Cs–axis when the signal
MODE CON(DGN=G027#7) was off. Correct the program, or consult the PMC
ladder diagram to find the reason the signal is not turned on.
199 MACRO WORD UNDEFINED Undefined macro word was used. Modify the custom macro.
200 ILLEGAL S CODE COMMAND In the rigid tap, an S value is out of the range or is not specified.
Modify the program.
201 FEEDRATE NOT FOUND IN RIGID In the rigid tap, no F value is specified.
TAP Correct the program.
202 POSITION LSI OVERFLOW In the rigid tap, spindle distribution value is too large. (System error)
203 PROGRAM MISS AT RIGID In the rigid tap, position for a rigid M code (M29) or an S command is in-
TAPPING correct. Modify the program.
204 ILLEGAL AXIS OPERATION In the rigid tap, an axis movement is specified between the rigid M code
(M29) block and G84 or G74 for M series (G84 or G88 for T series) block.
Modify the program.
205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF Rigid mode DI signal is not ON when G84 or G74 for M series (G84 or
G88 for T series) is executed though the rigid M code (M29) is speci-
fied.Consult the PMC ladder diagram to find the reason the DI signal
(DGNG061.1) is not turned on.
206 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE Plane changeover was instructed in the rigid mode.
(RIGID TAP) (M series) Correct the program.

345
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

Number Message Contents


210 CAN NOT COMAND M198/M199 M198 and M199 are executed in the schedule operation. M198 is
executed in the DNC operation. Modify the program.
1) The execution of an M198 or M99 command was attempted during
scheduled operation. Alternatively, the execution of an M198 com-
mand was attempted during DNC operation. Correct the program.
2) The execution of an M99 command was attempted by an interrupt
macro during pocket machining in a multiple repetitive canned
cycle.
211 G31 (HIGH) NOT ALLOWED IN G99 G31 is commanded in the per revolution command when the high–
speed skip option is provided. Modify the program.
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The arbitrary angle chamfering or a corner R is commanded or the plane
(M series) including an additional axis. Correct the program.
212
ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT The direct drawing dimensions programming is commanded for the
(T series) plane other than the Z–X plane. Correct the program.
213 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Movement is commanded for the axis to be synchronously controlled.
SYNCHRO–MODE Any of the following alarms occurred in the operation with the simple
synchronization control.
1) The program issued the move command to the slave axis.
2) The program issued the manual continuous feed/manual handle
feed/incremental feed command to the slave axis.
3) The program issued the automatic reference position return com-
mand without specifying the manual reference position return after
the power was turned on.
4) The difference between the position error amount of the master and
slave axes exceeded the value specified in parameter NO.8313.
214 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Coordinate system is set or tool compensation of the shift type is
SYNCHRO–MODE executed in the synchronous control. Correct the program.
217 DUPLICATE G51.2 (COMMANDS) G51.2/G251 is further commanded in the G51.2/G251 mode. Modify
(T series) the program.
218 NOT FOUND P/Q COMMAND IN P or Q is not commanded in the G251 block, or the command value is
G251 (T series) out of the range. Modify the program.
219 COMMAND G250/G251 G251 and G250 are not independent blocks.
INDEPENDENTLY (T series)
220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the NC pro-
SYNCHR–MODE (T series) gram or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous axis.
221 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN Polygon machining synchronous operation and axis control or balance
SYNCHR–MODE (T series) cutting are executed at a time. Modify the program.
224 RETURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return has not been performed before the automatic
(M series) operation starts. Perform reference position return only when bit 0 of pa-
rameter 1005 is 0.
TURN TO REFERENCE POINT Reference position return is necessary before cycle start.
(T series)
231 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN G10 OR L50 Any of the following errors occurred in the specified format at the pro-
grammable–parameter input.
1 Address N or R was not entered.
2 A number not specified for a parameter was entered.
3 The axis number was too large.
4 An axis number was not specified in the axis–type parameter.
5 An axis number was specified in the parameter which is not an axis
type. Correct the program.
6 An attempt was made to reset bit 4 of parameter 3202 (NE9) or
change parameter 3210 (PSSWD) when they are protected by a
password. Correct the program.
233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that connected via the
RS–232–C interface, other users were using it.
239 BP/S ALARM While punching was being performed with the function for controlling ex-
ternal I/O units ,background editing was performed.

346
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Number Message Contents


240 BP/S ALARM Background editing was performed during MDI operation.
244 P/S ALARM In the skip function activated by the torque limit signal, the number of ac-
(T series) cumulated erroneous pulses exceed 32767 before the signal was input.
Therefore, the pulses cannot be corrected with one distribution.
Change the conditions, such as feed rates along axes and torque limit,
and try again.
245 T–CODE NOT ALOWEE IN THIS One of the G codes, G50, G10, and G04, which cannot be specified in
BLOCK (T series) the same block as a T code, was specified with a T code.
253 G05 IS NOT AVAILABLE Alarm details
(M series) Binary input operation using high–speed remote buffer (G05) or high–
speed cycle machining (G05) has been specified in advance control
mode (G08P1). Execute G08P0; to cancel advance control mode, be-
fore executing these G05 commands.
5010 END OF RECORD The end of record (%) was specified.
I/O is incorrect. modify the program.
5014 TRACE DATA NOT FOUND Transfer cannot be performed because no trace data exists.
(M series)
5020 PARAMETER OF RESTART An erroneous parameter was specified for restarting a program.
ERROR A parameter for program restart is invalid.
5030 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100) The end command (G110) was specified before the registratioin start
(T series) command (G101, G102, or G103) was specified for the B–axis.
5031 ILLEGAL COMMAND (G100, G102, While a registration start command (G101, G102, or G103) was being
G103) (T series) executed, another registration start command was specified for the
B–axis.
5032 NEW PRG REGISTERED IN B–AXS While the machine was moving about the B–axis, at attempt was made
MOVE (T series) to register another move command.
5033 NO PROG SPACE IN MEMORY Commands for movement about the B–axis were not registered be-
B–AXS (T series) cause of insufficient program memory.
5034 PLURAL COMMAND IN G110 Multiple movements were specified with the G110 code for the B–axis.
(T series)
5035 NO FEEDRATE COMMANDED A feedrate was not specified for cutting feed about the B–axis.
B–AXS (T series)
5036 ADDRESS R NOT DEFINED IN Point R was not specified for the canned cycle for the B–axis.
G81–G86 (T series)
5037 ADDRESS Q NOT DEFINED IN G83 Depth of cut Q was not specified for the G83 code (peck drilling cycle).
(T series) Alternatively, 0 was specified in Q for the B–axis.
5038 TOO MANY START M–CODE More than six M codes for starting movement about the B–axis were
COMMAND (T series) specified.
5039 START UNREGISTERED B–AXS An attempt was made to execute a program for the B–axis which had
PROG (T series) not been registered.
5040 CAN NOT COMMANDED B–AXS The machine could not move about the B–axis because parameter
MOVE (T series) No.8250 was incorrectly specified, or because the PMC axis system
could not be used.
5041 CAN NOT COMMANDED G110 Blocks containing the G110 codes were successively specified in tool–
BLOCK (T series) tip radius compensation for the B–axis.
5044 G68 FORMAT ERROR A G68 command block contains a format error. This alarm is issued in
(M series) the following cases:
1. I, J, or K is missing from a G68 command block (missing coordinate
rotation option).
2. I, J, and K are 0 in a G68 command block.
3. R is missing from a G68 command block.
5074 ADDRESS DUPLICATION ERROR The same address has been specified two or more times in a single
block. Alternatively, two or more G codes in the same group have been
specified in a single block.

347
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

(2) Background edit alarm


Number Message Contents
??? BP/S alarm BP/S alarm occurs in the same number as the P/S alarm that occurs in
ordinary program edit. (070, 071, 072, 073, 074 085,086,087 etc.)
140 BP/S alarm It was attempted to select or delete in the background a program being
selected in the foreground. (NOTE)
Use background editing correctly.

NOTE
Alarm in background edit is displayed in the key input line of the background edit screen instead
of the ordinary alarm screen and is resettable by any of the MDI key operation.

(3) Absolute pulse coder (APC) alarm


Number Message Contents
300 nth–axis origin return Manual reference position return is required for the nth–axis (n=1 – 8).
301 APC alarm: nth–axis communication nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC communication error. Failure in data transmis-
sion
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
302 APC alarm: nth–axis over time nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC overtime error.
Failure in data transmission.
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
303 APC alarm: nth–axis framing nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC framing error. Failure in data transmission.
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
304 APC alarm: nth–axis parity nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC parity error.
Failure in data transmission.
Possible causes include a faulty APC, cable, or servo interface module.
305 APC alarm: nth–axis pulse error nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC pulse error alarm.
APC alarm.APC or cable may be faulty.
306 APC alarm: nth–axis battery voltage nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC battery voltage has decreased to a low level so
0 that the data cannot be held.
APC alarm. Battery or cable may be faulty.
307 APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 1 nth–axis (n=1 – 4) axis APC battery voltage reaches a level where the
battery must be renewed.
APC alarm. Replace the battery.
308 APC alarm: nth–axis battery low 2 nth–axis (n=1 – 4) APC battery voltage has reached a level where the
battery must be renewed (including when power is OFF).
APC alarm .Replace battery.
309 APC ALARM : n AXIS ZRN An attempt was made to perform reference position return without rotat-
IMPOSSIBL ing the motor through one or more turns. Rotate the motor through one
or more turns, turn off the power then on again, then perform reference
position return.

348
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

(4) Serial pulse coder (SPC) alarms


When either of the following alarms is issued, a possible cause is a faulty serial pulse coder or cable.
Number Message Contents
350 SPC ALARM: n AXIS PULSE The n axis (axis 1–4) pulse coder has a fault. Refer to diagnosis display
CODER No. 202, 204 for details.
351 SPC ALARM: n AXIS n axis (axis 1–4) serial pulse coder communication error (data transmis-
COMMUNICATION sion fault)
Refer to diagnosis display No. 203 for details.

D The details of serial The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 350 (pulse coder alarm) are
pulse coder alarm displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 202) as shown below.
No.350
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
202 CSA BLA PHA RCA BZA CKA SPH

CSA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.


BLA : The battery voltage is low. Replace the batteries. This alarm has nothing
to do with alarm No. 350 (serial pulse coder alarm).
PHA : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. replace the serial
pulse coder or cable.
RCA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
BZA : The pulse coder was supplied with power for the first time.
Make sure that the batteries are connected.
Turn the power off, then turn it on again and perform a reference position
return. This alarm has nothing to do with alarm No. 350 (serial pulse coder
alarm).
CKA : The serial pulse coder is defective. Replace it.
SPH : The serial pulse coder or feedback cable is defective. Replace the serial
pulse coder or cable.

D The details of serial The details of serial pulse coder alarm No. 351 (communication alarm)
pulse coder alarm are displayed in the diagnosis display (No. 203) as shown below.
No.351
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
203 DTE CRC SRB PRM

DTE : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.


The pulse coder, feedbak cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or servo control module.
CRC : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or servo control module.
STB : The serial pulse coder encountered a communication error.
The pulse coder, feedback cable, or feedback receiver circuit is defective.
Replace the pulse coder, feedback cable, or servo control module.
PRM : An invalid parameter was found. Alarm No. 417 (invalid servo
parameter) is also issued.

349
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

(5) Servo alarms


Number Message Contents
400 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS The n–th axis (axis 1–4) overload signal is on. Refer to diagnosis dis-
OVERLOAD play No. 200, 201 for details.
401 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY The n–th axis (axis 1–4) servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) went off.
OFF
404 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS VRDY Even though the n–th axis (axis 1–4) READY signal (MCON) went off,
ON the servo amplifier READY signal (DRDY) is still on. Or, when the power
was turned on, DRDY went on even though MCON was off.
Check that the servo interface module and servo amp are connected.
405 SERVO ALARM: (ZERO POINT Position control system fault. Due to an NC or servo system fault in the
RETURN FAULT) reference position return, there is the possibility that reference position
return could not be executed correctly. Try again from the manual refer-
ence position return.
407 SERVO ALARM: EXCESS ERROR The difference in synchronous axis position deviation exceeded the set
value.
409 TORQUEALM’ : EXCESS ERROR An abnormal load on the servo motor was detected. Alternatively, an
abnormal load on the spindle motor was detected in Cs mode.
410 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – The position deviation value when the n–th axis (axis 1–4) stops is
EXCESS ERROR larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1829 for each axis.
411 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – The position deviation value when the n–th axis (axis 1–4) moves is
EXCESS ERROR larger than the set value.
Note) Limit value must be set to parameter No.1828 for each axis.
413 SERVO ALARM: n–th AXIS – LSI The contents of the error register for the n–th axis (axis 1–4) are beyond
OVERFLOW the range of –231 to 231. This error usually occurs as the result of an
improperly set parameters.
414 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – N–th axis (axis 1–4) digital servo system fault. Refer to diagnosis dis-
DETECTION RELATED ERROR play No. 200, 201, and No.204 for details.
415 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – A speed higher than 511875 units/s was attempted to be set in the n–th
EXCESS SHIFT axis (axis 1–4). This error occurs as the result of improperly set CMR.
416 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – Position detection system fault in the n–th axis (axis 1–4) pulse coder
DISCONNECTION (disconnection alarm). Refer to diagnosis display No. 200, 201 for
details.
417 SERVO ALARM: n–TH AXIS – This alarm occurs when the n–th axis (axis 1–4) is in one of the
PARAMETER INCORRECT conditions listed below. (Digital servo system alarm)
1) The value set in Parameter No. 2020 (motor form) is out of the speci-
fied limit.
2) A proper value (111 or –111) is not set in parameter No.2022 (motor
revolution direction).
3) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2023
(number of speed feedback pulses per motor revolution).
4) Illegal data (a value below 0, etc.) was set in parameter No. 2024
(number of position feedback pulses per motor revolution).
5) Parameters No. 2084 and No. 2085 (flexible field gear rate) have not
been set.
6) A value outside the limit of {1 to the number of control axes} or a non–
continuous value (Parameter 1023 (servo axis number) contains a
value out of the range from 1 to the number of axes, or an isolated
value (for example, 4 not prceded by 3).was set in parameter No.
1023 (servo axisnumber).
420 SYNC TORQUE’ : EXCESS ERROR When simple synchronous control is applied, the torque command dif-
ference between the master and slave axes exceeded the value set in
parameter No. 2031.

350
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Number Message Contents


421 EXCESS ER(D)’ : EXCESS ERROR While the dual position feedback function is being applied, an excessive
difference was detected between a semi–closed loop error and closed
loop error. Check the dual position conversion factor set in parameter
Nos. 2078 and 2079.
422 EXCESS ER(D)’ : SPEED ERROR The specified allowable speed has been exceeded while torque control
for PMC axis control is applied.
423 EXCESS ER(D)’ : EXCESS ERROR The allowable total amount of travel, set in a parameter, has been ex-
ceeded while torque control for PMC axis control is applied.

D Details of servo The details of servo alarm No. 414 are displayed in the diagnosis display
alarm No.414 (No. 200 and No.204) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
200 OVL LV OVC HCA HVA DCA FBA OFA

OVL : An overload alarm is being generated.


(This bit causes servo alarm No. 400. The details are indicated in
diagnostic data No.201).
LV : A low voltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
OVC : A overcurrent alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
HCA : An abnormal current alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
HVA : An overvoltage alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
DCA : A regenerative discharge circuit alarm is being generated in servo amp.
Check LED.
FBA : A disconnection alarm is being generated.
(This bit causes servo alarm No.416.The details are indicated in
diagnostic data No. 201)
OFA : An overflow alarm is being generated inside of digital servo.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
201 ALD EXP

When OVL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200


(servo alarm No. 400 is being generated):
ALD 0 : Motor overheating
1 : Amplifier overheating
When FBAL equal 1 in diagnostic data No.200
(servo alarm No. 416 is being generated):
ALD EXP Alarm details
1 0 Built–in pulse coder disconnection (hardware)
1 1 Separately installed pulse coder disconnection
(hardware)
0 0 Pulse coder is not connected due to software.

351
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
204 OFS MCC LDA PMS

OFS : A current conversion error has occured in the digital servo.


MCC : A magnetic contactor contact in the servo amplifier has welded.
LDA : The LED indicates that serial pulse coder C is defective.
PMS : A feedback pulse error has occured because the feedback cable is
defective.

(6) Over travel alarms


Number Message Contents
500 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored stroke limit I.
(Parameter No.1320 or 1326 NOTE)
501 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit I.
(Parameter No.1321 or 1327 NOTE)
502 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored stroke limit II.
(Parameter No.1322 )
503 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit II.
(Parameter No.1323)
504 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side stored stroke limit III.
(Parameter No.1324 )
505 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side stored stroke limit III.
(Parameter No.1325 )
506 OVER TRAVEL : +n Exceeded the n–th axis + side hardware OT.
507 OVER TRAVEL : –n Exceeded the n–th axis – side hardware OT.

NOTE
Parameters 1326 and 1327 are effective when EXLM(stroke limit switch signal) is on.

(7) Overheat alarms


Number Message Contents
700 OVERHEAT: CONTROL UNIT Control unit overheat
Check that the fan motor operates normally, and clean the air filter.
701 OVERHEAT: FAN MOTOR The fan motor on the top of the cabinet for the contorl unit is overheated.
Check the operation of the fan motor and replace the motor if necessary.
704 OVERHEAT: SPINDLE Spindle overheat in the spindle fluctuation detection
(1) If the cutting load is heavy, relieve the cutting condition.
(2) Check whether the cutting tool is share.
(3) Another possible cause is a faulty spindle amp.

(8) Rigid tapping alarms


Number Message Contents
740 RIGID TAP ALARM: The positional deviation of the stopped spindle has exceeded the set
EXCESS ERROR value during rigid tapping.
741 RIGID TAP ALARM: The positional deviation of the moving spindle has exceeded the set val-
EXCESS ERROR ue during rigid tapping.
742 RIGID TAP ALARM: An LSI overflow has occurred for the spindle during rigid tapping.
LSI OVERFLOW

352
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

(9) Serial spindle alarms


Number Message Contents
749 S–SPINDLE LSI ERROR It is serial communication error while system is executing after power
supply on. Following reasons can be considered.
1) Optical cable connection is fault or cable is not connected or cable
is cut.
2) MAIN CPU board is fault.
3) Spindle amp. printed board is fault.
If this alarm occurs when CNC power supply is turned on or when
this alarm can not be cleared even if CNC is reset, turn off the power
supply also turn off the power supply in spindle side.
750 SPINDLE SERIAL LINK START This alarm is generated when the spindle control unit is not ready for
FAULT starting correctly when the power is turned on in the system with the
serial spindle.
The four reasons can be considered as follows:
1) An improperly connected optic cable, or the spindle control unit’s
power is OFF.
2) When the NC power was turned on under alarm conditions other
than SU–01 or AL–24 which are shown on the LED display of the
spindle control unit.
In this case, turn the spindle amplifier power off once and perform
startup again.
3) Other reasons (improper combination of hardware)
This alarm does not occur after the system including the spindle con-
trol unit is activated.
4) The second spindle (when SP2, bit 4 of parameter No. 3701, is 1)
is in one of the above conditions 1) to 3).
See diagnostic display No. 409 for details.
751 FIRST SPINDLE ALARM This alarm indicates in the NC that an alarm is generated in the spindle
DETECTION (AL–XX) unit of the system with the serial spindle. The alarm is displayed in form
AL–XX (XX is a number). Refer to A.3 Alarms displayed on spindle
servo unit .The alarm number XX is the number indicated on the
spindle amplifier. The CNC holds this number and displays on the
screen.
752 FIRST SPINDLE MODE CHANGE This alarm is generated if the system does not properly terminate a
FAULT mode change. The modes include the Cs contouring, spindle position-
ing, rigid tapping, and spindle control modes. The alarm is activated if
the spindle control unit does not respond correctly to the mode change
command issued by the NC.
754 SPINDLE–1 ABNORMAL TORQUE Abnormal first spindle motor load has been detected.
ALM
761 SECOND SPINDLE ALARM Refer to alarm No.751. (For 2nd axis)
DETECTION (AL–XX)
762 SECOND SPINDLE MODE Refer to alarm No.752.(For 2nd axis)
CHANGE FAULT
764 SPINDLE–2 ABNORMAL TORQUE Same as alarm No.754 (for the second spindle)
ALM

353
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

D The details of spindle The details of spindle alarm No. 750 are displayed in the diagnosis display
alarm No.750 (No. 409) as shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
409 SPE S2E S1E SHE

#0 (SHE) 0 : The serial communications module in the CNC is normal.


1 : The serial communications module in the CNC was detected to have a
fault.
#1 (S1E) 0 : The first spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup.
1 : The first spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle axis
serial control startup.
#2 (S2E) 0 : The second spindle is normal during the spindle serial control startup.
1 : The second spindle was detected to have a fault during the spindle
serial control startup.
#3 (SPE) 0 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters fulfill the
spindle unit startup conditions.
1 : In the spindle serial control, the serial spindle parameters do not fulfill
the spindle unit startup conditions.

354
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

(10) System alarms (These alarms cannot be reset with reset key.)
Number Message Contents
900 ROM PARITY F–ROM parity error in a ROM file (control software), such as CNC,
macro, or digital servo. The F–ROM module may be defective.
910 DRAM PARITY : (Low) For an SRAM parity error, initialize the memory. If the error subse-
911 DRAM PARITY: (High) quently
l recurs, or iin the
h case off a DRAM parity
i error, replace
l the
h
RAM module
module.
912 SRAM PARITY: (Low) q y set the parameters and all other data again.
Subsequently, g
913 SRAM PARITY : (High)
920 SERVO ALARM (1/2 AXIS) Servo alarm (1st or 2nd axis). A watchdog alarm or a RAM parity
error in the servo module occurred.
Replace the servo control module on the main CPU board.
921 SERVO ALARM (3/4 AXIS) Servo alarm (3rd or 4th axis). A watchdog alarm or a RAM parity
error in the servo module occurred.
Replace the servo control module on the main CPU board.
924 SERVO MODULE SETTING The digital servo module is not installed.
ERROR Check that the servo control module or servo interface module on
the main board is mounted securely.
930 CPU INTERRUPUT CPU error (abnormal interrupt)
The main board is faulty.
940 PCB ERROR PCB ID error. The main board or the memory module may be
defective.
950 PMC SYSTEM ALARM Fault occurred in the PMC. The PMC control module on the main
board or the RAM module may be defective.
971 NMI OCCURRED IN SLC An alarm condition occurred in the interface with an I/O unit.
Check the connection between the PMC control module on the main
board and the I/O Unit. Also, check that the power of the I/O Unit is
on and that the interface module is operating normally.
972 NMI OCCURRED IN OTHER NMI occurred in a board other than the main board.
MODULE The main board or the back panel may be defective.
973 NON MASK INTERRUPT NMI occurred for an unknown reason.
The printed board of the power unit or the main board may be defec-
tive. Or, there may be noise interference.
974 BUS ERROR Bus error
The main board may be defective.

355
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

A.2
LIST OF ALARMS
(PMC)
(1) Alarm messages (PMC)
Message Contents and solution
ALARM NOTHING Normal status
ER01 PROGRAM DATA The sequence program in the debugging RAM is defective.
ERROR(RAM) (solution) Please clear the debugging RAM and input LADDER again.
The debugging RAM is not installed though the RAM is selected.
(solution) Please install the debugging RAM or install ROM for sequence program
and select ROM with K17#3=0.
ER02 PROGRAM SIZE OVER The size of sequence program exceeds the maximum size of LADDER(PMC–RC
only).
(solution) Please change MAX LADDER AREA SIZE at the SYSPRM screen and
restart the system.
ER03 PROGRAM SIZE The size of sequence program exceeds the option specification size.
ERROR(OPTION) (solution) Please increase the option specification size.
Or, reduce the size of sequence program.
ER04 PMC TYPE UNMATCH The PMC model setting of the sequence program is not corresponding to an actual
model.
(solution) Please change the PMC model setting by the offline programmer.
ER05 PMC MODULE TYPE The module type of the PMC engine is not correct.
ERROR
(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine for a correct one.
ER07 NO OPTION There is no step number option of LADDER.
(LADDER STEP)
ER10 OPTION AREA NOTHING The management software for the PMC–RB has not been transferred.
(series name) (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC.
ER11 OPTION AREA NOTHING The management software for the PMC C board has not been transferred.
(series name) (solution) The software installation is not consistent with the order. Contact FANUC.
ER12 OPTION AREA ERROR The series of the management software for the PMC–RB differs between BASIC and
(series name) OPTION.
(solution) Contact FANUC.
ER13 OPTION AREA ERROR The series of the management software for the PMC C board differs between BASIC
(series name) and OPTION.
(solution) Contact FANUC.
ER14 OPTION AREA VERSIION The edition of the management software for the PMC–RB differs between BASIC
ERROR (series name) and OPTION.
(solution) Contact FANUC.
ER15 OPTION AREA VERSIION The edition of the management software for the PMC C board differs between BASIC
ERROR (series name) and OPTION.
(solution) Contact FANUC.
ER 16 RAM CHECK ERROR The debugging RAM cannot be read/written normally.
(PROGRAM RAM) (solution) Please exchange the debugging RAM.
ER17 PROGRAM PARITY The parity error occurred on ROM for sequence program or the debugging RAM.
(solution) ROM: The deterioration of ROM may be deteriorated
Please exchange ROM for the sequence program
RAM: Please edit the sequence program once on PMC
Still the error occurs, exchange the debugging RAM.
ER18 PROGRAM DATA ERROR Transferring the sequence program from offline programmer was interrupted by the
BY I/O power off etc.
(solution) Please clear the sequence program and transfer the sequence program
again.
ER19 LADDER DATA ERROR Editing the LADDER was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to the CNC
screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit LADDER once on PMC.
Or, please input LADDER again.

356
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Message Contents and solution


ER20 SYMBOL/COMMENT Editing the symbol and comment was interrupted by the power off or by the switch to
DATA ERROR the CNC screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit symbol and comment once on PMC.
Or, please input symbol and comment again.
ER21 MESSAGE DATA ERROR Editing the message data was interrupted by the power off or the switch to the CNC
screen by the function key etc.
(solution) Please edit message data once on PMC.
Or, please input message data again.
ER22 PROGRAM NOTHING There is no sequence program
ER23 PLEASE TURN OFF There is a change in setting LADDER MAX AREA SIZE etc.
POWER (solution) Please restart the system to make the change effective.
ER25 SOFTWARE VERSION The PMC–RB management software editions are inconsistent.
ERROR (PMCAOPT) (solution) Contact FANUC.
ER26 SOFTWARE VERSION The PMC–RB management software cannot be initialized.
ERROR (PMCAOPT) (solution) Contact FANUC.
ER32 NO I/O DEVICE Any DI/DO unit of I/O Unit or the connection unit etc. is not connected. When built–in
I/O card is connected, this message is not displayed.
(solution) When built–in I/O card is used:
Please confirm whether the built–in I/O card is certainly connected with.
When I/O Link is used:
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turning on. Or please confirm
the connection of the cable.
ER33 SLC ERROR The LSI for I/O Link is defective.
(solution) Please exchange the module of PMC engine.
ER34 SLC ERROR(xx) The communication with the DI/DO units of the xx group failed.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable connected to the DI/DO
units of the xx group.
Please confirm whether the DI/DO units turned on earlier than CNC and
PMC. Or, please exchange the module of PMC engine on the DI/DO
units of the xx group
ER35 TOO MUCH OUTPUT The number of the output data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which
DATA IN GROUP(xx) exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
“FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual”
(B–61813E)
“FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL B Connection Manual”(B–62163E)
ER36 TOO MUCH INPUT DATA The number of the input data in the xx group exceeded the max. The data, which
IN GROUP(xx) exceed 32 bytes, become ineffective.
(solution) Please refer to the following for the number of the data for each group.
“FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL A Connection and Maintenance Manual”
(B–61813E)
“FANUC I/O Unit to MODEL B Connection Manual”(B–62163E)
ER38 MAX SETTING OUTPUT The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
DATA OVER(xx) (The assignment data of output side of xx group or later become ineffective.)
(solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number
of the output data of each group.
ER39 MAX SETTING INPUT The assignment data for a group exceeds 128 bytes.
DATA OVER(xx) (The assignment data of input side of xx group or later become infective.)
(Solution) Please reduce the assignment data to 128 bytes or less for the number
of the input data of each goup.

357
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

*When ER00 to ER26 occur, sequence program is not available.


Message Contents and solution
WN02 OPERATE PANEL The address setting data of the operator’s panel for FS to 0 is illegal.
ADDRESS ERROR (solution) Please correct the address setting data.
WN03 ABORT NC to WINDOW/ LADDER was stopped while CNC and PMC were communicating.
EXIN The functional instruction WINDR, WINDW, EXIN, DISPB, and etc. may not work nor-
mally.
(solution) When restarting the system, this alarm will be released. Execute the
sequence program(Press RUN key) after confirming whether there is a
problem in LADDER or not.
WN05 PMC TYPE NO A ladder program for the PMC to RA3/RA5 was transferred to the PMC to RB5.
CONVERSION (solution) Correct the ladder type.
WN06 TASK STOPPED BY Some user tasks are stopped by break point of the debugging function.
DEBUG FUNC
WN07 LADDER SP ERROR When functional instruction CALL(SUB65) or CALLU(SUB66) was executed, the stack
(STACK) of the LADDER overflowed.
(solution) Please reduce the nesting of the subprogram to 8 or less.

(2) Alarm messages (For EDIT 1)


Message Contents and solution
ADDRESS BIT NOTHING The address of the relay/coil is not set.
FUNCTION NOT FOUND There is no functional instruction of the input number.
COM FUNCTION MISSING The funcitonal instruction COM (SUB29) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of COM and COME (SUB29) is incorrect.
Or, the number of coil controlled by COM is specified by the model which the number
cannot be specified.
EDIT BUFFER OVER There in no empty area of the buffer for the editing.
(solution) Please reduce NET under editing.
END FUNCTION MISSING Functional instruction END1 and END2 do not exist. Or, there are error net in END1 and
END2.
Or, order of END1 and END2 is not correct.
ERROR NET FOUND There is an error net.
ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO. The wrong number of the functional instruction is searched.
FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL The functional instruction is not correctly connected.
HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL The horizontal line of the net is not connected.
ILLEGAL NETS CLEARED Because the power had been turn off while editing LADDER, some net under editing
was cleared.
ILLEGAL OPERATION Operation is not correct.
The value is not specified and only INPUT key was pushed.
The address data is not correctly inputted.
Because the space to display the instruction on screen is not enough, the functional
instruction cannot be made.
SYMBOL UNDEFINED The symbol which was inputted is not defined.
INPUT INVALID There is an incorrect input data.
Non–numerical value was inputted with COPY, INSLIN,C–UP,C–DOWN etc.
The input address was specified for write coil.
An illegal character was specified for the data table.
NET TOO LARGE The input net is larger than the editing buffer.
(solution) Please reduce the net under editing.
JUMP FUNCTION MISSING The functional instruction JMP(SUB10) is not correctly dealt with.
Correspondence of JMP and JMPE(SUB30) is incorrect.
The number of coil to jump is specified by the model which the number of coil cannot
specified. (It is possible to specify the coil number only on PMC–RB/RC.)
LADDER BROKEN LADDER is broken.
LADDER ILLEGAL There is an incorrect LADDER.
IMPOSSIBLE WRITE You try to edit sequence program on the ROM.

358
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Message Contents and solution


OBJECT BUFFER OVER The sequence program area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the LADDER.
PARAMETER NOTHING There is no parameter of the functional instruction.
PLEASE COMPLETE NET The error net was found in LADDER.
(solution) After correcting the error net, please continue operating.
PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO. Please input the number of the functional instruction.
(solution) If you do not input the functional instruction, please push soft key “FUNC”
again.
PROGRAM MODULE NOTHING You tried to edit though there was neither RAM for debugging nor ROM for sequence
program.
RELAY COIL FORBIT There is an unnecessary relay or coil.
RELAY OR COIL NOTHING The relay or the coil does not suffice.
PLEASE CLEAR ALL It is impossible to recover the sequence program.
(solution) Please clear the all data.
SYMBOL DATA DUPLICATE The same symbol name is defined in other place.
COMMENT DATA OVERFLOW The comment data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the commnet.
SYMBOL DATA OVERFLOW The symbol data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the symbol.
VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL There is an incorrect vertical line of the net.
MESSAGE DATA OVERFLOW The message data area was filled.
(solution) Please reduce the number of the message.
1ST LEVEL EXECUTE TIME The 1st level of LADDER is too large to complete execution in time.
OVER (solution) Please reduce the 1st level of LADDER.

359
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

(3) Alarm messages (For I/O)


Message Contents and solution
I/O OPEN ERROR nn An error occurs when the reader/puncher interface was started.
nn= –1 Because the interface is used with NC etc., the interface is not able to be
opened by PMC side.
(solution) After other functions finishes using the line, please execute again.
6 There is no option for the interface.
20 The interface cannot be opened.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm
setting of the baud rate etc.
I/O WRITE ERROR nn An output error occurred in the reader/puncher interface.
nn= 20 The state of the interface is not correct.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm
setting the baud rate etc.
22 Opponent side is not ready to receive.
(solution) Please confirm the power supply on the opponent side.
Or, please initialize the interface.
I/O READ ERROR nn An input error occurred in the reader/puncher interface.
nn= 20 The state of the interface is not correct.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm
setting the baud rate etc.
21 The data is not sent from the opponent side.
(solution) Please confirm the power supply on the opponent side.
Please initialize the opponent side.
I/O LIST ERROR nn An error occurred in directory read processing from FD Cassette.
nn= 20 The state of the interface is not correct.
(solution) Please confirm the connection of the cable. Please confirm
setting of the baud rate etc.
COMPARE ERR xxxxxx=aa:bb A compare error occurred.
CONT? (Y/N) xxxxxx : The Address where the compare error occurred.
aa : The data on PMC side.
bb : The data on device side
Enter ‘Y’ to continue processing.
ADDRESS IS OUT OF RANGE The data transferred to the address out of the PMC debugging RAM area.
(xxxxxx) xxxxxx : Transferred address.
(solution) Please confirm the address of the transferring data.
LADDER : Please confirm the model setting.
C language : Please confirm setting the address in the link control statement and
build file.
ROM WRITER ERROR nnnnnn An error occurred in the ROM writer.

360
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

A.3
SPINDLE ALARMS NOTE
(SERIAL SPINDLE) Er–xx is not displayed on the screen.

Message Contents Countermeasure


Er–01 *Although ESP (there are 2 types : connection signal and *Confirm the sequence of ESP and MRDY.
PMC→CNC) and MRDY (machine ready signal) are not
input, SFR/SRV is input. However, regarding MRDY, pay
attention to the setting of use/not use spindle parameter
MRDY.
Er–02 If spindle motor is not integrated with spindle in system Set the spindle motor speed detector parameter to
with high–resolution magnetic pulse coder, speed detec- 128 p/rev.
tor of spindle motor is set to 128 p/rev.
Attempt to excite motor fails if value other than 128 p/rev
is set.
Er–03 Parameter for high–resolution magnetic pulse coder is Check parameter setting for high–resolution mag-
not set, but Cs contouring control command is entered. netic pulse coder.
In this case, motor is not excited.
Er–04 Although parameter setting for using position coder was Confirm the parameter setting of the position coder.
not performed, commands for servo mode and synchro-
nous control are input.
In this case, the motor will not be excited.
Er–05 Although option parameter for orientation is not set, the Confirm the parameter setting of orientation.
orientation command (ORCM) is input.
Er–06 Although option parameter for output switchover is not Confirm the parameter setting for output switching
set, LOW winding is selected. and power line status signal.
Er–07 Although Cs contouring control command was entered, Confirm the sequence.
SFR/SRV is not entered.
Er–08 Although servo mode control command was input, SFR/ Confirm the sequence.
SRV is not input.
Er–09 Although synchronous control command was input, Confirm the sequence.
SFR/SRV is not input.
Er–10 Cs control command was entered, but another mode Never set another mode when Cs contouring con-
(servo mode, synchronous control, orientation) is speci- trol command is being processed. Before chang-
fied. ing to another mode, clear Cs contouring contorl
command.
Er–11 Servo mode command was entered, but another mode Do not command other modes during servo mode
(Cs contouring control, synchronous control, orienta- command. When moving to other modes, perform
tion)is specified. after releasing the servo mode command.
Er–12 Synchronous control command was entered, but anoth- Do not command other modes during synchronous
er mode (Cs contouringt control, servo mode, orienta- control command.
tion) is specified. When moving to other modes, perform after releas-
ing the synchronous control command.
Er–13 Orientation command was entered, but another mode Do not command other modes during orientation
(Cs contouring control, servo mode, synchronous con- command.
trol) is specified. When moving to other modes, perform after releas-
ing the orientation command.
Er–14 SFR/SRV are simultaneously commanded. Command one or the other.
Er–15 Cs contouring control command is entered when differ- Check parameter setting and control input signal.
ential speed control function is enabled by parameter
setting (No.6500#5=1).
Er–16 Differential mode command (DEFMDA) is entered when Check parameter setting and control input signal.
differential speed function is disabled by parameter set-
ting (No.6500#5=1).
Er–17 Parameter setting (No.6511#0,1,2) for speed detector is Check parameter setting.
incorrect. (Specified speed detector is not present.)

361
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

Message Contents Countermeasure


Er–18 Spindle orientation command of position coder type is Check parameter setting and control input signal.
entered when use of position coder signal is disabled by
parameter setting( No.6501#2=0).
Er–19 Although the command for orienting the magnetic sensor Do not issue another mode while the orientation
system was entered, another mode was issued. command is executed. Before issuing another
mode, cancel the orientation command.
Er–20 Both the slave mode and the high–resolution magnetic These two settings are incompatible. Check the
pulse coder were enabled. parameter settings.
Er–21 The slave mode command (SLV=1) was entered under Enter the slave mode command in the normal op-
position control (servo mode, orientation,etc.). eration mode.
Er–22 The position control command (servo mode, orienta- Enter the position control command in the normal
tion,etc.) was entered in the slave operation mode operation mode.
(SLV=1).
Er–23 A slave mode command was entered when the slave Enable the slave mode.
mode is disabled.
Er–24 To perform continuous indexing in the mode for orienting Check the control input signal (INCMD). To
the position coder system, incremental opera- execute the absolute position command continu-
tion(INCMD=1) was first performed, then the absolute ously, be sure to perform orientation with the abso-
position command (INCMD=0) was entered. lute position command first.
Contact sig- Between ESP1 and ESP2 of spindle control printed cir- Contact is open : emergency stop
nal of *ESP cuit board Contact is closed : general operation

Alarms (Serial spindle)

Alarm
Message Meaning Description Remedy
No.
“A” Program ROM Detects that control program is not Install normal program
display abnormality started (due to program ROM not ROM
(not installed) installed, etc.)
AL–01 SPN_n_ : MOTOR Motor Detects motor speed exceeding Check load status.
OVERHEAT overheat specified speed excessively. Cool motor then reset
alarm.
AL–02 SPN_n_ : EX SPEED Excessive Detects motor speed exceeding Check load status.
ERROR speed devi- specified speed excessively. Reset alarm.
ation
AL–03 SPN_n_ : FUSE ON DC DC link sec- Detects that fuse F4 in DC link sec- Check power transistors,
LINK BLOWN tion fuse tion is blown (models 30S and 40S). and so forth.
blown Replace fuse.
AL–04 SPN_n_ : INPUT FUSE/ Input fuse Detects blown fuse (F1 to F3), open Replace fuse.
POWER blown. phase or momentary failure of power Check open phase and
FAULT Input power (models 30S and 40S). power supply regenerative
open phase. circuit operation.
AL–05 SPN_n_ : POWER Control power Detects that control power supply Check for control power
SUPPLY FUSE supply fuse fuse AF2 or AF3 is blown (models supply short circuit .
BLOWN blown 30S and 40S). Replace fuse.
AL–07 SPN_n_ : OVERSPEED Excessive Detects that motor rotation has ex- Reset alarm.
speed ceeded 115% of its rated speed.

AL–08 SPN_n_ : HIGH VOLT High input volt- Detects that switch is flipped to 200 Flip switch to 230 VAC.
INPUT age VAC when input voltage is 230 VAC
POWER or higher (models 30S and 40S).
AL–09 SPN_n_ : OVERHEAT Excessive Detects abnormal temperature rise Cool radiator then reset
MAIN CIRCUIT load on main of power transistor radiator. alarm.
circuit section
AL–10 SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT Low input volt- Detects drop in input power supply Remove cause, then reset
INPUT age voltage. alarm.
POWER

362
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Alarm
Message Meaning Description Remedy
No.
AL–11 SPN_n_ : OVERVOLT Overvoltage in Detects abnormally high direct cur- Remove cause, then reset
POW CIRCUIT DC link sec- rent power supply voltage in power alarm.
tion circuit section.
AL–12 SPN_n_ : OVERCURRE Overcurrent in Detects flow of abnormally large cur- Remove cause, then reset
NT POW DC link sec- rent in direct current section of power alarm.
CIRCUIT tion cirtcuit
AL–13 SPN_n_ : DATA CPU internal Detects abnormality in CPU internal Remove cause, then reset
MEMORY data memory data memory. This check is made alarm.
FAULT CPU abnormality only when power is turned on.
AL–15 SPN_n_ : SP SWITCH Spindle Detects incorrect switch sequence in Check sequence.
CONTROL switch/output spindle switch/output switch opera-
ALARM switch alarm tion.
AL–16 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT RAM ab- Detects abnormality in RAM for ex- Remove cause, then reset
normality ternal data. This check is made only alarm.
when power is turned on.
AL–18 SPN_n_ : SUMCHECK Program ROM Detects program ROM data er- Remove cause, then reset
ERROR PGM sum check er- ror.This check is made only when alarm.
DATA ror power is turned on.
AL–19 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET Excessive U Detects excessive U phase current Remove cause, then reset
CURRENT U phase current detection ciucuit offset. alarm.
detection cir- This check is made only when power
cuit offset is turned on.
AL–20 SPN_n_ : EX OFFSET Excessive V Detects excessive V phase current Remove cause, then reset
CURRENT V phase current detection circuit offset. alarm.
detection cir- This check is made only when power
cuit offset is turned on.
AL–24 SPN_n_ : SERIAL Serial transfer Detects serial transfer data error Remove cause, then reset
TRANSFER data error (such as NC power supply turned off, alarm.
ERROR etc.)
AL–25 SPN_n_ : SERIAL Serial data Detects that serial data transfer has Remove cause, then reset
TRANSFER transfer stopped. alarm.
STOP stopped
AL–26 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT Disconnection Detects abnormality in position cod- Remove cause, then reset
C–VELO of speed er signal(such as unconnected cable alarm.
DETECT detection sig- and parameter setting error).
nal for Cs con-
touring control
AL–27 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT Position coder Detects abnormality in position cod- Remove cause, then reset
POS–CODER signal discon- er signal (such as unconnected alarm.
nection cable and adjustment error).
AL–28 SPN_n_ : DISCONNECT Disconnection Detects abnormality in position Remove cause, then reset
C–POS of position detection signal for Cs contouring alarm.
DETECT detection sig- control (such as unconnected cable
nal for Cs con- and adjustment error).
touring control
AL–29 SPN_n_ : SHORTTIME Short–time Detects that overload has been con- Remove cause, then reset
OVERLOAD overload tinuously applied for some period of alarm.
time (such as restraining motor shaft
in positioning).
AL–30 SPN_n_ : OVERCURRE Input circuit Detects overcurrent flowing in input Remove cause, then reset
NT POW overcurrent circuit. alarm.
CIRCUIT
AL–31 SPN_n_ : MOTOR LOCK Speed detec- Detects that motor cannot rotate at Remove cause, then reset
OR V–SIG LOS tion signal dis- specified speed or it is detected that alarm.
connection the motor is clamped. (but rotates at
motor restraint very slow speed or has stopped).
alarm or motor (This includes checking of speed
is clamped. detection signal cable.)

363
A. ALARM LIST APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

Alarm
Message Meaning Description Remedy
No.
AL–32 SPN_n_ : RAM FAULT Abnormality in Detects abnormality in RAM inside Remove cause, then reset
SERIAL LSI RAM inside the LSI used for serial data transfer. alarm.
the LSI used This check is made only when power
for serial data is turned on.
transfer. This
check is made
only when
power is
turned on.
AL–33 SPN_n_ : SHORTAGE Insufficient DC Detects insufficient charging of direct Remove cause, then reset
POWER link section current power supply voltage in pow- alarm.
CHARGE charging er circuit section when magnetic
contactor in amplifier is turned on
(such as open phase and defectifve
charging resistor).
AL–34 SPN_n_ : PARAMETER Parameter Detects parameter data set beyond Set correct data.
SETTING data setting allowable range of values.
ERROR beyond allow-
able range of
values
AL–35 SPN_n_ : EX SETTING Excessive Detects gear ratio data set beyond Set correct data.
GEAR RATIO gear ratio data allowable range of values.
setting
AL–36 SPN_n_ : OVERFLOW Error counter Detects error counter overflow. Correct cause, then reset
ERROR overflow alarm.
COUNTER
AL–37 SPN_n_ : SPEED Speed detec- Detects incorrect setting of parame- Set correct data.
DETECT PAR. tor parameter ter for number of speed detection
ERROR setting error pulses.
AL–39 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT Cs Alarm for indi- Detects 1–rotaion signal detection Make 1–rotaion signal ad-
SIGNAL cating failure failure in Cs contouring contorl. justment.
ERROR in detecting Check cable shield status.
1–rotation sig-
nal for Cs con-
touring control
AL–40 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT Cs Alarm for indi- Detects that 1–rotation signal has Make 1–rotaion signal ad-
SIGNAL cating 1–rota- not occurred in Cs contouring con- justment.
DETECT tion signal for trol.
Cs contouring
control not de-
tected
AL–41 SPN_n_ : 1–ROT Alarm for indi- Detects failure in detecting position Make signal adjustment for
POS–CODER cating failure coder 1–rotation signal. signal conversion circuit.
ERROR in detecting Check cable shield status.
position coder
1–rotaion sig-
nal.
AL–42 SPN_n_ : NO 1–ROT. Alarm for indi- Detects that position coder 1–rota- Make 1–rotation signal ad-
POS–CODER cating position tion signal has not issued. justment for signal conver-
DETECT coder 1–rota- sion circuit.
tion signal not
detected
AL–43 SPN_n_ : DISCON. PC Alarm for indi- Detects that main spindle position Check that main spindle
FOR DIF. SP. cating discon- coder signal used for differential position coder signal is
MOD. nection of speed mode is not connected yet (or connected to connector
position coder is disconnected). CN12.
signal for dif-
ferential speed
mode
AL–44 SPN_n_ : CONTROL
CIRCUIT(AD)
ERROR

364
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX A. ALARM LIST

Alarm
Message Meaning Description Remedy
No.
AL–46 SPN_n_ : SCREW Alarm for indi- Detects failure in detecting position Make 1–rotation signal ad-
1–ROT cating failure coder 1–rotation signasl in thread justment for signal conver-
POS–COD. in detecting cutting operation. sion circuit.
ALARM position coder Check cable shield status.
1–rotation sig-
nal in thread
cutting opera-
tion.
AL–47 SPN_n_ : POS–CODER Position coder Detects incorrect position coder sig- Make signal adjustment for
SIGNAL signal ab- nal count operation. signal conversion circuit.
ABNORMAL normality Check cable shield status.
AL–49 SPN_n_ : HIGH CONV. The converted Detects that speed of other spindle Calculate differential
DIF. SPEED differential converted to speed of local spindle speed by multiplying speed
speed is too has exceeded allowable limit in dif- of other spindle by gear ra-
high. ferential mode. tio. Check if calculated val-
ue is not greater than maxi-
mum speed of motor.
AL–50 SPN_n_ : SPNDL Excessive Detects that speed command cal- Calculate motor speed by
CONTROL speed com- culation value exceeded allowable multiplying specified
OVERSPEED mand calcula- range in spindle synchronization spindle speed by gear ra-
tion value in control. tio. Check if calculated
spindle syn- value is not greater than
chronization maximum speed of motor.
control
AL–51 SPN_n_ : LOW VOLT DC Undervoltage Detects that DC power supply volt- Remove cause, then reset
LINK at DC link sec- age of power circuit has dropped alarm.
tion (due to momentary power failure or
loose contact of magnetic contac-
tor).
AL–52 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL ITP signal ab- Detects abnormality in synchroniza- Replace servo amp. PCB.
ABNORMAL I normality I tion signal (ITP signal ) used in soft-
ware.
AL–53 SPN_n_ : ITP SIGNAL ITP signal ab- Detects abnormality in synchroniza- Replace servo amp. PCB.
ABNORMAL II normality II tion signal (ITP signal) used in hard-
ware.
AL–56 SPN_n_ : INNER The cooling The cooling fan in the control circuit Check the turning state of
COOLING FAN fan in the unit section stopped. the cooling fan. Replace
STOP stopped. the cooling fan.
AL–57 SPN_n_ : EX DECEL- Deceleration Abnormal current flowed through the Check the selection of the
ERATION power is too regenerative resistor. regenerative resistor. Al-
POWER high. ternatively, check whether
the cooling fan motor is ro-
tating.
AL–58 SPN_n_ : OVERLOAD IN Overload on The temperature of the radiator of the Eliminate the cause, then
PSM the PSM main main circuit has increased abnor- reset the alarm.
circuit mally. (Cooling fan failure, dirt in the
cooling fan, overload operation, etc.)
AL–59 SPN_n_ : COOLING FAN The PSM cool- The cooling fan of the control circuit Check the turning state of
STOP IN PSM ing fan section stopped. the cooling fan. Replace
stopped. the cooling fan.

365
B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

B  
      

Name Specification Remarks


For 2–slot case (2.4W) A90L–0001–0378 One fan motor per two slots
Fan motor
For 1–slot case (2.4W) A90L–0001–0385#A Two fan motors per three slots
Fan motor A90L–0001–0423#105 For intelligent terminal type 2
A98L–0031–0006 For CNC memory
A98L–0001–0902 For α series absolute pulse coder
Battery for Back–up
Back up
A98L–0031–0017 For intelligent terminal type 2
A02B–0200–K102 For new MMC–IV or intelligent terminal type 2
A60L–0001–0046#7.5R For control unit power supply 7.5A
Power supply fuse A13B–0172–K020 Intelligent terminal type or intelligent terminal type 2
A02B–0207–K100 For new MMC–IV
Back light for 7.2” monochrome LCD A61L–0001–0142#BL
Back light for intelligent terminal type 2 LCD A61L–0001–0163#BL
A98L–0001–0985#A For T series small MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C041#TA, –C120#TA)
A98L–0001–0985#S For T series small MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C041#TAS, –C120#TAS)
A98L–0001–0986#A For T series full–size MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C122#TA
A98L–0001–0986#S For T series full–size MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C122#TAS
A98L–0005–0052#A For T series full–size MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0218–C120#TR, –C121#TR)
A98L–0005–0052#B For T series full–size MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0218–C120#TS, –C121#TS)
Keysheet (sheet type)
A98L–0005–0019#A For M series small MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C041#MA, –C120#MA)
A98L–0005–0019#S For M series small MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C041#MAS, –C120#MAS)
A98L–0005–0003#A For M series full–size MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C122#MA
A98L–0005–0003#S For M series full–size MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0210–C122#MAS
A98L–0005–0052#C For M series full–size MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0218–C120#MR, –C121#MR)
A98L–0005–0052#D For M series full–size MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0218–C120#MS, –C121#MS)
A86L–0001–0235 For T/M series small CRT/MDI
A86L–0001–0216 For T/M series small separate MDI

Keyboard (sheet type) A86L–0001–0217 For T/M series full–size MDI


(Specification : A02B–0210–C122#j)
A86L–0001–0242 For T/M series full–size MDI
(Specification : A02B–0218–C120#j, –C121#j)

366
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX B. LIST OF MAINTENANCE PARTS

Name Specification Remarks


A86L–0001–0173#HT2R For T series horizontal type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C065#TBR)
A86L–0001–0173#HT2S For T series horizontal type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C065#TBS)
A86L–0001–0175#VT2R For T series vertical type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C066#TBR)
A86L–0001–0175#VT2S For T series vertical type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C066#TBS)
A86L–0001–0174#HT2R For T series horizontal type 14” color CRT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C071#TBR)
A86L–0001–0174#HT2S For T series horizontal type 14” color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C071#TBS)
A86L–0001–0175#VT2R For T series vertical type 14” color CRT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C072#TBR)
A86L–0001–0175#VT2S For T series vertical type 14” color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C072#TBS)
Keyboard (membrane)
A86L–0001–0173#HM2R For M series horizontal type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C065#MBR)
A86L–0001–0173#HM2S For M series horizontal type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C065#MBS)
A86L–0001–0175#VM2R For M series vertical type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C066#MBR)
A86L–0001–0175#VM2S For M series vertical type 9.5” color TFT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C066#MBS)
A86L–0001–0174#HM2R For M series horizontal type 14” color CRT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C071#MBR)
A86L–0001–0174#HM2S For M series horizontal type 14” color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C071#MBS)
A86L–0001–0175#VM2R For M series vertical type 14” color CRT/MDI (English key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C072#MBR)
A86L–0001–0175#VM2S For M series vertical type 14” color CRT/MDI (Symbolic key)
(Specification : A02B–0200–C072#MBS)

367
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

C BOOT SYSTEM

                                       
       
                                        
                      
    
          


368
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM

C.1 The boot system load the CNC system software (flash ROM→DRAM),
then starts it so that software can be executed.
OVERVIEW The boot system provides the following maintenance functions for the
CNC:
(1) Registering a file in flash ROM
S Reads a file from a memory card, in FAT format, into flash ROM.
(2) Checking a file (series and edition) in flash ROM
(3) Deleting a file from flash ROM
(4) Batch saving and restoration of files of parameters and programs
backed up by battery (SRAM area), to and from a memory card
(5) Saving a file in flash ROM to a memory card
(6) Formatting of a memory card
(7) Deleting a file from a memory card
This appendix describes the activation of the boot system, as well as
the screen displays and operation for the functions listed above.

NOTE
This control unit supports the use of a memory card as an
input/output device. When a flash card is used, however,
data can be written to a FANUC–recommended card only.
Data can be read in the same way as with an ordinary SRAM
card, provided the data has been saved in FAT format. Note
that, when a flash card is used, the card capacity is reduced
by 128KB.
See the order list for details of the supported memory card
types.

369
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

C.2
STARTING AND
EXITING FROM THE
SYSTEM MONITOR

C.2.1 Start the system monitor as follows:


Starting the System (1) Turn on the power of the CNC while holding down the right–most two
Monitor soft keys on the CRT/ MDI panel (the shaded keys in the figure below).
When the system monitor is started, the main menu, shown below,
appears. Keep the soft keys held down until this main menu appears.

FANUC Series 21 SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 01

1.SYSTEM DATA LOADING


2.SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3.SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4.SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5.SRAM DATA BACKUP
CRT 6.MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7.MEMORY CARD FORMAT

9.END

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.
⇑ Ă⇑
[SELECT] [ YES ] [ NO ] [ UP ] [ DOWN ]
Turn on the power while hold-
ing down these two soft keys. <Main menu>

(2) To execute a function, position the cursor to the corresponding item


on the menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
The table below lists each menu item and the corresponding
function.
Item Function See
Section
1 SYSTEM DATA LOADING Loading a file from a memory card into C.3.1
flash memory
2 SYSTEM DATA CHECK Listing the names of the files stored in C.3.2
flash memory
3 SYSTEM DATA DELETE Deleting a file from flash memory C.3.3
4 SYSTEM DATA SAVE Outputting a file, stored in flash C.3.4
memory, to a memory card
5 SRAM DATA BACKUP Backing up all data in SRAM (such as C.3.5
parameters and programs) to a
memory card as a single backup file,
or restoring the backupfile, stored in
the memory card, to SRAM
6 MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE Deleting a file from a memory card C.3.6
7 MEMORY CARD FORMAT Initializing a memory card to comply C.3.7
with MS–DOS format
8 END Exiting from the system monitor and C.2.2
activating the CNC

(3) Refer to the section listed in the table for details of each function.

370
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM

C.2.2 Exit from the system monitor and activate the CNC, as follows:
Exiting from the (1) Position the cursor to 9. END on the main menu by using the [UP]
System Monitor or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
(Activating the CNC)
SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU 01

1.SYSTEM DATA LOADING


2.SYSTEM DATA CHECK
3.SYSTEM DATA DELETE
4.SYSTEM DATA SAVE
5.SRAM DATA BACKUP
6.MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE
7.MEMORY CARD FORMAT

9.END

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT MENU AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(2) The system monitor displays message “ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES
OR NO.” If your selection is as you intended, press the [YES] soft key.
Pressing the [NO] soft key returns the processing to step (1).
*** MESSAGE ***
ARE YOU SURE ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

When the [YES] soft key is pressed, the system software for the
CNC is invoked to activate the CNC, in the same way as at ordinary
power–on.

371
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

C.3
SYSTEM MONITOR
FUNCTIONS

C.3.1 <Function>
Loading a File from a A file such as a PMC sequence (ladder) program or P–CODE macro
Memory Card into program can be loaded from a memory card into flash memory.
Flash Memory <Procedure>
(SYSTEM DATA (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen.
LOADING Screen) Position the cursor to 1. SYSTEM DATA LOADING on the main
menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
The SYSTEM DATA LOADING screen appears, listing the names
of all the files stored in the memory card.

SYSTEM DATA LOADING 1/1 Page number/ total number of


pages
FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO31. MEM
MACRO12. MEM
MACRO13. MEM Lists the names of the files in the
MACRO14. MEM memory card.
LADDER. MEM
END

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

To display the preceding page To display the next page

(2) Select the file to be loaded.


Position the cursor to the name of the file to be loaded by using the
[UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.

NOTE
1 Up to eight file names can be displayed on a single screen.
If the memory card contains nine or more files, the files are
listed using two or more screens. Pressing the right–most
soft key displays the next screen. Pressing the left–most
soft key displays the previous screen. In such a case, menu
item END is displayed for the last screen.
2 To return to the main menu, position the cursor to END then
press the [SELECT] soft key.

372
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM

(3) The following message appears:


*** MESSAGE ***
LOADING OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

To load the file, press the [YES] soft key. Pressing the [NO] soft key
cancels loading and returns the processing to step (2).
Pressing the [YES] soft key starts loading of the file from the
memory card into flash memory.
*** MESSAGE ***
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
READ DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]


*** MESSAGE ***
LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.
F–ROM PROGRAM
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(4) When loading has been completed normally, the following message
appears. Pressing the [SELECT] soft key returns the screen shown
in step (2).
*** MESSAGE ***
LOADING COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

NOTE
3 If an error occurs during loading, an error message is
displayed. See Section C.4, “Error messages and
corresponding corrective actions” for details.

(5) To load another file, repeat steps (2) to (4).


Once all the necessary files have been loaded, position the cursor to
END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.
*2 File names in flash memory
Files loaded into flash memory are automatically named,
depending on the file type, as follows:
File name File type
PMC–RA PMC sequence program (ladder)
PCD xxxx P–CODE macro program
xxxx varies with the file size (specified with compile param-
eter No. 9000).

373
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

C.3.2 <Function>
Listing the Names of The names of the files stored in flash memory can be listed on the screen.
the Files Stored in <Procedure>
Flash Memory (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen.
(SYSTEM DATA CHECK Position the cursor to 2. SYSTEM DATA CHECK on the main menu
Screen) by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT]
soft key.
The SYSTEM DATA CHECK screen appears, listing the names of
all the files in flash memory.

SYSTEM DATA CHECK

FILE DIRECTORY ( FLASH ROM : 256KB) Lists the names of all the files
1 PMC–RA ( 1) stored in flash memory.
2 PCD 128K ( 1) The size of of each file is indicated
END in parentheses after the file name
(in units of 128K bytes).

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT END AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(2) Position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key,
then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.

NOTE
The 21–MB and 21–TB (control unit B) holds the software
for controlling the CNC and servo system as well as user
files such as a PMC sequence program and P–CODE
macro program, in flash memory. These files are called
system files.
The following, indicated in the file name list of the flash
memory, are system files: NC BASIC, NC1 OPTN, DG
SERVO, PMCOBAS, OPTLANG, LR BASIC, and
PMCBBAS.
The system file is protected and cannot be deleted. The
protection prevents the operator from deleting the file by
mistake. The system file cannot be saved to a memory card.

374
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM

C.3.3 <Function>
Deleting a File from A file can be deleted from flash memory.
Flash Memory <Procedure>
(SYSTEM DATA (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen.
DELETE Screen) Position the cursor to 3. SYSTEM DATA DELETE on the main
menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
The SYSTEM DATA DELETE screen appears, listing the names of
all the files stored in flash memory.

SYSTEM DATA DELETE

FILE DIRECTORY
1 PMC–RA ( 1) Lists the names of all the files in
2 PCD 128K ( 1) flash memory.
END

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(2) Select the file to be deleted.


Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted by using the
[UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
(3) The following message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

To delete the file, press the [YES] soft key. To abandon the deletion,
press the [NO] soft key.
(4) Pressing the [YES] soft key starts deletion of the file. The message
“DELETING ROM FILE IN FLASH MEMORY” is displayed as
the file is being deleted. When deletion has been completed
normally, the following message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(5) Press the [SELECT] soft key.


To delete another file, repeat steps (2) to (5).
(6) Position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key,
then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.

375
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

C.3.4 <Function>
Outputting a File, A file stored in flash memory can be output to a memory card.
Stored in Flash <Procedure>
Memory, to a Memory (1) Display the SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen.
Card Position the cursor to 4. SYSTEM DATA SAVE on the main menu
(SYSTEM DATA SAVE by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT]
soft key.
Screen)
The SYSTEM DATA SAVE screen appears, listing the names of the
files stored in flash memory.

SYSTEM DATA SAVE

FILE DIRECTORY
1 PMC RA ( 1) Lists the names of all the files
2 PCD 128K ( 1) stored in flash memory.
END

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(2) Select the file to be output.


Position the cursor to the name of the file to be output by using the
[UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
(3) The following message appears. To output the file, press the [YES]
soft key. To cancel output, press the [NO] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***
SAVE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Pressing the [YES] soft key starts output of the file. The following
message is displayed during output. The name of the file (*3) being
output to the memory card is displayed under the message.
*** MESSAGE ***
WRITING FLASH ROM FILE TO MEMORY CARD.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RA. 000
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

NOTE
To output a P–CODE macro program for which a password
has been specified, you must enter that password. In such
a case, “INPUT PASSWORD” is displayed. Enter the
password using soft keys [1] to [5].

376
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM

*** MESSAGE ***


INPUT PASSWORD. ?????

[ 1 ][ 2 ][ 3 ][ 4 ][ 5 ]

(4) When output has been completed normally, the following message
appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
FILE SAVE COMPELETE. HIT SELECT KEY.
SAVE FILE NAME : PMC RA. 000
[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(5) Press the [SELECT] key to return to the screen shown in step (2).
(6) To output another file, repeat steps (2) to (5).
Once you have output all the necessary files, position the cursor to
END by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.
*3 Names of files stored on a memory card
Files output to a memory card are automatically named according
to their file type, as follows:
Name of a file Name of a file
stored in flash stored on a
memory memory card
PMC sequence program PMC–RA PMC–RA.XXX
P–CODE macro program PCD 128K PCD_128K.XXX
PCD 256K PCD_256K.XXX
PCD 05M PCD_05M.XXX
PCD 10M PCD_10M.XXX

XXX indicates a file name extension, automatically selected


from 000 to 031.
For example, when file PMC–RA is output to a memory card, it
becomes PMC–RA.000 on the memory card, provided the
memory card does not already contain a file named PMC–RA.*.
If the memory card already contains a file named PMC–RA. 000,
the output file is named PMC–RA.001.
In the same way, each output file is named by incrementing the
extension by one, relative to the largest existing extension of the
files stored on the memory card. If any smaller extension is not
current being used, however, as may occur when a file is deleted
for example, the output file is assigned that extension. The
displayed file names should be carefully checked when several
files, having the same names but different extensions, are output
to a single memory card.

377
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

C.3.5 <Function>
Backing up SRAM Data All data in SRAM (such as parameters and programs, which are retained
even when power is not applied to the CNC), can be backed up to a
to a Memory Card and memory card as a single backup file. Data can be restored from the backup
Subsequently file to SRAM.
Restoring Data from a
<Procedure>
Memory Card
(SRAM DATA BACKUP (1) Display the SRAM DATA BACKUP screen.
Position the cursor to 5. SRAM DATA BACKUP on the main menu
Screen)
by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT]
soft key.
The following screen appears:

SRAM DATA BACKUP


1. SRAM BACKUP ( CNC –> MEMORY CARD )
2. RESTORE SRAM ( MEMORY CARD –> CNC )
END

SRAM SIZE : 512KB ( BASIC + OPTION )


FILE NAME :

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT MENU AND HIT [SELECT] KEY

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(2)–1 When backing up SRAM data to a memory card


1) Position the cursor to 1. SRAM BACKUP then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
2) The following message appears. Pressing the [YES] soft key
starts backup.

*** MESSAGE ***


BACKUP SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

The following message is displayed during backup. The name of


the backup file (*4) being created on the memory card is
displayed in the FILE NAME field.

SRAM SIZE : 512KB ( BASIC + OPTION ) Name of


FILE NAME : SRAM512K. 000 the backup file

*** MESSAGE ***


SRAM DATA WRITING TO MEMORY CARD.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

378
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM

3) When backup has been completed normally, the following


message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
SRAM BACKUP COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(2)–2 When restoring SRAM data from the backup file


1) Position the cursor to 2. RESTORE SRAM, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
2) Select the file from which data is to be restored by using the [UP]
or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] or [YES] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***
SELECT RESTORE FILE OR UP, DOWN KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

3) The following message appears. Pressing the [YES] soft key


starts restoration.
*** MESSAGE ***
RESTORE SRAM DATA OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

The following message is displayed during data restoration.


*** MESSAGE ***
RESTORE SRAM DATA FROM MEMORY CARD.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

When restoration has been completed normally, the following


message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
RESTORE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(3) Press the [SELECT] key to return to the main menu.


*4 Name of the backup file
The backup file is automatically named depending on the SRAM
capacity of the CNC.
File name SRAM capacity
SRAM256K.XXX 256K bytes
SRAM512K.XXX 512K bytes
XXX indicates a file name extension, automatically selected from
000 to 031, in the same way as when a file in flash memory is output
to a memory card (see Subsec.C.3.4).
NOTE
If data such as parameters was restored from a memory
card to SRAM in a system using an absolute pulse coder,
set bit 4 (APZ) of parameter No.1815 to 0, and set the
reference point again.

379
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

C.3.6 <Function>
Deleting a File from a A file can be deleted from a memory card.
Memory Card <Procedure>
(MEMORY CARD FILE (1) Display the MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen.
DELETE Screen) Position the cursor to 6. MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE on the
main menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
The MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE screen appears, listing the
names of the files stored on the memory card.

MEMORY CARD FILE DELETE 1/1

FILE DIRECTORY
MACRO01. MEM Lists the names of the files stored
MACRO01. MEM on the memory card.
LADDER. MEM
END

*** MESSAGE ***


SELECT FILE AND HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

NOTE
If the memory card contains nine or more files, the files are
listed over two or more screens. Pressing the right–most or
left–most soft key displays the subsequent or previous
screen, respectively.

(2) Select the file to be deleted.


Position the cursor to the name of the file to be deleted, by using the
[UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
(3) The following message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
DELETE OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

To delete the file, press the [YES] soft key. To cancel deletion, press
the [NO] soft key.
(4) Pressing the [YES] soft key starts deletion of the file. When deletion
has been completed normally, the following message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
DELETE COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

380
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM

(5) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the screen shown in step
(2).
(6) To delete another file, repeat steps (2) to (5) . Once all deletion has
been completed, position the cursor to END by using the [UP] or
[DOWN] soft key, then press the [SELECT] soft key to return to
the main menu.

C.3.7 <Function>
Formatting a Memory A memory card can be initialized to conform to MS–DOS format.
Card Memory cards require formatting before they can be used. SRAM
memory cards also require reformatting when they have lost their data due
to failure of their battery.
<Procedure>
(1) Position the cursor to 7. MEMORY CARD FORMAT on the main
menu by using the [UP] or [DOWN] soft key, then press the
[SELECT] soft key.
(2) The following message appears. To format the memory card, press
the [YES] soft key. To cancel formatting, press the [NO] soft key.
*** MESSAGE ***
MEMORY CARD FORMAT OK ? HIT YES OR NO.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

Pressing the [YES] soft key starts formatting. The following


message is displayed during formatting:
*** MESSAGE ***
FORMATTING MEMORY CARD.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

When formatting has been completed normally, the following


message appears:
*** MESSAGE ***
FORMAT COMPLETE. HIT SELECT KEY.

[ SELECT ][ YES ][ NO ][ UP ][ DOWN ]

(3) Press the [SELECT] soft key to return to the main menu.

381
C. BOOT SYSTEM APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

C.4 This section describes the error messages which may be displayed when
the system monitor function is used.
ERROR MESSAGES
AND
CORRESPONDING
CORRECTIVE
ACTIONS
Error message Description
D DELETE ERROR Deletion a file from flash memory has failed.
If subsequent retry of deletion also fails, the flash memory may be dam-
aged. In such a case, replace the F–ROM module.
DEVICE ERROR (CNC x) Write to flash memory has failed. Turn off the power and retry. If write still
fails, the flash memory may be damaged. In such a case, replace the
F–ROM module.
F FILE SAVE ERROR. Writing of a file to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card
is normal (Note 1).
FLASH MEMORY NO SPACE The available flash memory is insufficient to enable writing of the selected
file. Replace the F–ROM module with another having greater available
capacity.
FORMAT ERROR. Formatting of the memory card has failed. The memory card type is invalid.
(Only SRAM memory cards can be formatted. Flash memory cards cannot
be formatted. )
I ILLEGAL FORMAT FILE The selected file is of an unsupported format.
INCORRECT PASSWORD The entered password is incorrect. Enter the correct password.
L LOADING ERROR. An error occurred during loading of a file to flash memory. Do not touch the
memory card while loading a file.
M MAX EXTENSION OVER. The maximum file name extension (031) has been reached. Delete any
unnecessary files from the memory card.
MEMORY CARD BATTERY ALARM. The memory cardG s battery has failed. Replace the battery.
MEMORY CARD FULL. The memory card is full. Delete any unnecessary files from the memory
card.
MEMORY CARD MOUNT ERROR. Access to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card is nor-
mal (Note 1).
MEMORY CARD NOT EXIST. No memory card is inserted into the slot.
Alternatively, the mounted memory card has not been pushed fully home.
MEMORY CARD PROTECTED. Write to the memory card has been specified but the write protect switch
is set. Disable the write protect switch.
MEMORY CARD RESET ERROR. Access to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card is nor-
mal (Note 1).
MEMORY CARD WRITE ERROR. Writing of a file to the memory card has failed. Check that the memory card
is normal (Note 1).
S SRAM DATA BACKUP ERROR. Writing of backup data to the memory card has failed. Check that the
memory card is normal (Note 1).
SRAM DATA RESTORE ERROR. Restoring of backup data to SRAM has failed. Determine whether the
backup data has been corrupted by, for example, checking the file size.
SRAM256K. * NOT FOUND. No backup file for the 256KB SRAM is found. A backup file is necessary
to restore the contents of SRAM.
SRAM512K. * NOT FOUND. No backup file for the 512KB SRAM is found. A backup file is necessary
to restore the contents of SRAM.

382
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM

NOTE
1 Check that the memory card is correctly inserted into its slot.
Check that the memory card is compatible with the system
monitor function and that it has been normally formatted.
Check whether the battery in the memory card has failed or
whether any electrical damage has been caused to the card.
2 When an SRAM parity error is detected in SRAM backup
during booting
All CNCs are delivered with no parity errors after the SRAM
areas are factory–cleared. A parity error may occur in the
SRAM area, however, if the CNC is subjected to physical
shock in transit or if the backup battery is exhausted if the CNC
is left unused for one year or longer. The data retained in the
SRAM area in which a parity error is detected may be
adversely affected. The CNC, however, may not use the
whole SRAM area. The CNC does not detect a parity error
before it accesses the corresponding area. The CNC may
operate normally if a parity error occurs in an area which the
CNC does not access. The boot SRAM backup function,
however, reads the entire SRAM area. The function may
detect a parity error during backup while the CNC is operating
normally. Strictly speaking, if this occurs, the SRAM data of the
CNC is adversely affected, and the boot SRAM backup
function cannot backup the data. Meanwhile, the CNC may
still be operating normally. The recommended procedure
involves backing up the necessary data, using a Floppy
Cassette or Handy File, clearing all the data, and restoring the
backup data to the CNC. Once all the data has been cleared,
the parity error is eliminated. Then, the boot SRAM backup
function can be used.

383
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
D. MANUAL APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

D MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S MANUAL

                                          
      
                             
                                   

                        


                                   

384
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX MANUAL

D.1 It is possible to backup the mocro file and ladder program in the flash
memory module of CNC, and the SRAM area in the CNC to the flash
OUTLINE memory card by using this function.
This functions is available in the following software series/edition
D In case of Series 21/210–MB (DDA1 series) and Series 21/210–TB
(Control unit B) (DEA1 series) Boot function software (60M2/03
edition or later)is required.
D In case of Series 21–TB (Control unit A) (DE01 or DE02 series)
System software includes Boot function software.
System software (DE01/08 edition or later)
D In case of Series 21–MB (D201 series)
Boot function software (60M0/09 edition or later) is required.
The restrictions of this function are explained at the following.

385
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
D. MANUAL APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

D.2 At present, the writing method of chip (flash memory) wich is built in
flash memory card is different. The method is depends on the maker and
DISTINCTION OF the product. Therefore, it is difficult to correspond to all flash memory
SUPPORTED CARD card. The following kinds of flash memory card which Intel made are
AND UNSUPPORTED supported at this time.
CARD D Intel Series 2 flash memory cards (or compatible cards.)
It is impossible to write the flash memory card, in which the flash
memories expect Intel are used for a built–in chip, by BOOT SYSTEM.
It is possible to read unsupported flash memory card which is
formatted/written with personal computer by BOOT SYSTEM.

386
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX MANUAL

D.3
RESTRICTIONS

D.3.1 Any kind of card has to be conformed to TYPE 1 to 2 of PCMCIA (The


Standard of Memory Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) 2.0 (or later)
or TYPE 1 to 2 of JEIDA (Japanese Electronics Development
Card Association) 4.0 (or later.)
Memory Card Specification

In all the Memory Cards conformed to PC CARD STANDARD,


if the Memory Card supports Vcc (Power supply voltage)
values of 3.3V, you can not use it for these CNCs.
D Memory Card supports 3.3V
The Memory Card doesn’t physically fit into the socket on
the CNC.
D Memory Card supports both 3.3V and 5V. (Automatic
voltage sense type)
The Memory Card fits into the socket physically. But it is
not sllowed the insertion with the socket electrically. If
such a card is inserted and then power–up, the Memory
Card or CNC may take electrical damage. Don’t use this
type Memory Card for these CNCs.

D.3.2
Kind of Memory Card NAME CAPACITY SPECIFICATION NUMBER
256KB A87L–0001–0150#256K
JEIDA V4.1 512KB A87L–0001–0150#512K
SRAM memory
card
ca d 1MB A87L–0001–0150#1M
2MB A87L–0001–0150#2M
JEIDA V4.1
Flash memory 4MB A87L–0001–0153#4M
card

NOTE
Then above–mentioned capacity is the number before
formatting. After formatting, the capacity decreases a little.
Therefore, it is necessary to prepare the memory card with
bigger capacity than the size of the data or the program.

[Example] The memory card of 1MB or more is need for storing 512KB
data.

Flash memory card


SRAM Card
Supported card Unsupported card
Reading a file f f f
Formatting a card f f ×
Writing a file f f ×

387
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
D. MANUAL APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

Flash memory card


SRAM Card
Supported card Unsupported card
Deleting a file f × ×
Listing files f f f

D.3.3 In BOOT SYSTEM, the memory card is formatted by the method of the
Method of Format of FAT file system. Additionally, there is a format method of the flash file
system. There is no compatibility between FAT file system and the flash
Memory Card file system, so they can not use the function of Read and List each other.

D.3.4 It is impossible to delete of each file individually. It is necessary to delete


File Operation in Flash the file in the entire memory card. For that, the following file operations
are impossible.
Memory Card
D To delete the file which has already exist.
D To change the file name.
D To write again with the same name.

D.3.5 When the flash memory card is written in BOOT SYSTEM, last 128KB
The Capacity of Flash of the flash memory card will be used as a buffer area. Therefore, the
capacity of the flash memory card decreases 128KB.
Memory Card

D.3.6 CardPro formats the flash memory card with the flash file system in a
Notice when Flash default setting.When you format the flash memory card with CardPro,
please format by following command.
Memory Card is
A:CPFORMAT drive:/F:FLASHFAT/NOCIS
Formatted with
CardPro

D.3.7
When Flash Memory RAMU–ZOU CardPro

Card Formatted with Reading a file f f


Adding a file Not supported function ×
BOOT SYSTEM is Used
Listing files f f
with Each Company
Device

D.3.8
When Flash Memory RAMU–ZOU CardPro

Card Formatted with Reading a file f f


Adding a file f ×
Each Company Device
Listing files f f
is Used with BOOT
SYSTEM NOTE
1 Ramu–Zou is a memory card reader/writer that is made by
ADTEK SYSTEM SCIENCE in Japan.
2 CardPro is a memory card reader/writer that is made by
Data I/O.

388
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX MANUAL

D.3.9
Names and Function of
Memory Components
WRITE
PROTECT
SWITCH

BATTERY
CASE

Name Function
1 Write Protect The memory card can be protected from writing data
Switch into the memory card by setting of the write protect
switch.

Non Write Protect Write protect

2 Battery Case Incase of the SRAM memory card, the battery case
includes the battery for data backup.
The flash memory card has no battery case.

389
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
D. MANUAL APPENDIX B–62705EN/03

D.4
OPERATING OF
MEMORY CARD

D.4.1 (1) Insert the memory card in the direction shown in the figure through
Connection of Memory the memory card insertion slot.
Card (2) The memory card cannot be inserted with wrong side, because the
memory card has insertion guides.
Take care the direction of the memory card.

D.4.2 Pull the memory card out in the direction shown in the figure.
Disconnection of
Memory Card

390
D. MEMORY CARD OPERATOR’S
B–62705EN/03 APPENDIX MANUAL

D.5
BATTERY CHANGE
D.5.1 CR2325 or equivalent battery can be used for the SRAM memory card.
Battery

D.5.2 The battery life is as follows.


Battery Life But the battery life in the table is only reference data, because the battery
life is changeable by the change of ambient temperature.
Drawing Number Part’s Number Battery Life
A87L–0001–0150#512K MB98A90923–20 about 6 months
A87L–0001–0150#1M MB98A91023–20 about 1 year
A87L–0001–0150#2M MB98A91123–20 about 6 months

D.5.3 (1) Pull the battery case out with pushing projection.
Procedure of Battery
Change

(2) Change the battery.


“+” mark of the battery must be set to “+” mark of the battery case.

BATTERY
CASE

(3) Put the battery case back in the memory card, and make sere
read/write operation.

391
B–62705EN/03 Index
[A] Alarm 970 (NMI Alarm in PMC Control Module),
331
A02B–0207–C020, A02B–0207–C021, Alarm 971 (NMI Alarm in SLC), 332
A02B–0207–C022, 123
Alarm 972 (NMI Alarm in Other Board), 333
A16B–2203–0180, 129
Alarm 973 (NMI Alarm by Unknown Cause), 334
AC Spindle (Analog Interface), 268
Alarm Display, 27
AC Spindle (Serial Interface), 257, 258
Alarm History Screen, 27
Action Against Noise, 170
Alarm List, 337
Address, 203
Alram 411 (Execessive Position Error During Move),
Address List, 204 313
Adjusting Reference Position (Dog Method), 253 Alram 416 (Disconnection Alarm), 316
Adjusting the Color Liquid Crystal Display and Associated Parameters, 256
Plasma Display, 161 Automatic Operation Cannot be Done, 284
Adjusting the Flat Display, 161 Automatic Setting of Standard Parameters, 267
Alarm 300 (Request for Reference Position Return),
302
Alarm 301 to 305 (Absolute Pulse Coder is Faulty),
303
[B]
Backing Up SRAM Data to a Memory Card and Sub-
Alarm 306 to 308 (Absolute Pulse Coder Battery is sequently Restoring Data from a Memory Card
Low), 304 (SRAM DATA BACKUP Screen), 378
Alarm 350 (Serial α Pulse Coder is Abnormal), 305 Battery, 391
Alarm 351 (Serial α Pulse Coder Communication is Battery Change, 391
Abnormal), 306
Battery Life, 391
Alarm 400 (Overload), 307
BIOS Setup, 90, 96
Alarm 401 (*Drdy Signal Turned off), 309
BIOS Setup of Intelligent Terminals 1 and 2, 96
Alarm 404 and 405 (*Drdy Signal Turned on), 310
Bios Setup of the MMC–IV, 90
Alarm 410 (Excessive Position Error Amount During
Stop), 312 Block Diagram, 268
Alarm 414 (Digital Servo System is Abnormal), 315 Boot System, 368
Built–in Debug Function, 216
Alarm 417 (Digital Servo System is Abnormal), 317
Alarm 700 (Overheat at Control Side), 323
Alarm 704 (Spindle Speed Fluctuation Detection
Alarm), 318 [C]
Alarm 749 (Serial Spindle Communication Error), 319 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 174
Alarm 750 (Spindle Serial Link Cannot be Started), Calculation of S Analog Voltage and Related Parame-
320 ters, 269
Alarm 751,761 (Spindle Alarm), 322 Clearing Alarm History, 27
CNC Status Display, 56
Alarm 85 to 87 (Reader/Puncher Interface Alarm),
294 Configuration Display of Software, 23
Alarm 90 (Reference Position Return is Abnormal), Configuration of PCBs, 24
300
Configuration of Printed Circuit Board and LED Dis-
Alarm 900 (ROM Parity Error), 324 play, 106
Alarm 910 to 913 (RAM Parity), 325 Configuration Switch, 121
Alarm 920 and 921 (Watch Dog or RAM Parity), 326 Confirming the Parameters Required for Data Output,
178
Alarm 924 (Servo Module Mounting Error), 328
Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control
Alarm 930 (CPU Error), 329 Unit, 172
Alarm 950 (PMC System Alarm), 330 Connection of Memory Card, 390

i–1
Index B–62705EN/03

Contents Displayed, 46 [G]


Control Unit P.C.B., 142 General of Handware, 104
Corrective Action for Failures, 273 General of Interface, 201
Correspondence Between Operation Mode and Param- Graphic of Wave Diagnosis Data, 61
eters on Spindle Tuning Screen, 265
Graphic Screen (M Series), 20
Cycle Start LED Signal has Turned off, 291
Graphic Screen (T Series), 20
Ground, 171

[D]
Data Input/Output on the All IO Screen, 186 [H]
Data Sampling for Storage Type Waveform Diagnosis, Handle Operation (MPG) Cannot be Done, 282
63
Hardware, 103
Deleting a File from a Memory Card (MEMORY
CARD FILE DELETE Screen), 380 Help Function, 44
Help Screen, 19
Deleting a File from Flash Memory (SYSTEM DATA
DELETE Screen), 375 How to Begin the “Set–Up”, 91
Deletion of External Operator Messages Record, 28 How to Begin the Set–Up, 97
Details of the Set–up Items, 99 How to End the “Set–Up”, 95
Digital Servo, 246 How to End the Set–up, 102
Disconnection of Memory Card, 390 How to Replace the Batteries, 150
How to Replace the Modules, 146
Display and Operation, 1
How to Replace the Monochrome Liquid Crystal Dis-
Display Method, 24, 44, 69, 219, 260 play, 162
Displaying Diagnostic Page, 46 HSSB Interface Board, 120
Displaying Servo Tuning Screen, 250
Distinction of Supported Card and Unsupported Card,
386 [I]
Dogless Reference Position Setting, 255 I/O Printed Circuit Board, 113
Initial Setting Servo Parameters, 247
Input and Output of Data, 175
[E] Inputting and Outputting Floppy Files, 195
Environmental Requirement, 166 Inputting and Outputting Offset Data, 193
Error Messages and Corresponding Corrective Inputting and Outputting Parameters, 192
Actions, 382 Inputting and Outputting Programs, 188
Execution Period of PMC, 218 Inputting and Outputting the Operation History Data,
Exiting from the System Monitor (Activating the 39
CNC), 371 Inputting CNC Parameters, 182
External Operator Messages Record, 28 Inputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 184
Inputting Part Programs, 185
Inputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount, 184
[F] Inputting PMC Parameters, 183
File Operation in Flash Memory Card, 388 Inputting Tool Compensation Amount, 185
For Lathe, 259 Inputting/ Outputting Data, 178
Formatting a Memory Card, 381 Insertion, 146
Intelligent Terminal, 132
Function Keys and Soft Keys, 2
Intelligent Terminal 2, 137

i–2
B–62705EN/03 Index

Interface Between NC and PMC, 200 [N]


Investigating the Conditions under which Failure
Occurred, 273 Names and Function of Memory Components, 389
No Display Appears at Power–up, 293
No Manual Operation Nor Automatic Operation Can
be Executed, 275
[J] Noise Suppressor, 173
Jog Operation Cannot be Done, 279 Notes, 29, 43, 68, 89
Notice when Flash Memory Card is Formatted with
CardPro, 388
[K]
Keys Used for Operation on the Set–Up Screen, 90,
96 [O]
Kind of Memory Card, 387 Offset/Setting Screen (M Series), 14
Offset/Setting Screen (T Series), 12
Operating Monitor, 69
[L] Operating of Memory Card, 390
Operation, 255
LED Display, 122
Operation History, 30
List of Alarm Codes, 338
Option 1 Board, 117
List of Alarms (PMC), 356
Others, 144
List of Maintenance Parts, 366
Outline of Spindle Control, 258, 268
List of Operations, 71
Outputting a File, Stored in Flash Memory, to a
List of Signals by Each Mode, 237 Memory Card (SYSTEM DATA SAVE Screen), 376
List of Unit and Printed Circuit Board, 142 Outputting CNC Parameters, 179
Listing the Names of the Files Stored in Flash Outputting Custom Macro Common Variables, 194
Memory (SYSTEM DATA CHECK Screen), 374 Outputting Custom Macro Variable Values, 181
Loader Control Board, 118 Outputting Part Program, 181
Loading a File from a Memory Card into Flash Outputting Pitch Error Compensation Amount, 180
Memory (SYSTEM DATA LOADING Screen), 372
Outputting PMC Parameters, 180
Loading of Software, 21
Outputting Tool Compensation Amount, 181
Outputting Waveform Diagnosis Data (Storage Type),
65
[M]
Main PCB, 106
Maintenance of Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger, 163
[P]
Memory Card Operator’s Manual, 384 Parameter, 29, 79
Parameter Input/Output, 87
Memory Display (M.SRCH), 228
Parameter Setting, 30, 250
Message Screen, 19
Parameters, 70
Method a of Gear Change for Machining Center, 259
Parts Layout, 120
Method B of Gear Change for Machining Center
(PRM 3705#2=1), 259 PMC PRM Screen, 232
Method of Format of Memory Card, 388 PMC Screen, 219

MMC–IV PCB, 123 PMCDGN Screen, 224


PMCLAD Screen, 220
Module Configuration Screen, 25
Position Screen, 3

i–3
Index B–62705EN/03

Power Motion Manager, 79 Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Power Supply, 168 HELP , 19
Power Supply Printed Circuit Board, 116
Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Procedure of Battery Change, 391
MESSAGE , 19
Program Screen, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10
Soft key transition triggered by the function key
OFFSET
SETTING , 12, 14
[R] Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Removing, 146
POS ,3
Replace the Battery for Memory Back Up, 150
Replacing Batteries for Absolute Pulse Coder Soft key transition triggered by the function key
(α Series Servo Amplifier Module), 152 PROG (When the soft key [BG–EDT] is pressed in
Replacing Batteries for Separate Absolute Pulse all modes), 10
Coder, 152
Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Replacing the Battery for Intelligent Terminal, 155
PROG in the EDIT mode, 6
Replacing the Battery for New MMC–IV, 154
Replacing the Fan for Intelligent Terminal, 157 Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Replacing the Fan Motor, 156 PROG in the HNDL, JOG, or REF mode, 9
Replacing the Fan Motor for Control Unit, 156
Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Replacing the Fuse for LCD, 149
PROG in the MDI mode, 8
Replacing the Fuses, 147
Replacing the Fuses for Intelligent Terminal 2, 148 Soft key transition triggered by the function key
Replacing the Fuses for New MMC–IV, 147 PROG in the MEM mode, 4
Replacing the Fuses for Power Supply of Control
Unit, 147 Soft key transition triggered by the function key

Replacing the LCD Backlight for Display, 158


PROG in the TJOG or THDL mode, 9
Restrictions, 387 Soft key transition triggered by the function key
SYSTEM
, 16

[S] Soft Keys, 2


Software Configuration Screen, 25
Screen Display, 27, 28, 31, 80
Specification, 202
Screen Displayed Immediately After Power is Turned
on, 21 Specification of PMC, 202
Separating Signal Lines, 170 Spindle Alarms (Serial Spindle), 361
Servo Tuning Screen, 250 Spindle Monitor Screen, 263
Spindle Setting and Tuning Screen, 260
Setting Input/Output–Related Parameters, 187
Spindle Setting Screen, 260
Setting Module Screen, 23
Spindle Tuning Screen, 261
Setting Parameters, 57
Standard of Memory Card, 387
Setting Parameters for Input/Output, 176
Starting and Exiting from the System Monitor, 370
Setting the Input Signal or Output Signal to be
Recorded in the Operation History, 35 Starting the System Monitor, 370
System Block Diagram, 121
Slot Status Display, 22
System Configuration Screen, 24
Soft key transition triggered by the function key
System Monitor Functions, 372
GRAPH , 20
System Monitor Screen, 21

i–4
B–62705EN/03 Index

System Reserve Area of Internal Relay, 217 [W]


System Screen, 16 Warning Screen Displayed When an Option is
Changed, 76
Warning Screen Displayed when System Software is
Replaced (System Label Check Error), 78
Wave form Diagnostic Function, 57
[T]
Waveform Diagnostic Parameter Screen, 58
The Capacity of Flash Memory Card, 388 When Flash Memory Card Formatted with BOOT
SYSTEM is Used with Each Company Device, 388
Troubleshooting, 272
When Flash Memory Card Formatted with Each Com-
Tuning S Analog Voltage (D/A Converter), 271 pany Device is Used with BOOT SYSTEM, 388

i–5
Revision Record

FANUC   


 MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–62705EN)

D Addition of Series 21–TB and 210–TB.


03 Oct., ’97
D Addition of descriptions of intelligent terminal.

D APPENDIX 1, APPENDIX 2, APPENDIX 4, are deleted.


D Main board A16–2202–0900 and Series 210–MB are
02 Sep., ’95
added.
D Boot system is added.

01 Jan., ’95

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents


· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.

· All specifications and designs


are subject to change without
notice.

Вам также может понравиться